Krone BA BiG M 450 CV (BM105-14) Operating Instructions


Add to my manuals
402 Pages

advertisement

Krone BA BiG M 450 CV (BM105-14) Operating Instructions | Manualzz

Original operating instructions

Document number: 150000762_08_us

Version: 04/08/2021

BM105-14

Mower conditioner

BiG M 450 CV

From machine number: 1063847

Contact

Mailing address

Krone North America, Inc.

P.O. Box 18880

Memphis, TN 38181-0880

USA

Phone

Fax

E-mail

Internet

Physical address

Krone North America, Inc.

3363 Miac Cove

Memphis, TN 38118

USA

+1 901 842-6011

+1 901 842-6016 [email protected]

www.krone-northamerica.com

Information for enquiries and orders

Type

Vehicle identification number

Year of manufacture

Contact data of your dealer

2

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

2

2.5.2

2.5.3

2.5.4

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.8.1

2.8.2

2.4.10

2.4.11

2.4.12

2.4.13

2.4.14

2.4.15

2.4.16

2.4.17

2.4.18

2.4.19

2.4.20

2.4.21

2.4.22

2.4.23

2.5

2.5.1

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.4.1

2.4.2

2.4.3

2.4.4

2.4.5

2.4.6

2.4.7

2.4.8

2.4.9

1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.5.1

1.5.2

1.5.3

1.5.4

1.5.5

1.5.6

1.5.7

3

4

4.1

4.1.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Table of contents

Information on This Document...............................................................................................  10

Validity .......................................................................................................................................  10

Re-ordering ................................................................................................................................  10

Applicable documents................................................................................................................  10

Target group of this document ...................................................................................................  10

How to use this document .........................................................................................................  10

Directories and references.........................................................................................................  10

Information on direction .............................................................................................................  11

Term “machine”..........................................................................................................................  11

Figures .......................................................................................................................................  11

Scope of the document ..............................................................................................................  11

Means of representation ............................................................................................................  11

Conversion table ........................................................................................................................  13

Safety ........................................................................................................................................  16

Intended use ..............................................................................................................................  16

Reasonably foreseeable misuse................................................................................................  16

Service life of the machine.........................................................................................................  17

Basic safety instructions ............................................................................................................  17

Importance of operating instructions..........................................................................................  17

Personnel qualification of the operating personnel ....................................................................  17

Personnel qualification of the technicians..................................................................................  18

Children in danger .....................................................................................................................  18

Structural modifications on the machine ....................................................................................  18

Additional equipment and spare parts .......................................................................................  18

Jobs on the machine..................................................................................................................  19

Operational safety: Technically sound condition .......................................................................  19

Danger zones ............................................................................................................................  20

Ensuring functionality of safety devices .....................................................................................  22

Personal protective equipment ..................................................................................................  22

Safety markings on the machine ...............................................................................................  23

Road safety................................................................................................................................  23

Parking the machine safely .......................................................................................................  24

Consumables .............................................................................................................................  24

Chemicals ..................................................................................................................................  25

Dangers arising from environment.............................................................................................  25

Sources of danger on the machine ............................................................................................  27

Dangers in connection with certain activities: climbing up and down ........................................  28

Dangers in connection with certain activities: Working on the machine ....................................  29

Dangers in connection with certain activities: checking and charging batteries ........................  30

Dangers in connection with certain activities: working on wheels and tyres..............................  30

Behaviour in dangerous situations and in case of accidents .....................................................  31

Safety routines ...........................................................................................................................  31

Shutting down and safeguarding the machine...........................................................................  31

Securing raised machine and machine parts against lowering..................................................  31

Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter element changes safely.......................................  32

Running actuator test.................................................................................................................  32

Safety labels on the machine.....................................................................................................  33

Information labels on the machine .............................................................................................  53

Safety features...........................................................................................................................  60

SMV emblem .............................................................................................................................  62

Fire extinguisher ........................................................................................................................  63

Data memory ............................................................................................................................  64

Machine Description................................................................................................................  65

Machine overview ......................................................................................................................  65

Content of the storage compartments on the machine ..............................................................  66

Road travel lighting ....................................................................................................................  67

Working lights ............................................................................................................................  67

Labelling ....................................................................................................................................  68

Overload protection on the machine ..........................................................................................  69

3

Table of contents

4.6

4.7

4.8

4.9

4.10

4.11

5

5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5

5.6

5.7

5.8

5.9

5.10

5.10.1

5.10.2

5.10.3

5.10.4

5.10.5

5.11

6

6.5

6.5.1

6.5.1.1

6.5.1.2

6.5.1.3

6.5.1.4

6.5.1.5

6.5.1.6

6.5.1.7

6.5.1.8

6.5.2

6.6

6.7

6.8

6.9

6.10

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.3.1

6.3.1.1

6.3.1.2

6.3.1.3

6.3.1.4

6.3.1.5

6.3.1.6

6.3.2

6.3.3

6.4

6.11

6.11.1

6.11.2

6.11.3

6.11.4

6.11.5

6.11.6

Functional description of self-propelled mower conditioner .......................................................  70

Functional description of GNSS receiver ...................................................................................  70

SectionControl function description ...........................................................................................  71

Functional description of parallel tracking..................................................................................  71

Functional description of GPS guidance....................................................................................  71

Function description of swath width CV .....................................................................................  72

Technical Data..........................................................................................................................  73

Dimensions ................................................................................................................................  73

Weights ......................................................................................................................................  73

Technically permitted maximum speed (road travel) .................................................................  73

Engine data................................................................................................................................  73

Traction drive .............................................................................................................................  74

Electrical system ........................................................................................................................  74

Airborne noise emission ............................................................................................................  74

Ambient temperature .................................................................................................................  74

Vibration values .........................................................................................................................  74

Consumables .............................................................................................................................  75

Oils.............................................................................................................................................  75

Lubricating grease .....................................................................................................................  77

Coolant ......................................................................................................................................  77

Refrigerant (air conditioning) .....................................................................................................  77

Fuel/urea....................................................................................................................................  78

Tyres ..........................................................................................................................................  78

Control and Display Elements ................................................................................................  79

Overview of operating elements ................................................................................................  79

Opening doors and windows of cabin .......................................................................................  79

Control and display elements on the steering column ...............................................................  82

Steering column switch ..............................................................................................................  82

Activating horn ...........................................................................................................................  82

Switching direction indicators on/off ..........................................................................................  83

Switching parking light/dipped beam on/off ...............................................................................  83

Switching full beam on/off ..........................................................................................................  84

Actuating headlamp flasher .......................................................................................................  85

Switching windshield wipers on/off ...........................................................................................  85

Indicator and warning lamps ......................................................................................................  86

Switching the flashing warning light on/off .................................................................................  87

Actuating service brake .............................................................................................................  87

Lighting ......................................................................................................................................  88

Light control unit ........................................................................................................................  88

Road travel lighting ....................................................................................................................  89

Working lights ............................................................................................................................  90

Switching and saving working lights via “Memory” key..............................................................  91

Warning beacons .......................................................................................................................  91

Ladder lighting ...........................................................................................................................  92

Maintenance lighting ..................................................................................................................  93

Wiper on left/on right..................................................................................................................  94

Setting mirror .............................................................................................................................  94

Interior lighting ...........................................................................................................................  96

Operating elements on control lever ..........................................................................................  97

Control and display elements on the keypad .............................................................................  99

Main mode switch ....................................................................................................................  101

Quick-stop switch.....................................................................................................................  102

Ignition lock ..............................................................................................................................  102

Automatic climate control.........................................................................................................  103

Overview of automatic climate control .....................................................................................  103

Switching on automatic climate control....................................................................................  104

Setting cabin temperature........................................................................................................  105

Switching air conditioning mode on/off ....................................................................................  106

Switching REHEAT mode on/off ..............................................................................................  106

Manually setting the evaporator fan speed ..............................................................................  107

4

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

9

9.1

9.2

9.3

9.4

9.5

9.6

9.7

9.8

9.9

9.10

9.11

9.12

9.12.1

8

8.1

8.2

8.2.1

8.2.1.1

8.2.1.2

8.2.2

8.2.3

8.2.4

8.2.5

8.2.6

8.3

8.3.1

8.3.2

8.3.3

8.3.4

10

10.1

10.1.1

10.1.2

10.1.3

10.2

10.2.1

10.3

10.4

10.4.1

10.4.2

10.4.3

10.4.3.1

10.4.4

7

7.1

7.2

7.3

7.4

7.5

7.6

6.11.7

6.11.8

6.12

6.12.1

6.12.2

6.12.3

6.12.4

Table of contents

Switching temperature display between degrees Celsius and degrees Fahrenheit ................  108

Malfunctions indicated on display ............................................................................................  108

Sockets ....................................................................................................................................  109

Cigarette lighter 12 V/24 V socket ...........................................................................................  109

12 V sockets ............................................................................................................................  110

Diagnostics sockets .................................................................................................................  111

USB connection .......................................................................................................................  111

Initial operation ......................................................................................................................  112

Checklist for initial operation ....................................................................................................  112

Mounting fire extinguisher........................................................................................................  113

Mounting licence plate .............................................................................................................  113

Mounting guard cloths .............................................................................................................  113

Installing the blades .................................................................................................................  119

Mounting the anti-twist lock on the lighting module .................................................................  120

Start-up ...................................................................................................................................  121

Check before start-up ..............................................................................................................  121

Setting driver’s seat .................................................................................................................  122

Air-cushioned comfort seat ......................................................................................................  122

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "Standard" version) ...............................................  123

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "ACTIVO" version).................................................  125

Steering column adjustment ....................................................................................................  129

Setting the terminal ..................................................................................................................  130

Sun visor ..................................................................................................................................  131

Adjustable air nozzles ..............................................................................................................  131

Inside rear mirror......................................................................................................................  132

General aspects.......................................................................................................................  132

Instructional seat......................................................................................................................  132

Cooling box (version with "Insulated thermobox") ...................................................................  133

Topping up fresh water ............................................................................................................  133

Drawer for first-aid kit and operating instructions ....................................................................  133

Commissioning – mowing operation ...................................................................................  135

Connecting the front mounted mower......................................................................................  135

Decoupling the front mounted mower ......................................................................................  139

Mounting the side mounted mowers ........................................................................................  141

Dismounting the side mounted mowers...................................................................................  144

Mounting components "swathing"............................................................................................  148

Dismounting the "swathing" components.................................................................................  151

Mounting / dismounting "swath width CV" components...........................................................  153

Mounting the cross conveyor ...................................................................................................  155

Dismounting the cross conveyor..............................................................................................  158

Mounting the rear weight .........................................................................................................  161

Removing the rear weight ........................................................................................................  162

Adjusting GPS guidance ..........................................................................................................  163

Adjusting overlapping and beds...............................................................................................  164

Driving and Transport ...........................................................................................................  166

Preparing the machine for road travel .....................................................................................  166

Transport position ....................................................................................................................  166

Checking lockings of lateral mowers .......................................................................................  167

Checking side guards of lateral mowers ..................................................................................  167

Starting engine.........................................................................................................................  168

Observing indicator and warning lamps...................................................................................  170

Behaviour after the engine has stalled ....................................................................................  170

Starting up the machine ...........................................................................................................  171

Setting the acceleration behaviour ..........................................................................................  171

Notices on driving the machine................................................................................................  172

Driving forwards and stopping .................................................................................................  172

Cruise control...........................................................................................................................  173

Driving backward and stopping................................................................................................  174

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 5

Table of contents

11

11.1

11.1.1

11.1.2

11.1.2.1

11.1.3

11.1.4

11.1.5

11.2

11.3

11.3.1

11.3.2

11.4

11.4.1

11.4.2

11.5

11.6

11.7

10.5

10.5.1

10.5.2

10.6

10.7

10.8

10.9

10.10

10.11

10.11.1

10.12

10.12.1

10.12.2

12

12.1

12.2

12.3

12.4

12.5

12.6

13

13.1

13.2

13.2.1

13.2.2

13.3

13.3.1

13.3.2

13.3.3

13.4

13.5

13.6

13.7

14

14.1

14.2

14.3

14.3.1

14.4

14.5

Stopping the machine ..............................................................................................................  174

Stopping machine by using control lever .................................................................................  175

Stopping machine with the service brake ................................................................................  176

Applying parking brake ............................................................................................................  176

Switching off the engine...........................................................................................................  178

Fitting wheel chocks ................................................................................................................  178

Main battery switch ..................................................................................................................  179

Parking the machine ................................................................................................................  180

Recovering the Machine ..........................................................................................................  180

Release the parking brake manually .......................................................................................  181

Preparing the machine for shipment ........................................................................................  182

Lashing the machine................................................................................................................  182

Removing the machine wheels ................................................................................................  183

Operation ................................................................................................................................  184

Field Mode ...............................................................................................................................  184

Working position ......................................................................................................................  185

Field mode on slopes...............................................................................................................  185

Moving front mounted mower into the central position ............................................................  186

Operating mowers ...................................................................................................................  186

Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)....................................................................  188

Switching the mower drive on and off ......................................................................................  188

Folding up/folding down side guards .......................................................................................  190

Front guard ..............................................................................................................................  192

Folding up the front guard........................................................................................................  192

Fold down the front guard ........................................................................................................  192

Operating support jack.............................................................................................................  193

Moving support jack into transport position .............................................................................  193

Moving support jack into support position................................................................................  194

PowerSplit................................................................................................................................  194

Operating SectionControl ........................................................................................................  195

Operating GPS guidance .........................................................................................................  196

Terminal ..................................................................................................................................  198

Display design .........................................................................................................................  198

Description display...................................................................................................................  199

Navigation module ...................................................................................................................  199

Possible terminals....................................................................................................................  201

Input window ............................................................................................................................  201

Selection window .....................................................................................................................  203

Terminal machine functions .................................................................................................  205

Status line ................................................................................................................................  206

Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel .............................................................  209

Warning lamps – urea tank filling level ....................................................................................  210

Warning lamps – urea quality, errors or manipulation on the exhaust aftertreatment system .  211

Keys in the title bar ..................................................................................................................  211

“Counters” menu ......................................................................................................................  212

“Error” menu.............................................................................................................................  220

Main menu ...............................................................................................................................  224

Direct input “Field mode” .........................................................................................................  224

Information area.......................................................................................................................  225

Engine and driving data display range.....................................................................................  225

Traction drive indicator lights ...................................................................................................  228

Terminal – Menus...................................................................................................................  231

Menu structure .........................................................................................................................  231

Bringing up menu level ............................................................................................................  238

Navigating in menus ................................................................................................................  239

Changing/saving parameter.....................................................................................................  239

“Diagnostics” menu explanation ..............................................................................................  240

Menu "key test" explanation.....................................................................................................  241

6

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Table of contents

16

16.1

16.1.1

16.1.2

16.1.3

16.1.4

16.1.5

16.1.6

16.1.7

16.1.8

16.1.9

16.1.10

16.1.11

16.1.12

16.1.13

16.1.14

16.1.15

16.1.16

16.1.17

16.1.18

16.2

16.3

17

17.1

17.2

17.2.1

17.3

17.3.1

17.3.2

17.4

17.5

17.6

17.7

17.8

15

15.3

15.3.1

15.3.2

15.3.3

15.3.4

15.3.5

15.3.6

15.3.7

15.3.8

15.3.9

15.3.10

15.3.11

15.1

15.1.1

15.1.2

15.1.3

15.2

15.2.1

15.2.2

15.2.3

15.2.4

15.2.5

15.2.6

15.2.7

15.2.8

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Settings...................................................................................................................................  243

Setting in the terminal ..............................................................................................................  243

Manual settings........................................................................................................................  243

Setting cutting height ...............................................................................................................  244

Setting the mower relief ...........................................................................................................  245

Settings on front mounted mower ............................................................................................  247

Setting the side guards on the front mounted mower ..............................................................  247

Set conditioner speed ..............................................................................................................  248

Setting the degree of conditioning ...........................................................................................  249

Increasing cutting height at front mounted mower with high-cut skids ....................................  249

Setting wide spreading ............................................................................................................  249

Setting swath width ..................................................................................................................  250

Checking deflector sheets .......................................................................................................  251

Setting the lifting height at the front mounted mower ..............................................................  251

Settings on the side mounted mowers.....................................................................................  252

Setting the side guards on the side mounted mowers .............................................................  252

Checking/setting locking of side guards ..................................................................................  253

Setting the conditioner speed ..................................................................................................  254

Setting the auger speed...........................................................................................................  254

Adjusting the scraper sheet .....................................................................................................  258

Setting the degree of conditioning ...........................................................................................  259

Increasing the cutting height at the side mounted mowers by means of high-cut skids ..........  259

Setting wide spreading ............................................................................................................  260

Setting wide spreading sheet...................................................................................................  261

Impact damage protection system ...........................................................................................  261

Dismounting the bottom flap ....................................................................................................  262

Maintenance - General Information......................................................................................  263

Maintenance table ...................................................................................................................  264

Maintenance – Before the season ...........................................................................................  264

Maintenance – After the season ..............................................................................................  265

Maintenance - once after 1 hour .............................................................................................  266

Maintenance – 6 times after every 10 hours............................................................................  266

Maintenance - Once after 50 hours .........................................................................................  266

Maintenance – Once after 500 hours ......................................................................................  266

Maintenance – Once after 1,000 km........................................................................................  267

Maintenance – at the beginning of the cold season ................................................................  267

Maintenance - Every 10 hours, but at least once a day...........................................................  267

Maintenance - Every 50 hours .................................................................................................  268

Maintenance - every 100 hours ...............................................................................................  269

Maintenance - every 250 hours ...............................................................................................  269

Maintenance - Every 500 hours ...............................................................................................  270

Maintenance - every 1,000 hours but at least at the end of the season ..................................  271

Maintenance – Every 1,000 hours, but at least before the season..........................................  271

Maintenance – Every 2,000 hours ..........................................................................................  272

Maintenance – Every 2 years ..................................................................................................  272

Maintenance - as required .......................................................................................................  272

Tightening torques ...................................................................................................................  272

Cleaning the machine ..............................................................................................................  275

Maintenance - Engine ............................................................................................................  278

Engine overview .....................................................................................................................  279

Dirt deposits in engine compartment .......................................................................................  279

Cleaning engine compartment with compressed air ................................................................  279

Engine oil level.........................................................................................................................  280

Checking engine oil level ........................................................................................................  280

Topping up engine oil ..............................................................................................................  281

Cleaning fuel tank ....................................................................................................................  282

Fuel prefilter/water separator ...................................................................................................  283

Refuelling .................................................................................................................................  284

Urea filter .................................................................................................................................  285

Topping up urea solution .........................................................................................................  286

7

Table of contents

18

18.1

18.2

18.2.1

18.2.2

18.2.3

18.2.4

18.2.5

18.3

18.4

18.4.1

18.4.2

18.4.3

18.5

18.5.1

18.5.2

18.5.3

18.6

18.6.1

18.6.2

18.7

18.8

18.9

17.9

17.10

17.11

17.12

17.12.1

17.12.2

17.12.3

17.12.4

17.12.5

17.13

17.14

19

19.1

19.2

19.3

19.4

19.4.1

19.4.2

19.4.3

19.4.4

19.4.5

19.4.6

19.4.7

19.4.8

19.5

19.6

19.6.1

19.6.2

19.6.2.1

19.6.2.2

19.6.2.3

19.6.3

19.6.4

19.7

19.8

19.9

Vent fuel filter ...........................................................................................................................  288

Engine coolant .........................................................................................................................  289

Checking the engine coolant level ...........................................................................................  290

Checking engine piping ...........................................................................................................  291

Checking pipework in the air conditioning and heating system ...............................................  291

Check pipework of the engine cooling system and the charge air...........................................  292

Checking pipework of the air intake .........................................................................................  292

Checking fuel lines...................................................................................................................  293

Check pipework of the exhaust aftertreatment system ............................................................  293

Cleaning air filter ......................................................................................................................  294

Shutting down the diesel engine ..............................................................................................  295

Maintenance – Basic Machine ..............................................................................................  297

Checking/refilling windscreen washer system .........................................................................  297

Maintaining air conditioning and heating .................................................................................  298

Components of air conditioning ...............................................................................................  298

Carrying out a visual inspection at the receiver/dryer ..............................................................  299

Checking the condition and filling quantity of refrigerant ........................................................  300

Replacing/cleaning fresh air filter.............................................................................................  301

Replacing/cleaning circulation filter .........................................................................................  301

Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment ................................................................................  302

Maintaining chassis .................................................................................................................  303

Checking attachment of steering cylinder ................................................................................  303

Checking fitting of track rod .....................................................................................................  303

Checking the hub cover of the rear axle, with front wheel drive version..................................  304

Maintaining belt drives ............................................................................................................  304

Checking kraftband ..................................................................................................................  304

Checking pulley .......................................................................................................................  304

Checking the belt tension ........................................................................................................  305

Maintaining tyres and wheels ..................................................................................................  306

Checking/maintaining tyres......................................................................................................  306

Retighten wheel nuts ...............................................................................................................  307

Tighten the screw connections on the central support/chassis ...............................................  307

Re-adjust the transport lock .....................................................................................................  308

Checking the fire extinguisher .................................................................................................  308

Maintenance – mowing units ................................................................................................  310

Dismounting/mounting the conditioner drive guard .................................................................  310

Dismounting/mounting the guard for the front mounted mower input gearbox ........................  311

Dismounting/mounting the guard of the auger drive ................................................................  311

Maintaining belt drives .............................................................................................................  312

Checking kraftband ..................................................................................................................  312

Checking pulley .......................................................................................................................  312

Checking/adjusting the belt tension of the front mounted mower conditioner drive.................  313

Tensioning/detensioning the conditioner drive belt tension front mounted mower ..................  313

Checking/setting belt tension of auger drive ............................................................................  315

Relieving/tensioning belt drive of auger drive ..........................................................................  315

Changing kraftband “belt drive side mounted mowers” ...........................................................  316

Change kraftband "belt drive of front mounted mower" ...........................................................  320

Checking the tines on the tine conditioner ...............................................................................  321

Cutterbar ..................................................................................................................................  322

Rotary hub ...............................................................................................................................  322

Check/change blades ..............................................................................................................  324

Checking the blade for wear ....................................................................................................  324

Changing blades for the “blade screw connection” version .....................................................  325

Changing blades for the “blade quick fastener” version ..........................................................  326

Checking/replacing linings on cutterbar ...................................................................................  327

Oil level inspection and oil change on the cutter bar ...............................................................  328

Check guard cloths ..................................................................................................................  332

Vent friction clutch ...................................................................................................................  333

Raising mowers .......................................................................................................................  335

8

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

24

24.1

24.2

24.3

24.4

24.5

24.6

24.6.1

25

25.1

25.1.1

25.1.2

25.1.3

25.1.4

25.2

25.2.1

25.2.2

25.3

25.4

25.5

25.6

25.7

25.8

25.9

25.10

26

27

22

22.1

22.2

22.3

22.4

22.5

23

23.1

23.1.1

23.1.2

23.1.3

23.2

20

20.1

20.2

20.3

21

21.1

21.2

21.3

21.4

Table of contents

Maintenance - Lubrication ....................................................................................................  338

Lubricating universal shafts .....................................................................................................  338

Lubricate the intermediate gear ...............................................................................................  340

Lubrication chart - machine .....................................................................................................  341

Maintenance – Central Lubrication System .......................................................................  344

Lubricants ................................................................................................................................  344

Filling the lubricant tank ...........................................................................................................  345

Check filling level .....................................................................................................................  346

Starting intermediate lubrication ..............................................................................................  346

Maintenance - Hydraulic System..........................................................................................  348

Pressure limiting valves ...........................................................................................................  348

Hydraulic oil .............................................................................................................................  349

Maintaining hydraulic oil tank...................................................................................................  349

Changing high-pressure filter...................................................................................................  352

Checking hydraulic hoses ........................................................................................................  352

Maintenance – Electrics ........................................................................................................  353

Batteries...................................................................................................................................  354

Cleaning and maintaining batteries .........................................................................................  354

Charging batteries ...................................................................................................................  355

Replacing batteries .................................................................................................................  355

Maintaining starter ...................................................................................................................  358

Maintenance - Gearbox .........................................................................................................  359

Overview of gearboxes ............................................................................................................  359

Maintaining transfer gearbox ...................................................................................................  360

Maintaining input gearbox of front mounted mower.................................................................  362

Maintaining main gearbox of front mounted mower.................................................................  363

Maintain main gearbox of side mounted mowers ....................................................................  364

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox ...............................................................................................  365

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox front/right ...............................................................................  365

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy..........................................................................................  367

Disturbances of the electrics/electronics .................................................................................  367

Overview of control units .........................................................................................................  367

Overview of fuses ....................................................................................................................  367

Overview sensors ....................................................................................................................  371

Overview of actuators ..............................................................................................................  372

Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit ...............................................................................  373

Distributor blocks of central lubrication system........................................................................  374

Searching for the error in the central lubrication system .........................................................  377

External starting of the machine ..............................................................................................  377

Calibrate mower load relief ......................................................................................................  378

Calibrate traction drive .............................................................................................................  379

Calibrating cutting height .........................................................................................................  380

Finely calibrating the cutting height .........................................................................................  382

Calibrating end positions of the mowers ..................................................................................  383

Car jack contact points ............................................................................................................  386

Jacking up the machine ...........................................................................................................  387

Waste disposal.......................................................................................................................  390

Index........................................................................................................................................  391

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 9

1

1.1

1

Information on This Document

Validity

Information on This Document

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.5.1

Validity

This document is valid for machines of type:

BM105-14 (BiG M 450 CV)

All information, illustrations and technical data in this document correspond to the latest state at the time of publication.

We reserve the right to make design changes at any time and without notification of reasons.

Re-ordering

You can request a replacement document if this document became completely or partly unusable, or if you need it in a different language. Please specify the document number shown on the cover page in your order. Alternatively, you can download the document online from

KRONE MEDIA https://media.krone.de

.

Applicable documents

To ensure that the machine is used safely and as intended, observe the following further applicable documents.

• Operating instructions for diesel engine, Liebherr Machines Bulle S.A.

• Operating instructions for universal shaft

• CCI terminal operating instructions (for "CCI 800", "CCI 1200" version)

• Circuit diagram, KRONE

• Spare parts list, KRONE

Target group of this document

This document aims at the operator of the machine who fulfills the minimum requirements of personnel qualification,

see Page 17 .

How to use this document

Directories and references

Contents/headers

The contents and headers in this document ensure quick orientation in the chapters.

Index

The index contains catchwords in alphabetical order which enable to find information on a desired topic easily. The index can be found on the last pages of this document.

Cross references

Cross references to another place in the document or to another document are in the text with page number.

10

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

1.5.2

1.5.3

1.5.4

1.5.5

1.5.6

Information on This Document

How to use this document

Examples:

Check the tight seat of all screws on the machine, see Page 11

. ( INFO : If you use an electronic version of this document, click on the link to go to the specified page.)

• For further information, refer to the operating instructions of the universal shaft manufacturer.

1

1.5

Information on direction

Directional information in this document, such as front, rear, right and left, applies in the direction of travel of the machine.

Term “machine”

Throughout the rest of this document, the “mower conditioner” will also be referred to as the

“machine”.

Figures

The figures in this document do not always represent the exact machine type. The information that refers to the figure always corresponds to the machine type of this document.

Scope of the document

In addition to standard equipment, accessories kits and versions of the machine are described in this document. Your machine may deviate from this document.

Means of representation

Icons in the text

The following means of representation (icons) are used to present the text more clearly:

This arrow characterizes an action step . Several arrows in a row identify a sequence of actions to be performed step by step.

This icon identifies a prerequisite that has to be fulfilled to perform an action step or a sequence of actions.

This arrow marks the intermediate result of an action step.

This arrow identifies the result of an action step or sequence of actions.

This bullet point identifies an enumeration . If the bullet point is intended, it identifies the second level of the enumeration.

Icons in figures

The following icons can be used in illustrations:

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 11

1

1.5

Information on This Document

How to use this document

Icon

1

X

LH

Explanation

Reference sign for part

Icon

I

Dimensions (e. g. also W = width,

H = height, L = length)

Left side of machine

Direction of travel

Reference line for visible material

RH

Centre line

Open

Apply liquid lubricant (e.g. lubricating oil)

Explanation

Position of a part (e.g. move from position I to position II)

Magnification of display detail

Right side of machine

Direction of motion

Reference line for covered material

Cable routes

Closed

Apply lubricating grease

Warning signs

Warnings of dangers are separated from the remaining text as warning signs and are identified with a danger sign and signal words.

The warning signs must be read and the measures must be observed in order to prevent personal injury.

Explanation of danger sign

12

This is the danger sign that warns of a risk of injury.

Please observe all notes marked with the danger sign in order to avoid injuries or death.

Explanation of signal words

DANGER

The signal word DANGER warns of a hazardous situation which will result in serious injuries or death if the warning sign is ignored.

WARNING

The signal word WARNING warns of a hazardous situation which will result in serious injuries or death if the warning sign is ignored.

CAUTION

The signal word CAUTION warns of a hazardous situation which will result in minor to moderate injuries if the warning sign is ignored.

Example of a warning sign:

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

1.5.7

Information on This Document

How to use this document

1

1.5

WARNING

Eye damage caused by flying dirt particles

When cleaning with compressed air, dirt particles are ejected at high speed and could get into the eyes. Therefore eyes could be hurt.

„ Keep people away from the working area.

„ Wear personal protective equipment when performing cleaning work with compressed air

(e.g. eye protection).

Warnings of property damage/environmental damage

Warnings of property/environmental damage are separated from the remaining text and marked with "Notice".

Example:

NOTICE

Gearbox damage due to low oil level

The gearboxes could be damaged when the oil level is too low.

„ Check gear oil level at regular intervals and top up oil, if necessary.

„ Check gear oil level approx. 3 to 4 hours after the machine has been switched off. Check oil level only when machine is in horizontal position.

Notes with information and recommendations

Additional information and recommendations for trouble-free and productive operation of the machine are separated from the remaining text and marked with “Information”.

Example:

INFO

Each safety label is provided with an order number and can be ordered directly from the manufacturer or from the authorized specialist dealer.

Conversion table

The following table can be used to convert metric units into US units.

Size

Area

Volume flow Litres per minute L/min

Cubic metres per hour m³/h

Force

Length

Power

SI units (metric)

Unit name Abbreviation

Hectare ha

Newton

Millimetre

Metre

Kilowatt

N mm m kW

Factor

2.47105

0.2642

4.4029

0.2248

0.03937

3.2808

1.3410

Inch-pound units

Unit name

Acre

US gallons per minute

Pound force

Inch

Foot

Horsepower

Abbreviation acres gpm lbf in.

ft.

hp

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 13

1

1.5

Information on This Document

How to use this document

Size

Pressure

Torque

SI units (metric)

Unit name Abbreviation

Kilopascal kPa

Megapascal bar (non-SI)

Newtonmeter

MPa bar

Nm

Factor

0.1450

145.0377

14.5038

0.7376

Temperature Degrees Celsius °C

Velocity

Volumes

Weight

Metres per minute

Metres per second

Kilometres per hour

Litres

Millilitre

Cubic centimetre

Kilogram m/min m/s km/h

L ml cm³ kg

8.8507

°Cx1.8+32

3.2808

3.2808

0.6215

0.2642

0.0338

0.0610

2.2046

Inch-pound units

Unit name Abbreviation

Pounds per square inch psi pound-foot or foot-pound ft∙lbf pound-inch or inch-pound

Degrees

Fahrenheit in∙lbf

°F

Feet per minute ft/min

Feet per second ft/s

Miles per hour mph

US gallon

US ounce

Cubic inch

US gal.

US oz.

in³

Pound lbs

14

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

This page has been left blank deliberately.

Information on This Document

How to use this document

1

1.5

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 15

2

2.1

2

Safety

Intended use

Safety

2.1

2.2

Intended use

This machine is a self-propelled mower conditioner with 3 disc mowers with integrated mower conditioners and is used to mow crops.

The crops designated for the intended use of this machine are stalk and leaf crops growing on the ground. This includes different live agricultural grasses and legume crops from early stage up to the end of the photosynthetic process.

The machine is designed exclusively for use in agriculture and may only be used when

• all safety devices are available according to the operating instructions and are located in the protective position.

• all safety instructions of the operating instructions have been observed and complied with,

both in chapter “Basic safety instructions”, see Page 17 , and directly in the chapters of the

operating instructions.

The machine may be used only by people who satisfy the personnel qualification requirements

designated by the machine manufacturer, see Page 17

.

These operating instructions are part of the machine and must therefore be at hand when the machine is in use. The machine may be operated only when the operator has received training and in compliance with these operating instructions.

If the machine is used for applications which are not described in these operating instructions, this may result in serious injuries or death and damage to the machine and other property.

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disrupt the proper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications shall exclude any liability of the manufacturer for consequential damage.

The intended use shall also include the adherence to the operating, maintenance and repair conditions set by the manufacturer.

Reasonably foreseeable misuse

Any use beyond the intended use

see Page 16 is regarded as improper use and is therefore

misuse according to the Machinery Directive. The manufacturer is not liable for damage resulting from this, the user alone bears the risk.

Such misuse is for example:

Processing of crops which are outside the intended use of the machine, see Page 16 , such

as:

• Undergrowth or bushes

• Dead plants such as straw or maize stalks

• Woody or very fibrous plants such as trees, cotton stalks or sugar cane

• Transport of people

• Transport of goods

• Exceeding the permitted technical gross weight

• Non-compliance with the safety labels on the machine and safety notes in the operating instructions

• Performing troubleshooting, setting, cleaning, repair and maintenance work contrary to the information in the operating instructions

• Unauthorised modifications to the machine

• Attachment of unauthorised or unapproved additional equipment

• Use of spare parts which are not KRONE original spare parts

• Stationary operation of the machine

16

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

2.3

2.4

2.4.1

2.4.2

Safety

Service life of the machine

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disrupt proper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications will exclude any liability of the manufacturer for consequential damage.

2

2.3

Service life of the machine

• The service life of this machine depends on its proper operation and maintenance as well as the operating and harvesting conditions.

• By heeding the instructions and information in these operating instructions, permanent operational readiness and a long service life of the machine can be achieved.

• After each operating season, inspect the entire machine for wear and other damage.

• Replace damaged and worn components before recommissioning the machine.

• Carry out a full technical inspection of the machine after five years of machine operation and make a decision on further machine usage taking the results of this inspection into account.

• Theoretically, the service life of this machine is unlimited as all worn or damaged components can be replaced.

Basic safety instructions

Non-compliance with the safety instructions and warnings

Non-compliance with the safety instructions and warnings may result in injuries and damage to the environment and property.

Importance of operating instructions

The operating instructions are an important document and a part of the machine. They are intended for the user and contain information that is relevant to safety.

Only the procedures specified in the operating instructions are safe. If the operating instructions are not followed, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries.

„ Prior to using the machine for the first time, read and observe the "Basic safety notices" completely.

„ Prior to starting work, read and observe the respective sections in the operating instructions too.

„ Keep the operating instructions easily accessible for the machine user at all times.

„ Hand over the operating instructions to subsequent users.

Personnel qualification of the operating personnel

If the machine is not used properly, people may be seriously injured or killed. To avoid accidents, each person who works with the machine must satisfy the following minimum requirements:

• He is physically capable of controlling the machine.

• He can work safely with the machine in accordance with these operating instructions.

• He understands the method of operation of the machine within the scope of his work and can identify and avoid the dangers associated with the work.

• He has read the operating instructions and can implement the information in the operating instructions accordingly.

• He is familiar with driving vehicles safely.

• For road travel he has adequate knowledge of the highway code and has the stipulated driving licence.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 17

2

2.4

2.4.3

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Personnel qualification of the technicians

If the work (assembly, conversion, modification, extension, repairs, retrofitting) is performed improperly on the machine, people may be seriously or fatally injured. To avoid accidents, everyone who performs work according to these instructions must meet the following minimum requirements:

• Qualified professional, with relevant training.

• Capable of assembling the (partially) disassembled machine according to the assembly instructions provided by the manufacturer.

• He is capable, e.g. by attending a training course, of extending, modifying or repairing the function of the machine according to the relevant instructions provided by the manufacturer.

• He has read the operating instructions and can implement the information in the operating instructions accordingly.

• Ability to perform the work safely according to these instructions.

• Understands the mode of operation of the work to be performed and the machine and is able to identify and avoid risk in carrying out the necessary work.

• Has read these instructions and is able to implement the information explained in these instructions accordingly.

2.4.4

2.4.5

Children in danger

Children are not in a position to assess dangers and behave unpredictably.

Thus children are particularly at risk.

• Children are especially at risk when climbing up and down the machine.

• There is no possibility to secure children sufficiently on the self-propelled machine.

• Vibrations can be particularly harmful to children's bodies.

• Children may initiate dangerous movements of the machine.

„ Never take children on the self-propelled harvester.

„ Keep children away from the machine.

„ Keep children away from consumables.

„ Make sure that there are no children in the danger zone, especially when starting and triggering machine movements.

Structural modifications on the machine

Structural modifications and extensions that were not approved by KRONE can impair the functionality, operational safety and also the road traffic certification of the machine. As a result, persons can be seriously injured or killed.

Any structural modifications and extensions that are not authorised by KRONE are not permitted.

2.4.6

Additional equipment and spare parts

Additional equipment and spare parts that do not correspond to the requirements of the manufacturer may affect the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.

„ To ensure operational safety, use original parts or standard parts which correspond to the requirements of the manufacturer.

18

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

2.4.7

2.4.8

Safety

Basic safety instructions

2

2.4

Jobs on the machine

Control of moving machine

The moving machine requires that the driver/operator is able to react quickly at any time.

Otherwise, the machine may move uncontrollably and cause serious injuries and death.

„ Start the engine from the driver's seat only.

„ While the vehicle is travelling, never leave the driver's seat.

„ Never climb in or out of the machine while the machine is moving.

Control of the machine during operation

While the machine is in operation, always ensure that the drivers/operators can intervene quickly at any time in the machine control. Otherwise, the machine may move in an uncontrolled manner and seriously injure or kill people.

When the machine is in operation, the driver/operator must be in the cabin.

On-board instructors when using the machine for work (passenger seat)

On-board instructors may fall and be injured due to movements of the machine.

• Never use the passenger seat for road travel.

• Use the passenger seat for instruction purposes during operation in the field only.

Passengers

Passengers may be seriously injured by the machine or fall off the machine and run over.

Ejected objects may strike and injure passengers.

„ Never carry passengers on the machine.

Operational safety: Technically sound condition

Operation only after proper commissioning

The operational safety of the machine is not guaranteed without proper commissioning in accordance with these operating instructions. This may result in accidents and people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„ Use the machine only after proper commissioning,

see Page 121

.

Technically sound state of the machine

Improper maintenance and setting could influence the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ All maintenance and setting work must be performed according to the chapters

“Maintenance and Setting”.

„ Before performing any maintenance and setting work, shut down and safeguard the machine,

see Page 31

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 19

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Danger resulting from damage to the machine

Damage to the machine may impair the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.

As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed. The following parts of the machine are particularly important for safety:

• Brakes

• Steering

• Safety Devices

• Connecting devices

• Lighting

• Hydraulics

• Tyres

• Universal shaft

If there are doubts about the operational safety of the machine, for example due to an unexpected change to the operational behaviour, visible damage or leaking consumables:

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Immediately eliminate potential causes of damage, for example heavy soiling, or tighten slack screws.

„ Determine the cause of damage according to these operating instructions and repair the

damage, if possible, see Page 367

.

„ In case of damage which may affect operational safety and cannot be repaired according to these operating instructions: Have damage repaired by a qualified service centre.

Technical limit values

If the technical limit values of the machine are not observed, the machine may be damaged. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously or fatally injured. With regard to safety, it is especially important to observe the following technical limit values:

• Maximum permitted total weight

• Maximum permitted axle loads

• Maximum permitted transport height and width

• Maximum permitted speed

„

Comply with limit values, see Page 73 .

2.4.9

Danger zones

If the machine is switched on, its surrounding can present a danger zone.

Avoid entering the danger zone of the machine by observing the minimum safety distance.

If the safety distance is not observed, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Do not switch on the drives and engine if the minimum safety distance has not been observed.

„ If people fail to observe the minimum safety distance, switch off the drives.

„ Switch the machine off in shunting and field mode.

The safety distance is:

For machine in shunting and field mode

In front of the machine

Behind the machine

On either side of the machine

30 m

5 m

3 m

20

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Basic safety instructions

2

2.4

For machine switched on without driving motion

In front of the machine 3 m

Behind the machine 5 m

On either side of the machine 3 m

The safety distances specified here are minimum distances in terms of intended use. If necessary, these safety distances must be increased according to the operating and ambient conditions.

„ Before working in the danger zone of the machine: Shut down and secure the machine,

see

Page 31 . This also applies to brief inspection work.

„ Consider the information in all relevant operating instructions:

• the operating instructions of the machine

• the operating instructions of universal shaft

Danger zone universal shaft

People may be caught, pulled in and seriously injured by the universal shaft.

„ Observe operating instructions of universal shaft.

„ Ensure sufficient overlap of section tube and universal shaft guards.

„ Make sure that the universal shaft guards are mounted and that they are fully functional.

„ Allow the universal shaft locks to engage. There must be no areas of the locking device on the PTO shaft fork which could cause catching or entrapment (e.g. by annular design, protective collar around the locking pin).

„ Attach chains to prevent the universal shaft guards from rotating with the shaft.

„ Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone of PTO shaft and universal shaft.

„ Ensure that the selected rotational speed and direction of rotation of the PTO shaft of the self-propelled machine match the permitted rotational speed and direction of rotation of the mower.

„ Switch off the PTO shaft when the angles between the universal shaft and the PTO shaft are too large. The machine may be damaged. Parts may be hurled up and cause injury to people.

Danger zone PTO shaft

People may be caught, pulled in and seriously injured by the PTO shaft and the driven components.

Before switching on the PTO shaft:

„ Ensure that all protective devices are mounted and brought into protective position.

„ Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone of PTO shaft and universal shaft.

„ Switch off drives if they are not needed.

Danger zone between (self-propelled) mower conditioner and mowers

People situated between the high-performance mower conditioner and the mower may be seriously injured or killed if they are careless or if the machine rolls away or moves.

„ Before working between the high-performance mower conditioner and mower: Shut down

and secure the machine, see Page 31 . This also applies to brief inspection work.

„ If the lifting unit must be actuated, keep all people away from the range of movement of the machine parts which are to be raised.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 21

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Danger zone ejected objects

Crops and foreign bodies may be forcefully flung out and injure or kill people.

„ Before starting the machine, instruct all people to leave the danger zone of the machine.

„ If people are in the danger zone of the machine, immediately switch off drives and diesel engine.

Danger zone when drive is switched on

When the drive is switched on, there is a danger to life caused by rotating machine parts.

Ensure that there are no persons in the danger zone of the machine.

„ Before starting the machine, instruct all people to leave the danger zone of the machine.

„ In case of dangerous situations, immediately switch off drives and instruct people to leave the danger zone.

Danger zone due to trailing machine parts

If machine parts are trailing, people may be seriously injured or killed.

After the drives have been switched off, the following machine parts will trail:

• Universal shafts

• Drive belt

• Fan

• Rotating screen

• Cutting discs

• Conditioner

• Conveying devices

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Do not attempt to approach the machine until all moving machine parts have come to a standstill.

2.4.10

Ensuring functionality of safety devices

If safety devices are missing or damaged, people may be seriously injured or killed by moving machine parts.

„ Replace damaged safety devices.

„ Mount dismounted safety devices and machine parts again before start-up and move them to protective position.

„ If it is doubtful whether all safety devices have been correctly installed and are functional, have a service centre check them.

2.4.11

Personal protective equipment

The wearing of personal protective equipment is an important safety measure. Missing or unsuitable personal protective equipment increases health risks and injuries.

Personal protective equipment includes, for example:

• Suitable protective gloves

• Safety shoes

• Tight-fitting protective clothing

22

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Basic safety instructions

2

2.4

• Hearing protection

• Protective goggles

• If dust is generated: appropriate breathing protection

„ Specify and provide personal protective equipment for the particular job.

„ Use only personal protective equipment which is in proper condition and offers effective protection.

„ Adjust personal protective equipment to the person, for example the size.

„ Remove unsuitable clothing and jewellery (e.g. rings, necklaces) and cover long hair with a hairnet.

2.4.12

2.4.13

Safety markings on the machine

Safety labels on the machine warn of hazards at danger points and are an important component of the machine's safety equipment. Missing safety labels increase the risk of serious and fatal injuries.

„ Clean dirty safety labels.

„ After each cleaning, check to ensure that the safety labels are complete and legible.

„ Immediately replace missing, damaged and unrecognisable safety labels.

„ Label spare parts with the required safety labels.

Descriptions, explanations and order numbers of the safety labels,

see Page 33 .

Road safety

Dangers during road travel

Other road users can be put at risk when you drive on public roads and the machine is not properly illuminated and/or exceeds the maximum dimensions and weights laid down by national law.

„ Prior to driving on public roads, ensure that the maximum permissible dimensions, weights and axle, support and trailer loads are not exceeded which are applicable under national law for driving on public roads.

„ Before driving on roads, switch on the road travel lighting and ensure that it functions properly.

„ Before driving on roads, move the main mode switch to the “road mode” position.

Danger when driving on road and field

The self-propelled machine has special driving properties which also depend on the operating state and on the ground. If changed handling characteristics are not considered, the driver may cause accidents.

„ Observe measures for driving on road and field,

see Page 166

.

Dangers if the machine is not prepared properly for road travel

If the machine is not prepared properly for road travel, serious accidents may occur with traffic.

„ Before driving on roads, prepare the machine for road travel,

see Page 166 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 23

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Dangers when operating the machine on slopes

The machine may tilt when it is used on slopes. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Do not work and drive on a slope unless the ground of the slope is flat and the adhesion of the tyres to the ground is ensured.

„ Turn the machine at low speed. Turn in a large arc.

„ Avoid driving across a slope because the centre of gravity of the machine will be changed by payload and by executing machine functions.

„ Avoid abrupt steering movements on slopes.

„ Do not move the machine from working position to transport position or from transport position to working position as long as the machine is used across a slope.

„ Do not park the machine on slopes.

„ Observe procedures for operating the machine on slopes,

see Page 185

.

2.4.14

2.4.15

Parking the machine safely

An incorrectly parked and insufficiently safeguarded machine can represent a danger for people, especially children, and can be set into motion or fall over in an uncontrolled manner.

People may be injured or killed.

„ Park the machine on a horizontal and level ground capable of bearing the load.

„ Before adjusting, repairing, servicing and cleaning the machine, ensure that it is securely positioned.

„ Observe section “Parking the Machine” in chapter Driving and Transport.

see Page 180

„ Before parking: Shut down and safeguard the machine,

see Page 31

.

Consumables

Unsuitable consumables

Consumables which do not comply with the requirements of the manufacturer may impair the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.

„ Use only consumables which comply with the requirements of the manufacturer.

For requirements on consumables,

see Page 75

.

Contamination of hydraulic system and/or fuel system

Foreign objects and/or liquids in the hydraulic system and/or fuel system may impair the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.

„ Clean all connections and components.

„ Close open connections by means of protective caps.

24

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

2.4.16

2.4.17

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Fuel is harmful

Fuels are carcinogenic. Swallowing fuel or inhaling fuel vapours may be harmful.

„ Do not inhale the vapours.

„ Do not swallow the fuel.

„ To prevent skin damage, avoid skin contact with the fuel.

„ Wear suitable protective gloves and protective goggles.

„ Immediately contact a doctor if Diesel fuel was swallowed.

2

2.4

Environmental protection and disposal

Consumables such as diesel fuel, brake fluid, antifreeze and lubricants (e.g. gearbox oil, hydraulic oil) may damage the environment and the health of people.

„ Do not release consumables into the environment.

„ Fill consumables in a liquid-tight labelled container and dispose of according to the official regulations.

„ Absorb leaked consumables with an absorbent material, fill them in a liquid-tight labelled container and dispose of according to the official regulations.

Chemicals

Keep cabin free of chemicals

Harmful and aggressive chemicals will pollute the air in the cabin. Harmful and aggressive reactive substances are for example:

• Solvents

• Fuels

• Oils and greases

• Detergents

• Acids

These chemicals may stick to clothing and enter the cabin in this way. Gases and liquids may escape even from closed tanks. The chemicals may impair health and the ability to concentrate.

As a result, accidents could be caused.

Electrical components could be damaged, for example control units and plug connections. This may result in fire and accidents caused by malfunctions, system failures or short circuits.

„ Keep the inside of the cabin clean.

„ Do not store or transport any harmful and aggressive chemicals in the cabin.

„ Before entering the cabin, remove clothing which may be contaminated with harmful and aggressive chemicals.

„ Before entering the cabin, remove soil and other substances from shoes or boots. The soil may be contaminated with chemicals.

Dangers arising from environment

Fire hazard

Combustible materials may accumulate in the machine due to operation or animals, such as rodents or nesting birds, or dust resuspension.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 25

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

In case of dry usage conditions, dust, impurities and crop residue may ignite on hot parts and the resulting fire may seriously injure or kill people.

„ Check and clean the machine every day before using it for the first time.

„ Check and clean the machine regularly during the working day.

„ Regularly check hydraulic oil lines for proper condition and position with sufficient clearance to sharp edges.

„ Regularly check exhaust systems, tubes and turbocharger of engine system. Remove crop residues.

„ While refuelling, do not smoke and do not place the machine near naked flames or explosive sparks.

Life-threatening electric shock from overhead lines

When the machine is in operation, it may reach the height of overhead lines. This may cause voltage to flash over to the machine and cause a fatal electric shock or fire.

„ When folding the lateral mowers in and out, keep a safe distance from electric overhead lines.

„ Never fold the lateral mowers in or out near pylons and overhead lines.

„ Keep a safe distance from electric overhead lines.

„ To avoid a potential electric shock caused by voltage flashover, never exit from or climb into the machine under overhead lines.

Behavior in the case of voltage flashover of overhead lines

High electric voltage may be applied to electrically conducting parts of the machine due to voltage flashover. In case of voltage flashover, a voltage drop where major voltage differences are present is created on the ground around the machine. Due to major voltage differences in the ground, people may be killed by electric shocks when making big steps, laying on the ground or supporting themselves with their hands.

„ Do not leave the cabin.

„ Do not touch any metal parts.

„ Do not establish any conductive connection to the ground.

„ Warn people: Do not approach the machine. Electrical voltage differences on the ground may lead to severe electric shocks.

„ Wait for help from professional rescue teams. The overhead line must be switched off.

If people have to leave the cabin despite the voltage flashover, for example because there is an imminent danger to life due to fire:

„ Avoid simultaneous contact with machine and ground.

„ Jump away from the machine. Jump into a safe standing position. Do not touch the machine from the outside.

„ Move away from the machine in very small steps keeping your feet close together.

26

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

2.4.18

Safety

Basic safety instructions

2

2.4

Sources of danger on the machine

Noise may damage your health

The noise development of the machine during operation may cause health damage such as hardness of hearing, deafness or tinnitus. When using the machine at high rotational speed, the noise level also increases. The emissions value was measured with the cabin closed under conditions according to DIN EN ISO 4254-1, Appendix B,

see Page 73

.

„ Before starting up the machine, estimate the risk caused by noise.

„ Depending on the ambient conditions, working hours and the working and operating conditions of the machine, specify and use suitable hearing protection.

„ Specify rules for the use of hearing protection and for the working time.

„ During operation keep windows and doors of the cabin closed.

„ Remove hearing protection for road travel.

Liquids under high pressure

The following liquids are under high pressure:

• Hydraulic oil

• Diesel fuel

• Engine coolant

• Refrigerant for the air conditioning system

Liquids escaping under high pressure may penetrate through the skin and cause severe injuries.

„ Shut down and safeguard the machine and contact qualified specialist workshop upon suspicion of damaged hydraulic system.

„ Never search for leaks with bare hands. Even a very pin-sized hole may lead to serious injuries.

„ When searching for leaks, use suitable aids, e.g. a piece of cardboard to avoid injuries.

„ Keep body and face away from leaks.

„ If liquids penetrate the body, immediately consult a doctor. The liquid must be removed from the body as quickly as possible.

Hot liquids

Persons can suffer burns and/or scalding when hot liquids are drained.

„ Wear personal protective equipment when hot consumables are drained.

„ If necessary, allow liquids and machine parts to cool down before you start repair, maintenance and cleaning work.

Damaged compressor unit

Damaged compressed-air hoses of compressor unit can tear off. Hoses moving in an uncontrolled manner can cause severe injuries.

„ Contact a specialist workshop immediately if you suspect that the compressor unit is damaged.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 27

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Damaged hydraulic hoses

Damaged hydraulic hoses may tear off, burst or cause oil leaks. As a result, the machine may be damaged and people may be seriously injured.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ If it is suspected that hydraulic hoses are damaged, immediately contact a service centre,

see Page 352

.

Toxic exhaust gases

Exhaust gases can cause serious health problems or death.

„ Ensure sufficient ventilation when the engine is running so that people are not exposed to the exhaust gases for a longer period of time.

„ In closed rooms, run the engine only when a suitable extraction system is in operation.

Hot surfaces

The following components may become hot during operation and may burn people:

• Engine

• Exhaust system

• Engine piping

• Hydraulic system

• Gearbox

„ Maintain an adequate distance from hot surfaces and adjacent components.

„ Leave machine parts to cool down and wear protective gloves.

2.4.19

Dangers in connection with certain activities: climbing up and down

Climbing up and down safely

You can fall from the ladder if you are careless when climbing up and down. You can slip, fall and seriously injure yourself when you climb onto the machine outside the ladders provided for this purpose.

Dirt, operating fluids and lubricants can make it difficult to step or stand safely on the equipment.

„ Always keep ladder steps and platforms clean and in a proper condition so that you can step and stand on them safely.

„ Never climb up and down while the machine is moving.

„ Always climb up and down with your face towards the machine.

„ When getting on and off, ensure a three-point contact with steps and handrails (always ensure that both hands and one foot, or both feet and one hand are in contact with the machine).

„ Never use control elements as a handle when you climb up and down. Accidental actuation of control elements can start functions inadvertently that may pose a danger.

„ Never jump off the machine when you climb down.

„ To climb up and down, use only the steps and platforms specified in these operating

instructions, see Page 60

.

28

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

2.4.20

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Dangers in connection with certain activities: Working on the machine

2

2.4

Only perform work when the machine is at standstill

If the machine is not shut down and safeguarded, parts may move unintentionally or the machine may start moving. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Before carrying out any repair, maintenance and cleaning work on the machine, shutdown and safeguard it,

see Page 31

.

Maintenance and repair work

Improper maintenance and repair work endanger operational safety. Thus there is a risk of accidents, serious injuries or death.

„ Only perform work which is described in this operating instructions. Prior to any work, stop

and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ All other maintenance and repair work must only be performed by qualified specialist workshop.

Working at or on heights of the machine

There is a risk of falling when working at or on heights of the machine. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„

Prior to any work, stop and safeguard the machine, see Page 31 .

„ Make sure you stand securely.

„ Use a suitable fall protection.

„ Secure the area below the assembly point against falling objects.

Raised machine and machine parts

The raised machine and machine parts may fall or tilt unintentionally. People may be seriously injured or killed, as a result.

„

Do not stay under the raised machine or machine parts which are not safely supported, see

Page 31 .

„ Prior to all work on raised machines or machine parts, lower the machine or machine parts.

„ Before performing any work under raised machines or machine parts, secure the machine or machine parts with rigid safety support or with hydraulic shut-off device or by supporting against lowering.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 29

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Danger associated with welding work

Improper welding work will endanger the operational safety of the machine. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„ Never perform welding work on the following components:

• Engine

• Gearbox

• Components of the hydraulics

• Components of the electronics

• Frame or supporting components

• Running gear

„ Before carrying out welding work on the machine, obtain consent by KRONE customer service and, if required, identify alternatives.

„ Before performing welding work on the mowers, detach them from the machine.

„ Welding work must only be performed by experienced qualified personnel.

„ Attach the earthing of the welding device near the welding points.

„ Caution when performing welding work near electric and hydraulic parts, plastic parts and pressure accumulators. The parts may be damaged, endanger people or cause accidents.

Before performing welding work on the forage harvester:

„ Switch off main battery switch.

„ Pull engine control plug out of the engine block.

„ Disconnect batteries.

„ Connect positive and negative cables of the machine by an electrical connection.

2.4.21

Dangers in connection with certain activities: checking and charging batteries

If the battery is handled incorrectly, e.g. inadvertent connection of the battery poles to a metal object, excessive charging in conjunction with a spark, the battery may explode. People may be injured or burnt by the explosion or burnt by spraying battery acid.

„ Use a suitable voltmeter to check the condition of the battery.

„ Charge the battery only in well ventilated rooms with the battery compartment cover open.

„

To charge the battery, follow these operating instructions, see Page 353 .

„ Keep fire, sparks and naked flames away from the battery.

„ To prevent acid from leaking, transport the battery in the installation position only.

2.4.22

30

Dangers in connection with certain activities: working on wheels and tyres

Improper assembly or disassembly of wheels and tyres will endanger the operational safety. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously injured or killed.

The fitting of wheels and tyres requires adequate knowledge and approved mounting tools.

„ If there is a lack of knowledge, have the wheels and tyres fitted by the KRONE dealer or by a qualified tyre service.

„ When fitting tyres on the rims, never exceed the maximum permitted pressure specified by

KRONE, otherwise the tyre or even the rim may explode,

see Page 73 .

„

When mounting the wheels, mount the wheel nuts with the specified tightening torque, see

Page 306

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

2.4.23

Safety

Safety routines

Behaviour in dangerous situations and in case of accidents

Any measures not taken or incorrect measures in dangerous situations can make it difficult or impossible to rescue exposed persons. Due to the impeded conditions of rescue, the chances to help and heal injured people deteriorate.

„ As a matter of principle: Park the machine.

„ Get an overview of the existing danger and identify the reason.

„ Secure the accident site.

„ Save persons from the danger zone.

„ Leave danger zone and do not enter it again.

„ Alarm rescue workers and seek help, if possible.

„ Carry out immediate lifesaving actions.

2

2.5

Safety routines 2.5

2.5.1

2.5.2

Shutting down and safeguarding the machine

WARNING

Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts

If the machine has not been shut down, machine or machine parts may move unintentionally.

As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Before leaving the operating position: Shut down and safeguard the machine.

To shut down and safeguard the machine:

„ Park the machine on a stable, horizontal and level ground.

„ Switch off the drives and wait until coasting parts have come to a complete stop.

„ Secure the self-propelled machine against rolling away by applying the parking brake.

„ Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Switch off the main battery switch,

see Page 179

.

„ Use wheel chocks to secure the self-propelled machine against rolling away.

Securing raised machine and machine parts against lowering

WARNING

Crushing hazard due to movement of machine or machine parts

If the machine or machine parts are not secured against lowering, the machine or machine parts may roll, fall or sag. Thus people could be squeezed or killed.

„ Lower the raised machine parts.

„ Shut down and safeguard the machine,

see Page 31

.

„ Before working on or under raised machine parts: Secure machine or machine parts against lowering by means of hydraulic shut-off device (e.g. stop cock) on machine side.

„ Before working on or under raised machine parts: Safely support machine or machine parts.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 31

2

2.5

Safety

Safety routines

In order to safely support the machine or machine parts:

„ To support, only use suitable and sufficiently dimensioned materials that do not break or yield.

„ Bricks and hollow blocks are not suitable for safely supporting the machine and machine parts. Therefore they must not be used.

„ Car jacks are also not suitable for safely supporting the machine and machine parts. They must not be used, as well.

2.5.3

Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter element changes safely

WARNING

Safely checking the oil level and changing oil and filter element

The operational safety of the machine can be impaired if oil level check and oil and filter element changes are not carried out safely. This can lead to accidents.

„ Safely check the oil level and change oil and filter element.

To check the oil level and change oil and filter element safely:

„ Lower raised machine parts or secure them against falling down,

see Page 31 .

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31 .

„ Observe the intervals for oil level check, oil and filter element changes,

see Page 264

.

„ Use only the oil grades/oil quantities specified in the consumables table,

see Page 75

.

„ Ensure that the oil and the equipment for filling are clean.

„ Clean the area around the components (for example gearbox, high-pressure filter) and make sure that no foreign objects get into the components or the hydraulic system.

„ Check installed seal rings for damage. Replace them if necessary.

„ Collect leaking oil and/or waste oil in a container provided for this purpose, and dispose of it

properly, see Page 25 .

2.5.4

Running actuator test

WARNING

Run actuator test safely

When actuators are energised, functions are carried out directly and without a safety prompt.

This may cause the unintentional movement of machine parts, trapping and seriously or fatally injuring persons.

ü Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test.

ü The person performing the test must know which machine parts are activated by controlling the actuators.

„ Run the actuator test safely.

To run the actuator test safely:

„ Lower raised machine parts or secure them against falling,

see Page 31 .

„

Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 31 .

„ Cordon off the danger zone of the actuated moving machine parts in a clearly visible manner.

32

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

„ Ensure that there is nobody in the danger zone of the actuated moving machine parts.

„ Switch on the ignition.

„ The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators.

2

2.6

Safety labels on the machine

Every safety label is provided with an order number and can be ordered directly from the authorised KRONE dealer. Immediately replace missing, damaged and unrecognisable safety labels.

When attaching safety labels, the contact surface on the machine must be clean and free of dirt, oil and grease to ensure optimum adhesion of the labels.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 33

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Position and meaning of safety labels

Overview 1

6

WARNING DANGER WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING

1 before operating or servicing machine.

personnel to operate machine.

to avoid death or serious injury from contact with or ladder.

Do not carry passengers.

and keep it with you while performing machine against inadvertent rolling.

oil easily punctures skin causing serious injury and

Relieve pressure before performing repair work.

27 022 558 0

2

6

3 4

27 021 178 0

4 3

5

2

BMG000-034

34

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

1.

Order no. 27 022 558 0 (1x)

This safety label includes the following warnings:

2

2.6

WARNING

• Read and understand operator´s manual before operating or servicing machine.

• Do not allow inexperienced personnel to operate machine.

DANGER

ELECTROCUTION HAZARD

Keep sufficient distance to avoid serious injury or death from contact with overhead electric power lines.

WARNING

FALL HAZARD

To avoid serious injury or death:

- Do not ride on platform or ladder.

- Do not carry passengers.

- Keep riders and children off machine.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury or death, shut off engine, remove ignition key and keep it with you while performing maintenance, repair work or clearing blockages.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 35

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

WARNING

To avoid serious injury or death, use parking brake and wheel chocks to secure machine against inadvertent rolling. Use both wheel chocks at front axle only.

WARNING

Do not operate the machine unless an approved fire extinguisher is installed.

WARNING

Do not use hand to search for leaks. High pressure oil easily punctures skin causing serious injury and gangrene. If injured, seek emergency medical help. Relieve pressure before performing repair work.

36

2.

Order No. 27 002 057 0 (2x)

WARNING

To avoid personal injury.

Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be moving.

3.

Order no. 27 006 964 0 (2x)

WARNING!

To avoid possible injury.

Close the protective equipment before placing the machine in operation !

4.

Order No. 27 014 825 0 (2x)

WARNING

Hot surfaces

-Keep sufficient distance from hot surfaces.

-Allow to cool before servicing.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

5.

Order no. 27 014 829 0 (1x)

WARNING

To Avoid serious injury or death

-Do not touch any moving machine components.

-Wait until all machine components have completely stopped.

2

2.6

6.

Order no. 27 021 178 0 (4x)

WARNING

High pressure oil can cause severe injury

Hydraulic accumulators contain oil and gas under high pressure.

Relieve pressure before servicing hydraulic system.

Hydraulic accumulators may be removed and repaired by a qualified workshop only.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 37

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Overview 2

1 2 4

3

1

3

5

6

BM000-223

7

3

3

38

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

1.

Order no. 942 546 0 (2x)

WARNING

Avoid bodily injuries from rotating engine fan.

Keep hands out of fan discharge area when engine is running.

2.

Order No. 27 014 825 0 (1x)

WARNING

Hot surfaces

-Keep sufficient distance from hot surfaces.

-Allow to cool before servicing.

3.

Order no. 27 002 057 0 (5x)

WARNING

To avoid personal injury.

Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be moving.

4.

Order no. 27 021 178 0 (1x)

WARNING

High pressure oil can cause severe injury

Hydraulic accumulators contain oil and gas under high pressure.

Relieve pressure before servicing hydraulic system.

Hydraulic accumulators may be removed and repaired by a qualified workshop only.

5.

Order no. 27 002 055 0 (2x)

6.

Order No. 27 002 056 0 (2x)

DANGER

Thrown objects can cause serious injury or death.

• Stay clear of machine while in operation.

• Keep discharge chute and shields in place.

• Replace worn or damaged protective skirting.

DANGER

Blade can cause serious injury or death.

• Stay clear of machine while in operation.

• Keep discharge chute and shields in place.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 39

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

7.

Order No. 27 002 057 0 (2x)

WARNING

To avoid personal injury.

Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be moving.

40

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 41

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Overview 3

3

6

4

1

2

BM000-224

4 6

3

5

5

6

5

4

1

2

5 6

5

7

42

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

1.

Order No. 27 002 055 0 (4x)

2.

Order No. 27 002 056 0 (4x)

DANGER

Thrown objects can cause serious injury or death.

• Stay clear of machine while in operation.

• Keep discharge chute and shields in place.

• Replace worn or damaged protective skirting.

DANGER

Blade can cause serious injury or death.

• Stay clear of machine while in operation.

• Keep discharge chute and shields in place.

3.

Order no. 27 009 598 0 (2x)

WARNING

Danger in the slewing range

• Keep distance while the machine is operating.

2

2.6

4.

Order no. 27 021 178 0 (3x)

WARNING

High pressure oil can cause severe injury

Hydraulic accumulators contain oil and gas under high pressure.

Relieve pressure before servicing hydraulic system.

Hydraulic accumulators may be removed and repaired by a qualified workshop only.

5.

Order no. 27 002 057 0 (5x)

WARNING

To avoid personal injury.

Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be moving.

6.

Order No. 27 014 829 0 (4x)

WARNING

To Avoid serious injury or death

-Do not touch any moving machine components.

-Wait until all machine components have completely stopped.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 43

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

7.

Order No. 27 006 964 0 (1x)

WARNING!

To avoid possible injury.

Close the protective equipment before placing the machine in operation !

44

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 45

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Overview 4

1

1

BM000-225

4

3

2

46

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

1.

Order no. 27 003 029 0 (2x)

WARNING

To avoid injuries

Do not stay in the swivel area of the outrigger arms.

Keep your distance.

2

2.6

2.

Order no. 27 014 824 0 (1x)

WARNING

To Avoid serious injury or death

- Do not ride on platform or ladder.

- Do not carry passengers.

3.

Order no. 27 021 178 0 (2x)

WARNING

High pressure oil can cause severe injury

Hydraulic accumulators contain oil and gas under high pressure.

Relieve pressure before servicing hydraulic system.

Hydraulic accumulators may be removed and repaired by a qualified workshop only.

4.

Order No. 27 006 964 0 (1x)

WARNING!

To avoid possible injury.

Close the protective equipment before placing the machine in operation !

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 47

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Overview 5

Universal shafts

1

1

1

1

48

BM000-329

1

27 021 178 0

1

27 021 178 0

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

1.

Order no. 949 228 0 (6x)

DANGER

ROTATING DRIVELINE – CONTACT CAN CAUSE DEATH.

KEEP AWAY!

DO NOT OPERATE WITHOUT-

• All driveline guards, tractor and equipment shields in place.

• Driveline securely attached at both ends.

• Driveline guards that turn freely on driveline.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 49

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Overview 6

With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

1

2

3

4

BM000-378

1

2

3

4

3

4

1

2

50

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

1.

Order no. 27 004 016 0 (4x)

Warning

Rotating augers can cut arms, hands and fingers.

To avoid injury STAY AWAY from rotating augers.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

2

2.6

2.

Order No. 27 002 057 0 (4x)

WARNING

To avoid personal injury.

Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be moving.

3.

Order No. 27 014 829 0 (4x)

WARNING

To Avoid serious injury or death

-Do not touch any moving machine components.

-Wait until all machine components have completely stopped.

4.

Order No. 27 002 055 0 (4x)

DANGER

Thrown objects can cause serious injury or death.

• Stay clear of machine while in operation.

• Keep discharge chute and shields in place.

• Replace worn or damaged protective skirting.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 51

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Overview 7

With version "Standard swathing"

1

2

1

2

1

1

BM000-391

52

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

2.7

Safety

Information labels on the machine

1.

Order No. 27 002 057 0 (4x)

WARNING

To avoid personal injury.

Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be moving.

2

2.7

2.

Order no. 27 002 055 0 (2x)

DANGER

Thrown objects can cause serious injury or death.

• Stay clear of machine while in operation.

• Keep discharge chute and shields in place.

• Replace worn or damaged protective skirting.

Information labels on the machine

Each information label has an order number. You can order the labels directly from your

KRONE dealer. Replace missing, damaged and illegible information labels immediately.

Prior to attaching an information label, ensure that the contact surface on the machine is clean and free of dirt, oil and grease so that the label can adhere to properly.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 53

2

2.7

Safety

Information labels on the machine

Location and meaning of the information labels

21

16

17

15

18

22

1

19 20

5

7

12

9

10

11

1

6

13

14

2

8

3

22

4

19

19

22

BMG000-069

54

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Information labels on the machine

1.

Ord. no. 942 571 0 (3x)

There are 24-V connections on the machine that are marked with this label.

24 V

942 571 0

2.

Ord. no. 27 023 945 1 (1x)

Kältemittel / Refrigerant / Koudemiddel /

Fluide frigoriène / Agente frigorífico /

Refrigerante / Хладагент

Füllmenge / Filling quantity / Vulhoeveelheid /

Quantité de remplissage / Cantidad de Ilenado /

Quantità di riempimento / Заправочный объем

HGWP-Treibhauseffekt / GWP-Greenhouse effect /

GWP-Broeikaseeffect /

HGWP-Effet de serre / GWP-Efecto invernadero /

HGWP-Effetto serra / GWP-парниковый эффект

CO 2 -Äquivalent / CO

Équivalent CO 2

2 equivalent / CO

/ Equivalente a CO 2 /

2 -Equivalent /

Equivalente di CO 2 / Эквивалент CO 2 g/г kg/кг

R 134a

1800

1430

2574

27 023 945 1

This label tells you specification and filling quantity of the refri-

gerant, see Page 75

.

3.

Ord. no. 27 016 518 1 (1x)

Use only gear oil Renolin Unisyn CLP 220,

see Page 75

.

27 016 518 2

4.

Ord. no. 27 021 281 0 (1x)

The gearbox oil level is checked with the oil dipstick, see

Page 360 .

2

2.7

27 021 281 0

5.

Ord. no. 27 024 033 0 (1x)

This label is on the hydraulic oil tank. The horizontal arrow indicates the minimum filling quantity of the hydraulic oil when

the side mounted mowers are folded in, see Page 349 .

27 024 033 0

6.

Ord. no. 27 016 830 1 (1x)

Use only hydraulic oil HLP 46,

see Page 75 .

HLP 46

27 016 830 1

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 55

2

2.7

Safety

Information labels on the machine

7.

Ord. no. 27 019 241 0 (1x)

CAUTION / ACHTUNG

Avoid Engine Damage!

Filling only with:

Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel

15 PPM Sulfur MAXIMUM

Motorschäden vermeiden!

Befüllung nur mit:

Diesel mit ultraniedrigem Schwefelgehalt

15 PPM Schwefel MAXIMUM

27 019 241 0

To avoid engine damage, only use diesel with ultra-low sul-

phur content, see Page 284 .

8.

Ord. no. 27 015 794 0 (1x)

CAUTION! / ACHTUNG

Initial filling only with coolant

Tectrol Coolprotect SI-OAT

Mixing 1/1 max. -36 °F

Erstbefüllung nur mit Kühlmittel

Tectrol Coolprotect SI-OAT

Mischung 1/1 max. -38 °C

27 015 794 0

Initial filling only with coolant Tectrol Coolprotect SI-OAT; mixture 1/1 max. -38°C,

see Page 77

.

9.

Ord. no. 27 006 778 1 (1x)

Measures before starting welding work on the machine, see

Page 30

.

Elektroschweißen

- Bei Schweißarbeiten Hauptschalter ausschalten

- Stecker der Motorregelung am Motorblock abziehen!

- Batterien abklemmen

- Plus- und Minusleitung elektrisch leitend verbinden

- Erdung des Schweißgeräts nahe der Schweißstelle

anbringen

27 006 778 1

10. Ord. no. 942 287 1 (1x)

DE

EN

ES

FR

IT

NL

RU

Beide Unterlegkeile nur an der Vorderachse verwenden.

Use both wheel chocks for the front axle only.

Use ambos calzos de rueda solo para el eje delantero.

N'utiliser les deux cales de freinage que pour l'essieu avant.

Utilizzare entrambi i cunei solo per l'assale anteriore.

Beide wielwiggen uitsluitend onder de vooras gebruiken.

Используйте оба подлокотника только на передней оси.

942 287 1

„

Use both wheel chocks only at the front wheels,

Page 178 .

see

11. Ord. no. 942 134 2 (1x)

DE

EN

ES

FR

IT

Radmuttern nach erstem Einsatz nachziehen.

Retighten wheel nuts after the first use.

Apretar las tuercas de fijación de ruedas después de la primera puesta en servicio.

Resserrer les écrous de fixation de roue après la premièremise en service.

Stringere i dadi di fissaggio delle ruote dopo il primo impiego.

Wielmoeren na het eerste gebruik natrekken.

После первого использования подтянуть гайки колес.

942 134 2

12. Ord. no. 27 021 875 0 (1x)

This label tells you that the wheel nuts must be retightened after the first use.

„ Transport the machine only in the direction of travel,

see

Page 182 .

27 021 875 0

56

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Information labels on the machine

2

2.7

13. Ord. no. 942 038 1 (2x)

Areas marked with this label shall be protected against splashing water. Never direct the water jet of a high-pressure cleaner at bearings and electric/electronic components.

942 038-1

14. Ord. no. 27 023 058 0 (1x)

This label sits on the battery compartment. It shows you the

jump start points on the machine, see Page 377 .

24 V

27 023 058 0

15. Ord. no. 939 567 1 (1x)

This label indicates the order numbers for spare blades.

139-888 139-889

139 888 139 889

16. Ord. no. 255 498 1 (1x)

Ø17mm min. 14 mm

255 498 1

17. Ord. no. 255 499 2 (1x)

For the "Bolted blades" version

Check the material thickness of the retaining bolts after each blade change and after each contact with foreign objects. If the material thickness of the retaining bolts is below 14 mm at the weakest point, the retaining bolts must be replaced by authorised specialist personnel.

Ø17mm min.14mm

For the "Quick-change blades" version

Check the material thickness of the retaining bolts after each blade change and after each contact with foreign objects. If the material thickness of the retaining bolts is below 14 mm at the weakest point, the retaining bolts must be replaced by authorised specialist personnel.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 57

2

2.7

Safety

Information labels on the machine

18. Ord. no. 27 025 577 0 (1x)

Vorderachse front axle

Hinterachse rear axle

Reifen tyre

800/65 R32

(AC70N)

800/60 R32

(Flotation Trac)

600/65 R28

(AC65)

600/60 R30.5

(Flotation Trac)

Reifenluftdruck tyre pressure

1,6 bar

23,2 psi

1,2 bar

17,4 psi

1,4 bar

20,3 psi

1,2 bar

17,4 psi

Drehmoment Radmuttern torque wheel nuts

This label tells you the tyre pressures for the individual tyre

types, see Page 78 , and the tightening torques and mainten-

ance intervals for the wheel nuts,

see Page 307

.

1)

2) - 7)

8) ...

1h

10h

50h

630 Nm /

465 lbf ft

27 025 577 0

19. Order no. 27 011 190 0 (3x) for version without "hydraulically folding side guards"

This label tells you that the guards can be opened with a screwdriver.

27 011 190 0

20. Ord. no. 27 009 074 0 (1x)

+

The label tells you that the degree of conditioning can be changed by adjusting the conditioning sheet at the lever.

+

27 009 074 0

21. Ord. no. 27 021 179 0 (1x)

Two conditioner speeds can be selected on the belt drive of the front mounted mower. This influences conditioning effect and power requirement,

see Page 248

.

58

700 1/min 1000 1/min

27 021 179 0

22. Ord. no. 27 100 367 0 (3x)

The universal shafts of the machine must be lubricated regu-

larly, see Page 338 . The universal shafts from the machine to

the mowers have profile tube lubrication and are marked with this information label.

27 100 367 0

• Ord. no. 27 018 170 0

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Information labels on the machine

2

2.7

There are jacking points on the machine that are identified with this label,

see Page 386

.

• Ord. no. 27 021 260 0

27 021 260 0

• Ord. no. 27 023 958 0

There are several lubrication points on the machine which must be lubricated at regular intervals,

see Page 341

. Lubrication points that are not directly visible are additionally marked with this information label.

There are lashing points on the machine that are identified with this label,

see Page 182

.

27 023 958 0

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 59

2

2.8

2.8

Safety

Safety features

Safety features

8

8

1

2

BMG000-047

7

8

10

9 11

6

3

4

5

60

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Pos.

1

Designation

Emergency exit

2 Wheel chocks

5

6

3

4

Fire extinguisher

Ladder

Main battery switch

Ladder lighting

7 Quick-stop switch

8 Working lights

Safety

Safety features

2

2.8

Explanation

In case of an emergency, the side window on the right-hand side in the direction of travel, next to the driver's seat, can be opened as an exit door,

see Page 79

.

Wheel chocks can be used to secure the machine from rolling away. The machine is equipped with

2 wheel chocks which are located above the front right wheel in the storage compartment,

see

Page 178

.

The fire extinguisher is located on the cabin lad-

der, see Page 63

.

„ To enter the cabin safely at all timed, climb up onto the machine using the left-hand side ladder only. Use the handrails while doing so.

The main battery switch is used to switch on or interrupt the machine’s power supply,

see

Page 179

.

For the "Ladder and maintenance lighting" version

To enable the rungs on the ladder to be easily seen, even in the dark, the rungs can be illuminated,

see Page 92 .

The quick-stop switch in the armrest is used to stop the machine's working functions in an emergency. The traction drive remains active,

see

Page 102

.

To ensure that the machine can be safely exited in the dark, the working lights are switched off

after a delay, see Page 92

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 61

2

2.8

Safety

Safety features

Pos.

9

Designation

Seat switch in driver's seat

10 SMV emblem

Explanation

The seat switch integrated into the driver's seat is used to check whether the driver's seat is occupied or not.

Field mode:

If the driver's seat is not occupied for longer than

7 seconds, then all the mowers and the traction drive are switched off.

Once the driver's seat is occupied again, the mowers can be switched on and the traction drive started up again.

„

Switch mowers on and off, see Page 186 .

Road mode:

If the driver's seat is not occupied for longer than

7 seconds, then the traction drive's reverse drive is switched off. During forward travel the traction drive is switched off only after the machine comes to a standstill.

The Slow-Moving Vehicle emblem (SMV emblem) is affixed to slow-moving machines or vehicles travelling on public highways at a speed of less

than 40 km/h (25 mph), see Page 62 .

„ Always put on the safety belt before driving.

2.8.1

11 Seatbelt

SMV emblem

62

KM000-567

The SMV emblem (Slow-Moving Vehicle) (1) is attached to slow-moving machines or vehicles travelling on public highways at a speed of less than 40 km/h (25 mph).

The SMV emblem (1) is at the rear in the centre or at the rear on left.

When driving the machine on public highways, the SMV emblem must be mounted.

If the machine is transported on transport vehicles (for example lorry or train), the SMV emblem must be covered or dismounted.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Safety

Safety features

2

2.8

2.8.2

Fire extinguisher

BXG000-004

INFO

The machine must not be operated without a fire extinguisher which contains at least 20 lbs of extinguishing agent.

The manufacturer recommends a powder fire extinguisher for fire classes A, B and C.

The support for fire extinguisher (1) is located in direction of travel left on the ladder (2) to the platform.

Have the fire extinguisher registered. So you can be sure that maintenance is carried out regularly and in good time (according to EN 3 at the latest every two years) and can be proven.

„ Prior to starting up the machine, check that the fire extinguisher is attached and ready for

use, see Page 308

.

„ Consider the operating instructions of the fire extinguisher and the web page of the manufacturer of the fire extinguisher.

„ Check fire extinguisher for external damage. In the event of anomalies, inform responsible maintenance company.

The inspection intervals in other countries may be different. In such a case, the prescribed inspection intervals of the country of operation apply.

„ Observe the provisions of the corresponding countries.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 63

3 Data memory

3 Data memory

A large number of electronic components of the machine contains data memories which save temporarily or permanently technical information on machine condition, events and errors. This technical information generally documents the condition of a part, a module, a system or the environment:

• Operating states of system components (e.g. filling levels)

• Status messages of the machine and its individual components (e.g. number of revolutions of wheel, wheel speed, motion delay, lateral acceleration)

• Malfunctions and defects in essential system components (e.g. light and brakes)

• Reactions of the machine in special driving situations (e.g. activation of the stability control systems)

• Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature).

This data, which is of an exclusively technical nature, is used to identify and eliminate faults and to optimise machine functions. The data cannot be used to generate movement profiles of travelled distances.

For service activities (e.g. repair services, service processes, warranty cases, quality assurance), employees of the service network (including manufacturer) can use special diagnostic units to read this technical information from the event and error data memories. If necessary, you can obtain further information there. After the error has been eliminated, the information in the error memory is either deleted or continuously overwritten.

When using the machine, situations are possible in which this technical data, in conjunction with other information (accident protocol, damage to the machine, witness statements etc.) - if necessary with the assistance of an expert - can be related to persons.

Additional functions, which are contractually agreed with the customer (e.g. teleservice), allow the transmission of certain machine data from the machine.

64

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

4

4.1

Machine Description

Machine overview

1

Machine Description

Machine overview

4

4.1

2 3

4

15

14

7

5

6

8

BMG000-049

13

12

11 10

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

9

65

4

4.1

Machine Description

Machine overview

6

7

4

5

8

1

2

3

Exhaust aftertreatment

Storage compartment right

Cabin

Front mounted mower

Outrigger arm right

Right side mounted mower

Rear storage compartment

Combination cooler

4.1.1

12

13

14

15

9

10

11

Engine

Side mounted mower left

Outrigger arm left

Battery compartment

Lifting unit

Main battery switch

Maintenance flap left

Content of the storage compartments on the machine

Right storage compartment (2)

• 2 wheel chocks

• 1 canister for fresh water

• 1 canister for windshield washer fluid

Rear storage compartment (7)

• 1 blade wrench

• 1 Drain hose with clamp for fluids

• 1 Special spanner for the shear bolt on the rotary hub

• Several spare blades

• Ring screws for lifting the side mounted mowers

Left maintenance flap (15)

• 1 Lever for operating the control block

• 1 Measuring hose

Possibilities for stowing on the front mowing unit

2

3

1

4

66

BM000-428

If required, the blade wrench (2) and the spare blades can be stowed on the front mowing unit.

Blade wrench (2):

„ Place the blade wrench (2) in the designated support / holder (4).

„ Secure the blade wrench (2) with the linch pin (3) on the support / holder (4).

Spare blades:

„ Stow the spare blades in the storage compartment (1).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Machine Description

Road travel lighting

4

4.2

4.2

Road travel lighting

7 8

1

5

2

3 4

6

5

1

4.3

BM000-064

1 Side direction indicator/flashing warning lamp

2 Dipped beam/full beam

3 Front position lamp

4 Front direction indicator/flashing warning lamp

5 Warning beacon

6 Licence plate lamp

7 Rear direction indicator/flashing warning lamp

8 Rear position lamp/parking light/brake lamp

Working lights

WARNING

Risk of accident from dazzling working lights

If the working lights are not switched off during road travel, road users may be blinded.

„ Switch the working lights off during road travel.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 67

4

4.4

Machine Description

Labelling

1

2

4

5

3

2 3

4.4

BM000-331

1 Front cabin working light

2 Rear cabin working light

3 Side working light

4 Rear working light

5 Front working light

Labelling

INFO

The entire identification plate represents a legal document and should not be altered or rendered illegible!

68

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Machine Description

Overload protection on the machine

4

4.5

Information for enquiries and orders

1

2

KRONE Agriculture SE

Heinrich-Krone-Str. 10, 48480 Spelle, Germany

Type

VIN

DVG000-004

Example image

1 Model 2 Vehicle ID Number

4.5

BMG000-062

The machine data can be found on type plate (1). The type plate is located on right-hand machine side on vehicle frame below the cabin.

Overload protection on the machine

NOTICE

Machine damage due to load peaks

The overload protections protect the machine against load peaks. For this reason, overload protections must not be modified. The warranty for the machine becomes void if other than the factory-specified overload protections are used.

„ Only use the overload protections installed in the machine.

„ To avoid early wear of the overload protection, switch the PTO shaft off if the overload protection responds for a longer period of time.

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Remedy the malfunction,

see Page 367

.

Universal shaft

To protect against overload, friction disc clutches are installed on the universal shafts to the mowers.

To vent the friction clutch, see Page 333 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 69

4

4.6

4.6

Machine Description

Functional description of self-propelled mower conditioner

Functional description of self-propelled mower conditioner

The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is a self-propelled work machine with

3 disc mowers with integrated mower conditioners. The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is used for mowing various live agricultural grasses and pulse crops (from the initial stage to the end of the photosynthetic process).

The 3 mowers can be used individually or together, thereby allowing the working width to be adjusted. The integrated mower conditioners accelerate the drying process of the mown crop.

4.7

Functional description of GNSS receiver

For the "GNSS receiver" version

The Hemisphere A222 is a GNSS receiver which provides position data in NMEA2000 and

NMEA0183 format via CAN and 2 serial interfaces.

EGNOS/WAAS

In the basic version that is supplied by KRONE, the GNSS receiver provides position data via

GPS with EGNOS/WAAS accuracy.

RTK

Via an internet connection, the KSC receives correction data that is sent to the GNSS receiver.

The correction data increases the accuracy of the GPS data.

Using the RTK function of the receiver requires a licence to be purchased. This licence can be purchased via the KRONE add-on F019 RTK "GNSS receiver". In addition, the KRONE add-on

F013 "NTRIP service" is required for the KSC.

Horizontal accuracy

Signal type

RTK

SBAS (EGNOS/WAAS)

Autonomous, no SA

RMS (in 67 % of the time)

8 mm

300 mm

1,200 mm

2DRMS (in 95 % of the time)

15 mm

600 mm

2,500 mm

Displays in the CCI terminal

The following displays appear on the CCI terminal when the GNSS receiver is used in conjunction with the CCI 800 or CCI 1200 terminal.

Icon Explanation

RTK reception active

EGNOS / WAAS reception active

GPS reception active

No reception possible

70

Recommendation for use

• Section Control

• Steering systems

• Other applications which require a precise GNSS signal.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

4.8

4.9

4.10

Machine Description

SectionControl function description

4

4.8

Supported satellite systems

• GPS

• GLONASS

• Galileo

SectionControl function description

For the "SectionControl" version

SectionControl permits automatic GPS-based section control of the mowers. When the mowers run over already worked fields again, the mowers are lifted automatically and GPS controlled.

The SectionControl system consists of a "server" (terminal), a "client" (machine), and a GPS antenna. The "server" controls the machine via the GPS data and the machine data which the

"client" communicates to the "server". The "client" responds to the control commands sent by the "server".

The area data is either determined during a first trip around the field or taken from the farm management system.

Functional description of parallel tracking

For "Parallel Tracking Terminal" version

The add-on F017 "Parallel Tracking Terminal" enables the parallel tracking function on the CCI terminal. This function enables the terminal to generate lanes on the basis of GPS data and working width. These lanes are visualised on the terminal and serve as steering aids for the driver.

Parallel tracking is also used for lane planning when the "GPS guidance" steering system is used,

see Page 163 and

see Page 196

.

For further information about parallel tracking see instructions for the CCI terminal.

Functional description of GPS guidance

For "GPS guidance" version

The "GPS guidance" steering system permits automatic driving along assigned lanes. Using

GNSS data, the machine automatically follows a previously defined lane. As long as the "GPS guidance" steering system is in use, the driver does not have to make any active steering movements. To be able to use the steering system, an initial lane must be driven along beforehand. On the basis of the working width of the vehicle, the system automatically calculates all the other lanes. On the headland, the machine must be turned manually by the driver.

Further information

see Page 163 and

see Page 196

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 71

4 Machine Description

4.11

Function description of swath width CV

4.11

Function description of swath width CV

With the "Swath width CV" version

BM000-502

Certain operating conditions may require the crops to be laid in a narrower swath. To do this, extensions are mounted on the auger conveyor and the auger tray.

72

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Technical Data

Dimensions

5

5.1

5

5.1

Technical Data

Dimensions

L

5.2

5.3

5.4

B

X

BMG000-064

Dimensions

Width [B]

Height [H]

Height with axle fully raised

Length [L]

Working width [X]

3,000 mm

4,000 mm

4,150 mm

8,450 mm

9,900 mm

Weights

Technically permitted maximum speed (road travel)

The technically permitted maximum speed may be restricted by different equipment features

(e.g. coupling device, axle, brake, tyres, etc.) or by statutory regulations in the country of use.

Technically permitted maximum speed (road travel)

Technically permitted maximum speed (road travel) 40 km/h

Engine data

Engine data

Manufacturer

Engine type

Design

Liebherr Machines Bulle SA

D946 A7-04

6-cylinder diesel engine

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 73

5

5.5

Technical Data

Traction drive

Engine data

Emissions level

Displaced volume

Sustained engine power

5.5

Traction drive

Traction drive

Type

Forward speed in field mode

5.6

5.7

5.8

5.9

IV (EU) / Tier 4f (USA)

12 L

330 kW (449 HP)

Vibration values

Vibration values

Total vibration value (upper limbs)

RMS value of the weighted acceleration (entire body)

Continuously variable hydrostatic drive

0–25 km/h

Electrical system

Electrical system

Alternator voltage

Alternator amperage

Battery voltage

Battery capacity

Ambient temperature

Ambient temperature

Temperature range for machine operation

24 V

180 A

24 V (2x12 V)

(2x) 135 Ah

Airborne noise emission

Airborne noise emission

Emissions value (sound pressure level)

Measurement device

Accuracy class

Measurement uncertainty (according to DIN EN ISO 11201)

77 dB (A)

Bruel & Kjaer, Type 2236

2

4 dB

-5 to +45 °C

≤2.5 m/s²

≤0.5m/s²

74

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

5.10

5.10.1

Technical Data 5

Consumables 5.10

Consumables

NOTICE

Machine damage due to mixing of oil

If oils, which have different specifications, are mixed with each other, the machine may be damaged.

„ Never mix oils, which have different specifications, with each other.

„ Contact your KRONE service partner before using an oil with a different specification after changing the oil.

The following filling quantities are reference values. The actual refiling quantity is determined when checking the level.

Biodegradable consumables can be used on request.

Oils

Vehicle

Designation

Hydraulic oil tank

General hydraulic system

Engine oil (diesel engine)

Transfer gearbox

Filling quantity

60 L

Specification Initial filling at the factory

SRS Wiolan HS 46

110 L

Hydraulic oil

HLP 46

Hydraulic oil

HLP 46

SRS Wiolan HS 46

40 L

10 L

LIEBHERR engine oil 10W-40

LIEBHERR engine oil

10W-40 options: Fuchs

Titan Cargo

MC 10W-40,

Chevron

Texaco URSA

TDX 10W-40,

Shell Rimula

R6M 10W-40 or Total Rubia

Tir 8600

10W-40

Renolin Unisyn

CLP220 or Mobil SHC 630

Renolin Unisyn CLP220

Front wheel hub gearbox

Rear wheel hub gearbox

2.5 L

1.5 L

Gear oil Shell Spirax S4 CX 50

Gear oil Shell Spirax S4 CX 50

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 75

5 Technical Data

5.10

Consumables

Mowers

Designation

Input gearbox on front mounted mower

Filling quantity

1.7 L

Main gearbox on front mounted mower

0.9 L

Main gearbox of side mounted mowers

6.5 L

7 L Front mounted mower cutterbar

Cutterbar side mounted mowers

8 L

Specification

SAE 90

SAE 90

SAE 90

SAE 90

SAE 90

List of mineral oils of quality class HLP (HM) and environmentally friendly, rapidly biodegradable HEPG pressure fluids allowed to be used for hydraulic oil tank:

HEPG VG 46 HLP VG 46 ISO viscosity class

Manufacturer

ADDINOL

AGIP

ARAL

ASEOL

AVIA

BAF 46Vitam

Aqua VG 46

Avia Hydrosynth 46

Hydraulic oil HLP 46

OSO 46

Aral Vitam GF 46

AVILUB RSL 46

Avia Fluid ZAD 46

BECHEM

BP

CASTROL

COFRAN

DEA

ELF

ENGEN

ESSO

FINA

FRAGOL

FUCHS

Hydrostar UWF 46

Biohyd PEG 46

Econa PG 46

Hydraulic oil PGK 46

Hydraulic oil D3031.46

Hydraulic TR 46

Renolin PGE 46

Energol HLP 46

HYSPIN AWS 46

Cofraline extra 46 S

Astron HLP 46

ELFOLNA 46

ELFOLNA DS 46

Engen TQH 20/46

NUTO H 46

HYDRAN 46

RENOLIN

MR 15, VG 46, B15 VG 46

Houghton

KLÜBER

KUWAIT

LIQUI MOLY

Mobil

Syntolubric 46

LAMORA HLP 46

Q8 Haydn 46, Q8 Holst 46, hydraulics S46

HLP 46 ISO

Mobil DTE 25

Mobil Hydraulic Oil Medium

76

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

ISO viscosity class

Manufacturer

SHELL

SRS

Stuart

Theunissen

TOTAL

TRIBOL

HEPG VG 46

Fluid BD 46

Hydrocor E46

ISOCOR E46

Technical Data 5

Consumables 5.10

HLP VG 46

Shell Tellus oil 46

Shell Hydrol DO 46

WIOLAN HS 46

WIOLAN HX 4

Cofraline extra 46 S

Azolla ZS 46

Tribol 772

Tribol ET 1140-46

Tribol 943 AW 46

Vesta HLP 46

VALVOLINE

VERKOL

Ultrasyn PG 46

5.10.2

5.10.3

Lubricating grease

Designation

Central lubrication unit

Lubrication points (manual lubrication)

Filling quantity

3.5 L

As required 1

Specification

Grease up to NLGI class 2 with EP additives adjusted to the outside temperatures

(thickener: Lithium Complex), basic oil viscosity at 40°C:

85 ... 180 mm²/s,

see

Page 344

.

Mobilgrease XHP 222 Intermediate gear 65 g (per side)

1 Lubricate the lubrication point until grease comes out of the bearing position. After lubricating, remove the grease coming out of the bearing position.

Coolant

Consumables/Initial filling at the factory

Designation

Engine coolant tank

Filling quantity Specification

54 L See enclosed

LIEBHERR operating instructions

Initial filling at the factory

• Tectrol Coolprotect SI-OAT

• Fully demineralised water

5.10.4

Refrigerant (air conditioning)

Designation

Refrigerant

Oil

Filling quantity

1,800 g

75 mL

Specification

R134a

PAG ISO100

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 77

5 Technical Data

5.11

Tyres

5.10.5

Fuel/urea

Designation

Fuel tank

Urea tank

5.11

Filling quantity

800 L

70 L

Specification

See shipped operating instructions from LIEBHERR

Tyres

Before working on a slope, increase the tyre pressure by 0.4 bar more than the recommended pressure indicated in the following table. After working on the slope, the tyre pressure must be set to the recommended values in the table.

If there is a large amount of road travel, increase the tyre pressure for the Flotation Trac variant by 0.4 bar more than the recommended tyre pressure indicated in the following table.

Before putting the machine into storage at the end of the harvesting season, set the tyre pressure to the maximum permitted value. Before starting the new season, set the tyre pressure to the values in the table.

Tyres

Front: 800/65 R32 (AC70N)

Rear: 600/65 R28 (AC65)

Front: 800/60 R32 (Flotation Trac)

Rear: 600/60 R30.5 (Flotation Trac)

Recommended tyre pressure

1.6 bar

1.4 bar

1.2 bar

1.2 bar

Max. permissible tyre pressure

4.0 bar

2.0 bar

4.0 bar

4.0 bar

78

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

6

6.1

Control and Display Elements

Overview of operating elements

Control and Display Elements

Overview of operating elements

6

6.1

3 4 5

1

6 7 8 9

2

10

11

6.2

BM000-034

3

4

1

2

5

6

Steering column with steering wheel

Brake pedal

7

8

Operation unit automatic climate control 9

Light control unit 10

11 Interior lighting/control lever lighting switch

Main mode switch

Navigation module

Keypad

Ignition lock

Terminal

Control lever

Opening doors and windows of cabin

Opening right side window

In case of an emergency, the right side window can be opened as an exit door.

WARNING

Danger to life due to blocked escape route

If the right side window cannot be opened without obstruction, the escape route for the driver is obstructed.

„ Make sure prior to travel that the right platform is free.

To fully open the window on the right next to the driver's seat:

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 79

6

6.2

Control and Display Elements

Opening doors and windows of cabin

80

BM000-067

„ Swivel the lever (1) forwards until it locks into position.

BM000-176

„ Pull the cotter pin (2) and remove it.

BM000-177

„ Open the side window (3) all the way.

Opening the cabin door

Opening the cabin door from outside

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Control and Display Elements

Opening doors and windows of cabin

6

6.2

BX001-138

„ Unlock the door lock (1) with the door key.

„ Press in the door lock (1) and open the door.

Opening the cabin door from inside

1

BX001-139

„ Press up the door opening lever (1) and open the door outwards.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 81

6

6.3

6.3

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

Control and display elements on the steering column

BM000-035

1 Steering wheel

2

3

Indicator and warning lamps, see

Page 86

Unlocking pedal for steering column adjustment bottom,

see Page 129

5

6.3.1

6.3.1.1

Steering column switch

Activating horn

4 Release lever for horizontal steering column adjustment and upper pivot point,

see Page 129

Steering column switch, see Page 82

82

BM000-055

„ To actuate the horn, press the momentary switch (1) for the horn on the steering column switch (2).

Æ As long as the momentary switch is pressed, the horn sounds.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

6.3.1.2

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

Switching direction indicators on/off

6

6.3

6.3.1.3

BM000-056

„ To switch on the right direction indicator, move the steering column switch (1) forwards.

Æ The right direction indicator is switched on.

„ To switch on the left direction indicator, move the steering column switch (1) backwards.

Æ The left direction indicator is switched on.

The direction indicator is switched off when the steering wheel is turned.

„ To switch off the direction indicator when the steering wheel is not turned, move the steering column switch (1) in the opposite direction.

The "Direction indicator" indicator lamp lights up when the direction indicator lamps are switched

on, see Page 86

.

Switching parking light/dipped beam on/off

2 1

I

II

III

IV

BM000-059

The lighting setting ring gauge (2) on the steering column switch (1) can be turned to the following positions:

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 83

6

6.3

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

Pos.

I

Icon Explanation

Switches the light off.

II

III

IV

Switches the parking light on.

Switches dipped beam on.

Inoperative

6.3.1.4

„ To switch on the parking light, turn the lighting setting ring gauge (2) one notch forwards to position II.

Æ

Front parking light and rear parking light are lit, see Page 89

.

ü

The ignition is switched on, see Page 102 .

„ To switch on the dipped beam, turn the lighting setting ring gauge (2) to the second notch forwards to position III.

Æ

The green "Dimmed beam" indicator lamp is lit, see Page 86 .

Æ Dipped beam, front parking light, licence plate lamp and rear position lamp are on,

see

Page 89

„ To switch off the parking light and dipped beam, turn the lighting setting ring gauge (2) to the last notch backwards to position I.

Æ All the lights are switched off.

Switching full beam on/off

84

BM000-057

ü The dimmed beam is switched on,

see Page 83 .

„ To switch on full beam, press the steering column switch (1) downwards.

Æ The steering column switch locks in this position and full beam is switched on.

Æ The blue "Full beam" indicator lamp lights up,

see Page 86

.

„ To switch off full beam, move the steering column switch (1) to the neutral position.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

6.3.1.5

Actuating headlamp flasher

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

6

6.3

6.3.1.6

BM000-058

„ To activate the headlamp flasher, press the steering column switch (1) upwards.

Æ As long as the steering column switch is pressed upwards, the full beam and the blue "Full

beam" indicator lamp are lit, see Page 86 .

Switching windshield wipers on/off

1 2

I

II

III

IV

BM000-060

The setting ring gauge (2) for the windshield wiper on the steering column switch (1) can be turned to the following positions:

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 85

6

6.3

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

Pos.

I

Icon Explanations

Switches the windscreen wiper off.

II

III

IV

Switches on interval mode of the windscreen wiper.

Switches on continuous operation of the windscreen wiper.

Switches on the windscreen washer system.

6.3.2

„ To switch on the wiper in interval mode, turn the setting ring gauge (2) one notch forwards to position II.

Æ The windshield wiper operates in interval mode.

„ To switch on the wiper in continuous operation, turn the setting ring gauge (2) to the second notch forwards to position III.

Æ The windshield wiper operates in continuous operation.

„ To switch on the windscreen washer system, turn the setting ring gauge (2) to the third notch forwards to position IV.

Æ The windscreen washer system is operating.

„ To switch off the wiper, turn the setting ring gauge (2) to the last notch backwards to position

I.

Æ The wiper returns to the rest position and stops.

Indicator and warning lamps

86

BM000-263

1 "Left direction indicator" indicator lamp

2 "Full beam" indicator lamp

3 "Dimmed beam" indicator lamp

4 Warning lamp "Charging control"

5 not assigned

6 "Right direction indicator" indicator lamp

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

6.3.3

Control and Display Elements

Actuating service brake

Switching the flashing warning light on/off

6

6.4

6.4

BM000-061

„ To switch on the flashing warning light, press the flashing warning light switch (1) to position

II.

Æ When the flashing warning light is switched on, all direction indicators flash simultaneously

and the warning lights for the direction indicators on the left and right are lit, see Page 86 .

„ To switch off the flashing warning light, press the flashing warning light switch (1) to position

I.

Æ The warning lights for direction indicators on the left and right go out.

Actuating service brake

WARNING

Risk of accident due to defective service brake!

If the service brake has a restricted function, the machine cannot be brought to a standstill in time. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Before starting the machine, always check service brake and ensure its functionality.

BM000-062

„ Before driving, check the service brake, drive the machine at low speed one metre forwards and actuate the brake pedal (1).

Æ If the machine brakes, the service brake is functioning correctly.

Æ If the machine does not brake, stop driving the machine.

„

Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Have a technician check and repair the service brake.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 87

6

6.5

6.5

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

Lighting

6.5.1

Light control unit

The Light Control Unit is used to switch the working lights, mirror heating and the wipers on and off and to adjust the outside mirrors.

If one of the functions is active, an LED above the corresponding key lights up.

88

2

3

4

9

10

11

12

13

6

7

8

BXG000-012

Pos.

1

5

Designation

"Mirror heating" key

Explanation

Switches the heating on/off for the outside rearview mirrors and the anti-collision mirror.

not assigned

"Warning beacon" key Switches the warning beacons on/off.

"Cabin working light, left/right" key

Switches the cabin working light at left and right on/off.

"Maintenance and ladder lighting" key

Switches the maintenance and ladder lighting on/ off.

"Working light, left/right" key Switches the working light at left and right on/off.

not assigned

"Left wiper" key

"Right wiper" key not assigned

"Rear working light" key not assigned

"Memory" key

Switches the left wiper on/off.

Switches the right wiper on/off.

Switches the rear working light on/off.

Switches a programmed combination of working

lights on/off, see Page 91 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

6.5.1.1

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

6

6.5

16

17

18

19

Pos.

14

15

20

21

22

Designation not assigned

"Working lights cabin roof" key

Explanation

Switches the cabin roof working lights on/off.

"Front guard working lights" key Switches the front guard working lights on/off.

not assigned

"All working lights" key 1

"Right outside rear-view mirror" key not assigned

Switches all working lights on/off.

Activates the right outside rear-view mirror for mirror adjustment.

"Left outside rear-view mirror" key

Activates the left outside rear-view mirror for mirror adjustment.

"Mirror adjustment" control panel Adjusts the reflecting surface of the mirror which has a lit indicator lamp.

1 The "All working lights" key switches the working lights on/off only if the parking light has been switched on.

Road travel lighting

7 8

1

5

2

3 4

6

5

1

BM000-064

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 89

6

6.5

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

1 Side direction indicator/flashing warning lamp

2 Dipped beam/full beam

3 Front position lamp

4 Front direction indicator/flashing warning lamp

5 Warning beacon

6 Licence plate lamp

7 Rear direction indicator/flashing warning lamp

8 Rear position lamp/parking light/brake lamp

6.5.1.2

Working lights

WARNING

Risk of accident from dazzling working lights

If the working lights are not switched off during road travel, road users may be blinded.

„ Switch the working lights off during road travel.

1

2

4

5

3

2 3

90

BM000-331

1 Front cabin working light

2 Rear cabin working light

3 Side working light

4 Rear working light

5 Front working light

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

6.5.1.3

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

Switching and saving working lights via “Memory” key

6

6.5

6.5.1.4

BXG000-039

The "Memory" key (2) can be used to combine several working lights (1) into one lighting scenario so that they can be switched on or off simultaneously.

„ To save a lighting scenario with different working lights, switch on the required working lights

(1) with the corresponding keys and press the "Memory" key (2) for 3 seconds.

Æ The lighting scenario is saved. For monitoring purposes the LED above the "Memory" key

(2) flashes.

„ To switch on the working lights (1) of the saved lighting scenario, press the "Memory" key

(2).

Æ The working lights (1) of the saved lighting scenario light up. For monitoring purposes the

LEDs are lit above the keys which belong to the lighting scenario.

„ To switch off the working lights (1) of the saved lighting scenario, press the "Memory" key

(2).

Æ The working lights (1) of the saved lighting scenario go out. For monitoring purposes the

LEDs go out above the keys which belong to the lighting scenario.

„ To save a new lighting scenario, repeat the saving process with different working lights (1).

Æ The previous lighting scenario is overwritten.

Warning beacons

1 2

BM000-095

INFO

In some countries the warning beacons must be switched on for road travel. Observe the respective national statutory regulations.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 91

6

6.5

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

The warning beacons (2) are automatically switched on when the Main Mode Switch is set to

"Road mode".

„ To manually switch off the warning beacons (2), press the key (1) on the Light Control Unit.

Æ The LED above the key (1) goes out.

6.5.1.5

Ladder lighting

For the "Ladder and maintenance lighting" version

To enable the rungs on the ladder up to the cabin to be easily seen, even in the dark, the rungs can be illuminated

92

BM000-234

Leaving Home function

The Leaving Home function allows the cabin to be entered safely, even in the dark.

„ To activate the "Leaving Home" function, press the "Ladder lighting" (3) key.

Æ The lights (1), (2), (4) and (5) light up for a certain amount of time.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

Coming Home function

The Coming Home function allows the cabin to be left safely, even in the dark.

„ The activate the Coming Home function, turn the ignition key to the "STOP" position.

Æ The lights (1), (2), (4) and (5) light up for a certain amount of time.

6

6.5

Lighting for refuelling

The lighting for refuelling serves to illuminate around the tank nozzle sufficiently in the dark.

„ To activate the lighting for refuelling, press the "Ladder lighting" key (3) 2 x or if either the

Coming Home function or Leaving Home function is active, press the "Ladder lighting" key

(3) 1 x.

Æ The lights (2) light up for a certain amount of time.

INFO

The time period for activation of the individual functions can be set in the terminal in the menu cabin "Lighting settings".

6.5.1.6

Maintenance lighting

For the "Ladder and maintenance lighting" version

BM000_236

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 93

6

6.5

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

1 Maintenance lamp left side hood

2 Maintenance lamp cooler compartment

3 Maintenance lamp right side hood

4 Maintenance lamp rear storage compartment

„ To switch on the maintenance lamps (1), (2), (3) and (4), press the "Maintenance and ladder lighting" key,

see Page 88 .

Æ The maintenance lamps (1), (2), (3) and (4) light up.

„ To switch on the maintenance lamps (1), (2), (3), (4) and the lighting on the ladder up to the

cabin, press the key on the ladder up to the cabin for longer than 2 seconds, see Page 88 .

Æ The maintenance lamps (1), (2), (3), (4) and the lighting on the ladder up to the cabin light up for 20 minutes. After 20 minutes the central electrical system switches off to preserve battery power.

6.5.1.7

Wiper on left/on right

6.5.1.8

BXG000-051

„ To switch on the left wiper, press the "Left wiper" key (1) on the light control unit.

Æ The left wiper wipes, the LED above the key is lit.

„ To switch off the left wiper, press the "Left wiper" key (1).

Æ The left wiper goes into park position, LED above the key goes out.

„ To switch on the right wiper, press the "Right wiper" key (2) on the light control unit.

Æ The right wiper wipes, the LED above the key is lit.

„ To switch off the right wiper, press the "Right wiper" key (2).

Æ The right wiper goes into park position, LED above the key goes out.

Setting mirror

Adjusting outside rear-view mirrors

WARNING

Danger to life of persons next to and behind the machine due to impaired view of the driver!

If the outside rear-view mirrors are not correctly set, the driver does not have a proper view of the area around the machine, possibly placing people in danger when the machine is being driven.

„ Before driving the machine, set the outside rear-view mirrors so that the driver has maximum visibility of the rear area from the driver’s seat.

94

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

6

6.5

BXG000-052

„ In order to adjust the left outside rear-view mirror, press the “Left outside rear-view mirror” key (3).

ð The LED above the key lights up.

„ Press the "Mirror adjustment" control panel (1) in the direction in which the selected mirror is to be adjusted.

Æ The area of the left outside rear-view mirror swivels in the desired direction.

„ In order to adjust the right outside rear-view mirror, press the “Right outside rear-view mirror” key (2).

ð The LED above the key lights up.

„ Press the "Mirror adjustment" control panel (1) in the direction in which the selected mirror is to be adjusted.

Æ The surface of the right outside rear-view mirror swivels in the desired direction.

Setting the anti-collision mirror

WARNING

Danger to life of persons on right next to the machine as the driver only has an impaired view!

If the anti-collision mirror is not adjusted correctly, the driver does not have a proper view of the ground area next to the right front wheel. This can endanger persons when the machine is moving.

„ Before you start driving, adjust the anti-collision mirror such that the ground area next to the right front wheel is sufficiently visible to the driver from the driver’s seat.

BXG000-097

„ Manually set the anti-collision mirror (1) in such a way that the ground area next to the right front wheel can be checked prior to starting.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 95

6

6.5

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

Switching mirror heating on/off

6.5.2

BXG000-054

„ To heat the outside mirrors and the anti-collision mirror, press the "Mirror heating" key (1).

Æ The LED above the key lights up. The heating for the outside mirrors and the anti-collision mirror has been switched on.

„ To switch off the heating for the outside mirrors and the anti-collision mirror, press the

"Mirror heating" key (1).

Æ The LED above the key goes out. The heating for the outside mirrors and the anti-collision mirror has been switched off.

Interior lighting

96

BM000-040

The interior lamp (2) is located on the cab roof and is switched with the switch (3).

The switch has 3 positions:

Pos.

I

II

III

Explanation

The interior lamp is switched via the door contact switch.

The interior lamp has been switched off.

The interior lamp has been switched on.

Switching logic when the switch (3) is in position II:

• When the cabin door is opened, the interior lamp (2) is switched on and is switched off again after a delay.

• When the cabin door is being opened, the interior lamp (2) is switched on. As soon as

ignition stage II is switched on see Page 169 , the interior lamp (2) goes out.

• When the diesel engine has been switched off, the interior lamp (2) is switched on and goes out after a short time.

In addition to the interior lamp (2), the lighting for the control lever (1) is switched on as soon as the parking, dipped or full beam has been switched on.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

6.6

Control and Display Elements

Operating elements on control lever

Operating elements on control lever

The control lever is used to make important settings and issue commands for road and field mode of the machine.

6

6.6

3

2

5

6

M2

M3

M4

7

8

10

9

11

12

4

M1

1.4

13

14

1.1

1.2

1 1.3

BXG000-010

The keys on the control lever are used to run machine functions. The keys are assigned either to sensing mode, step mode or 2-stage operation. Depending on the particular key operating mode involved, there are 2 methods of running the machine functions:

• Sensing mode: The function is activated and completely run by tapping the key. The function is not stopped by releasing the key.

• Step mode: The function is run for as long as the key is pressed.

designated in the following table is located on the keypad, see

The release button

Page 99 .

Pos.

1.1

Designation

"Lower/fold down all mowers simultaneously" key

Explanation

Lowers all mowers simultaneously. (Sensing mode)

1.2

"Raise/fold in all mowers simultaneously" key

With previously pressed release button :

Folds down all mowers simultaneously from the transport into the headland position. (Step mode)

For the "Hydraulically foldable side guards" version:

The side guards of the mowers are automatically actuated.

Raises all mowers simultaneously. (1.stage: step mode; 2. stage: sensing mode)

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 97

6

6.6

6

7

8

4

5

2

3

Control and Display Elements

Operating elements on control lever

Pos.

1.2

1.3

1.4

9

10

11

12

Designation

"Raise/fold in all mowers simultaneously" key

Explanation

With previously pressed release button :

Folds up all mowers simultaneously from headland position to transport position. (Step mode)

For the "Hydraulically foldable side guards" version:

The side guards of the mowers are automatically actuated.

"Left front mower side shift" key For the "Hydraulic side shift on front mower" version:

Shifts front mower to left. (Step mode)

"Right front mower side shift" key For the "Hydraulic side shift on front mower" version:

Shifts front mower to right. (Step mode)

"Acceleration behaviour" switch Switches the value for the acceleration behaviour.

"Traction drive" key Releases the traction drive.

"M1" key

"M2" key

Freely assignable memory key

Freely assignable memory key

"M3" key

"M4" key

"Lower front mower" key

"Raise front mower" key

Freely assignable memory key

Freely assignable memory key

"Automatic steering system" key For the "Automatic steering" version:

Activates the automatic steering system. (Sensing mode)

Lowers the front mower. (Sensing mode)

Raises the front mower. (1.stage: step mode; 2.

stage: sensing mode)

"Lower/fold down right side mounted mower" key

Lowers the right mower (sensing mode).

"Raise/fold in right side mounted mower" key

With pressed release button :

Folds down right mower from transport into headland position. (Step mode)

Raises the right mower. (1.stage: step mode; 2.

stage: sensing mode)

With previously pressed release button :

Folds in the right mower from the headland position into the transport position. (Step mode)

98

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

6.7

Pos.

13

14

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the keypad

Designation

"Lower/fold down left side mounted mower" key

Explanation

Lowers the left mower. (Sensing mode)

"Raise/fold in left side mounted mower" key

With previously pressed release button :

Folds down left mower from transport into headland position. (Step mode)

Raises the left mower. (1.stage: step mode; 2.

stage: sensing mode)

6

6.7

With previously pressed release button :

Folds in the left mower from the headland position into the transport position. (Step mode)

Control and display elements on the keypad

BXG000-011

• The keys that can be used to select functions light up.

• The top left LED in each key flashes on and off or lights up when the selected function is executed.

The keys on the keypad are used to run machine functions. The keys are designed either for sensing mode or step mode or 2-stage operation. Depending on the operating mode of the keys, there are 2 methods of running the machine functions:

• Sensing mode: The function is activated and completely run by tapping the key. The function is not stopped by releasing the key.

• Step mode: The function is run for as long as the key is pressed.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 99

6

6.7

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

10

11

20

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the keypad

Pos.

1

12

13

14

15

16

Designation

Release button for "Mowing units and drives"

Explanation

Release for:

• Fold in/down mowing units

• Switch on drives (Sensing mode)

Not assigned.

"Switch on all drives" key Switch on all drives. (Sensing mode)

"Switch off all drives" key

"Switch on left drive" key

"Switch off left drive" key

"Switch on front drive" key

Switch off all drives. (Sensing mode)

Switch on left drive. (Sensing mode)

Switch off left drive. (Sensing mode)

Switch on front drive (Sensing mode)

"Switch off front drive" key

"Switch on right drive" key

"Switch off right drive" key

"Increase diesel engine speed" key

"Reduce diesel engine speed" key

"Diesel engine speed" key

"M-Power/Eco-Power" key

"Parking brake" key

"Traction control system" key

Switch off front drive (Sensing mode)

Switch on right drive. (Sensing mode)

Switch off right drive. (Sensing mode)

Increases the speed of the diesel engine. (Step mode)

Reduces the speed of the diesel engine. (Step mode)

Switches between saved speed of the diesel engine and idle speed of the diesel engine (sensing mode).

Switches between Eco‑Power mode and

M‑Power mode (Sensing mode)

• Applies the parking brake. (Sensing mode)

• Releases the parking brake. (Sensing mode)

Changes between TC I (low slip) and TC II (increased slip) and OFF. (Sensing mode)

Raises front and rear axle. (Step mode) "Raise front and rear axle" key

"Lower front and rear axle" key

"Fold down side guard" key

"Fold up side guard" key

"Open left swath hood" key

"Close left swath hood" key

"Open right swath hood" key

"Close right swath hood" key

Lowers front and rear axle. (Step mode)

Folds down side guard. (Sensing mode)

Folds up side guard. (Sensing mode)

Opens left swath hood. (Sensing mode)

Closes left swath hood. (Sensing mode)

Opens right swath hood. (Sensing mode)

Closes right swath hood. (Sensing mode)

100

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

6.8

Main mode switch

Control and Display Elements

Main mode switch

6

6.8

4

5

2

3

BM000-012

The Main Mode Switch (8) is used to select the operating mode of the machine.

Pos.

1

6

7

8

Designation

Quick-stop switch

Main Mode Switch tip

"Neutral mode" switch position

Explanation

Stops the working functions. The diesel engine continues running.

Indicates the selected operating mode.

Selects neutral mode.

"Road mode" switch position

"Maintenance mode" switch position

"Field mode" switch position

Selects road mode.

Selects maintenance mode.

Selects field mode.

Main Mode Switch unlocking device

Main mode switch

Pressed unlocking device releases the rotary switch.

Released unlocking device locks the rotary switch.

Selects the operating mode of the machine.

To select an operating mode with the Main Mode Switch (8):

„ Press and hold down the unlocking device (7) on the Main Mode Switch (8) and simultaneously turn the Main Mode Switch (8) to the required operating mode.

Æ The tip (2) indicates the selected operating mode.

To stop the working functions in an emergency:

„ Press the quick-stop switch (1).

To release the working functions again:

„ Unlock the quick-stop switch (1) by slightly turning it clockwise.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 101

6

6.9

6.9

Control and Display Elements

Quick-stop switch

Quick-stop switch

BXG000-006

The quick-stop switch (1) in the cabin is used to stop the working functions of the machine. The diesel engine continues running.

„ To actuate it, press down the quick-stop switch (1) until it locks into position.

Æ The working functions are stopped. The switch is locked.

6.10

BXG000-058

„ To release it, turn the quick-stop switch (1) clockwise until the home position is reached.

Æ The working functions are released again and can be activated again. The switch has been released.

Ignition lock

102

BM000-029

The ignition key (1) can be turned to 4 different positions in the ignition lock:

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Pos.

STOP

I

II

III

Control and Display Elements 6

Automatic climate control 6.11

Explanation

The circuit is interrupted.

The circuit for the electronics is switched on.

The ignition is switched on

Start position

6.11

6.11.1

Automatic climate control

Overview of automatic climate control

The driver can use the automatic climate control operation unit to operate the air conditioning and heating system of the cabin.

INFO

If the power supply to the control unit of the automatic climate control is interrupted, the control unit performs a self test after power is restored. After the self test is complete, the last setting to be saved appears.

BX000-140

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 103

6 Control and Display Elements

6.11

Automatic climate control

4

5

6

Pos.

1

2

3

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Designation

Air conditioning mode key

Plus key

Icon for the cabin

Air conditioning mode icon

REHEAT mode icon

Temperature unit

REHEAT key

Shift key for temperature units

Shift key for operating mode

Numeric display

Manual fan mode icon

Bar icon for the rotational speed of the evaporator fan

Fully automatic mode icon

Minus key

Control unit on/off key

Explanation

Switches air conditioning mode on/off.

In automatic mode: Increases the value for the required cabin temperature.

In manual mode: Increases the rotational speed of the evaporator fan.

Indicates the air flow in the cabin in REHEAT mode.

Air conditioning mode has been switched on.

REHEAT mode has been switched on.

Indicates the temperature unit of the setpoint value of the cabin temperature in °C or °F.

Switches REHEAT mode (dehumidifying cabin air) on/off.

Switches between temperature units °Celsius/

°Fahrenheit (key covered)

Automatically/manually switches between rotational speed of the evaporator fan.

Indicates the setpoint value of the cabin temperature or the error code.

Appears in manual fan mode.

Indicates the rotational speed of the evaporator fan in manual mode.

Fully automatic mode has been switched on.

In automatic mode: Reduces the value for the required cabin temperature.

In manual mode: Reduces the rotational speed of the evaporator fan.

Switches the control unit on/off.

6.11.2

Switching on automatic climate control

„ To switch on automatic climate control, press .

When the automatic climate control has been switched on, the control unit performs a self test.

The software version is displayed for approx. 5 seconds.

104

EQ002-096

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Control and Display Elements 6

Automatic climate control 6.11

Then the operating hours of the air conditioning are displayed for 5 seconds (e.g. 6 operating hours).

6.11.3

EQ002-095

Then the last saved setting appears in the display.

Setting cabin temperature

EQ002-098

The display shows the following information:

• The current cabin temperature in °C.

• That the control unit is in automatic mode (AUTO).

„ To change the cabin temperature, gradually press shown on the display.

or until the required value is

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 105

6 Control and Display Elements

6.11

Automatic climate control

6.11.4

Switching air conditioning mode on/off

EQ002-101

„ To switch on air conditioning mode, press .

Æ The icon is shown on the display. Air conditioning mode has been switched on.

Æ The compressor is turned on by the control unit if necessary.

„ To switch off air conditioning mode, press .

6.11.5

Æ The icon goes out on the display. Air conditioning mode has been switched off.

Æ The compressor is switched off by the control unit.

Switching REHEAT mode on/off

During REHEAT mode the cabin air is dehumidified.

106

EQ002-094

„ To switch on REHEAT mode, press .

Æ The icon is shown on the display. REHEAT mode has been switched on.

In REHEAT mode

• the compressor is permanently switched on,

• the rotational speed of the evaporator fan can be manually adjusted further,

• the control unit switches on the heater as required to keep the room temperature at the setpoint value.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

REHEAT mode is automatically limited to 60 minutes.

Control and Display Elements 6

Automatic climate control 6.11

„ To switch off REHEAT mode, press .

Æ The icon goes out on the display. REHEAT mode has been switched off.

6.11.6

Manually setting the evaporator fan speed

EQ002-093

„ To switch on the manual setting of the rotational speed of the evaporator fan,

Æ The manual setting of the rotational speed of the evaporator fan is active.

press.

Æ The bargraph shows the currently set fan speed (full bargraph =

100%).

Æ The AUTO icon goes out on the display. AUTO mode has been switched off.

Æ The icon flashes for 5 s.

During this period the fan speed can be increased or reduced in 10% steps.

„ To increase the fan speed, press .

„ To reduce the fan speed, press .

INFO

The lowest adjustable fan speed is 30% (three bars are displayed).

„ To activate AUTO mode, press twice.

Æ The AUTO icon is shown on the display. AUTO mode has been switched on.

Æ The and icons are no longer displayed.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 107

6 Control and Display Elements

6.11

Automatic climate control

6.11.7

Switching temperature display between degrees Celsius and degrees

Fahrenheit

EQ002-092

„ To switch the temperature display between degrees Celsius and degrees Fahrenheit, hold down the concealed key (1) and also press the key.

6.11.8

EQ002-091 / EQ002-101

Æ The temperature display switches to the other temperature unit.

Malfunctions indicated on display

Error code (F0)

108

EQ002-099

A defective ambient temperature sensor is displayed by the flashing display (F0):

• The control unit has recorded an error in the room temperature sensor. Controller is no longer ready for operation.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Control and Display Elements 6

Sockets 6.12

INFO

In case of an error, the climate control continues working with the setting that was valid before the fault was recorded.

Possible causes of fault:

• Short circuit or discontinuance of sensor line.

• The plug connection on sensor or control unit temperature sensor is defective.

After the error has been eliminated, the climate control is ready for operation again.

The fault is no longer displayed.

Error code (F1)

6.12

6.12.1

EQ002-100

Error in blow-out temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator (F1):

• The control unit has recorded an error of blow-out temperature sensor, the control is no longer ready for operation.

INFO

In case of an error, the climate control continues working with the setting that was valid before the fault was recorded.

Possible causes of fault:

• Short circuit or discontinuance of sensor line.

• The plug connection on sensor or control unit temperature sensor is defective.

After the error has been eliminated, the climate control is ready for operation again.

The fault is no longer displayed.

Sockets

Cigarette lighter 12 V/24 V socket

WARNING

Risk of burns from the hot cigarette lighter

During operation the cigarette lighter generates such high temperatures that it may cause burns.

„ Do not held the cigarette lighter (1) in the depressed position.

„ Hold the hot cigarette lighter (1) by the handle only.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 109

6 Control and Display Elements

6.12

Sockets

6.12.2

BX001-203

On the right side of the cabin next to the ignition lock are:

• Cigarette lighter (12 V) (1)

• Socket (24 V) (2)

„ Press in the cigarette lighter (12 V) (1) to heat it up:

Æ When the required lighter temperature has been reached, the cigarette lighter (12 V) (1) jumps back out automatically.

Electrical consumers with 24 V and maximum 15 A can be connected to the socket (24 V) (2).

If the diesel engine has been switched off, the battery will be discharged.

12 V sockets

BX001-204

Located on the right side of the cabin next to the ignition lock is the 3-pin 12 volt socket

(15 A) (1).

110

BX001-206

The 12 volt socket (1) is located behind the driver's seat.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Control and Display Elements 6

Sockets 6.12

6.12.3

Diagnostics sockets

1

3

2

6.12.4

BMG000-068

There is the following diagnostics interfaces behind the driver's seat:

• ISOBUS diagnostics socket (1)

• KRONE diagnostics socket (2)

• For "GPS guidance" version : Ethernet diagnostics socket (3)

„ Ensure that only devices authorised by KRONE are connected to the diagnostics interfaces.

USB connection

BX001-207

The USB connection (1) is located in the right armrest.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 111

7

7.1

7

Initial operation

Checklist for initial operation

Initial operation

This chapter describes assembly and adjustment work on the machine which may be carried out by qualified technicians only. Here, the notice “Personnel qualification of technicians” applies,

see Page 18

.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 272 .

WARNING

Risk of injury or damage to the machine due to faulty initial operation

If the initial operation is carried out incorrectly or incompletely, the machine may present defects. As a result, people may be injured or killed or the machine may be damaged.

„ Initial operation must only be carried out by authorised technicians.

„ Read in full and observe the “Personnel qualification of technicians”,

see Page 18 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

7.1

Checklist for initial operation

ü There are no leakages present in the machine.

ü All cable and plug connections are properly connected and laid.

ü All hoses are properly laid.

ü

All guard cloths are mounted, see Page 113

ü All screws and nuts are checked for tightness, and are tightened to the specified tightening

torques, see Page 272 .

ü The machine is fully lubricated,

see Page 341 .

ü

The universal shafts are lubricated, see Page 338

.

ü

The wheel chocks are at hand and ready to use, see Page 60

.

ü

The platforms, steps and standing areas are clean and in proper condition, see Page 60 .

ü The fire extinguisher is mounted,

see Page 113

.

ü

The licence plate is mounted, see Page 113 .

ü

The blades are installed, see Page 119

.

ü The tyres have been checked and the tyre pressure is adjusted correctly,

see Page 306

.

ü The hub covers of the rear axle have been checked for damage and tight fit (for "front wheel drive" version),

see Page 304

.

ü

The anti-twist locks are mounted on the left and right of the lighting module, see Page 120

.

ü The enclosed operating instructions are in the drawer below the driver's seat.

112

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

7.2

Mounting fire extinguisher

Initial operation

Mounting fire extinguisher

7

7.2

7.3

BPG000-034

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Insert the fire extinguisher (1) into the support at the front on the left ladder so that the operating instructions on the type plate are readable and are facing outwards.

WARNING! Risk of injury due to falling fire extinguisher! In order to secure the fire extinguisher, adjust the tensioning straps with sufficient tension according to the circumference of the fire extinguisher.

„ Adjust the length of the tensioning straps according to the circumference of the fire extinguisher.

„ Shorten the length of the tensioning straps by a few millimetres and close the fasteners to guarantee that the closed tensioning straps are tensioned sufficiently.

Æ The tensioning straps have been properly adjusted if the fasteners can only be closed by means of an auxiliary tool (e. g. screwdriver).

Æ If it is possible to close the fasteners manually:

„ Shorten the length of the tensioning straps so far that the fasteners can only be closed by an auxiliary tool (e. g. screwdriver).

Mounting licence plate

7.4

BM000-101 / BM000-100

„ Mount the front licence plate in the recess (1) on the front spoiler of the cabin.

„ Mount the rear licence plate in the license plate holder (2) on the tailgate.

Mounting guard cloths

ü All mowing units are in working position,

see Page 97

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 113

7

7.4

Initial operation

Mounting guard cloths

Side mounted mowers

1

BMG000-056

„ Mount the guard cloths (1) on the right and left side mounted mower.

To do this:

114

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Initial operation

Mounting guard cloths

7

7.4

BM000-187

„ Remove the screw (1).

„ Dismount the cover cap (2).

BM000-188

„ Push the guard cloth (2) into the protective profile (1).

BM000-189

„ Mount the cover cap (2) with the screw (1).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 115

7

7.4

Initial operation

Mounting guard cloths

116

3

2

2

1

BMG000-057

„ Mount the screw connections (3).

„ Close the turnlock fasteners (1) on the guard cloths (2).

Front mounted mowers

1

2

BMG000-043

„ Mount the guard cloths (1) on the front mounted mower.

To do this:

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Initial operation

Mounting guard cloths

7

7.4

BM000-187

„ Remove the screw (1).

„ Dismount the cover cap (2).

BM000-188

„ Push the guard cloth (2) into the protective profile (1).

BM000-189

„ Mount the cover cap (2) with the screw (1).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 117

7

7.4

Initial operation

Mounting guard cloths

BMG000-044

„ Mount the screw connections (1).

„ Mount the screw connections (3) with the clamping strap (4).

„ Close the turnlock fasteners (5) on the guard cloth (2).

118

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Initial operation

Installing the blades

Cross conveyor

For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

1

2

3

4

4

7

7.5

5

5

BM000-121

ü The side mounted mowers are in headland position.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü

The side mounted mowers have been securely supported, see Page 31

.

„ Mount one deflector curtain (3) each on the right and left cross conveyor.

To do this:

„ Remove the deflector curtain (3) from the rear storage compartment.

„ Mount the deflector curtain (3) with the screw connections (5) and the clamping straps (4) on the cross conveyor.

„ Insert the support rod (1) through the eyes of the deflector curtain (3), attach them to the machine frame and secure them with the spring cotter pin (2).

Swath cloth under the machine

7.5

BM000-235

„ Remove the swath cloth (1) from the rear storage compartment.

„ Mount the swath cloth (1) on the cover sheet (3) with the screw connections (2).

Installing the blades

ü All mowing units are in working position,

see Page 97

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 31

.

„ Install the blades for the "Blade quick fastener" design,

see Page 326

; install the blades for the "Blade screw connection" design

see Page 325

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 119

7

7.6

7.6

Initial operation

Mounting the anti-twist lock on the lighting module

Mounting the anti-twist lock on the lighting module

1

2 3

3

4

BM000-339

„ Take the 2 anti-twist locks (2) and the screw connections (1) (each with 2 discs, 1 screw

(M4 x 20), 1 locknut) from the rear storage compartment.

„ Perform the following steps on the right and left of the lighting module.

„ To remove the sheet (4) from the lighting module, remove the screw connections (3).

„ Mount the anti-twist lock (2) on the support tube using the screw connection (1).

„ Mount the sheet (4) with the screw connections (3).

120

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

8

8.1

Start-up

Check before start-up

8

8.1

Start-up

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

Check before start-up

INFO

Compliance with the stipulated checks on the machine significantly increases the safety and the lifetime of the machine.

A machine with established defects must not be started.

„ If it is established that the machine has defects, shut down the machine and eliminate these defects or have them eliminated by technicians.

„ Before starting up the machine, carry out the inspections listed below and checks from the

maintenance table "Every 10 hours, at least daily", see Page 267 .

General

ü There are no leakages present in the machine.

ü All cable and plug connections are properly connected and laid.

ü All hoses are properly laid.

ü The safety devices are mounted and checked for completeness and damage.

ü

The platforms, steps and standing areas are clean and in proper condition, see Page 60 .

ü

The wheel chocks are at hand and ready to use, see Page 60

.

ü

The horn is functioning properly, see Page 82 .

ü The fire extinguisher is mounted in its support / holder and is ready for use,

see Page 308 .

ü The machine has been prepared for mowing operation, ,

see Page 135

.

Cabin

ü

The position of the mirror and the camera are set, outside mirror see Page 94

, inside mirror

and camera see Page 122 .

ü

The driver's seat is adjusted correctly, see Page 122 .

ü

All emergency exits are freely accessible and can be opened unhindered, see Page 79

.

ü All windows and mirrors are cleaned.

ü All wiper blades are in good condition.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 121

8

8.2

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

Lighting and labeling

ü The lighting and warning beacon are adjusted correctly and functioning properly,

see

Page 88 .

ü All red-white warning panels for making the machine visible are mounted in accordance with national laws.

Setting driver’s seat 8.2

8.2.1

Air-cushioned comfort seat

WARNING

Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts!

When the control lever cannot be moved freely in all directions, it is not possible to execute all functions of the control lever. It may then not be possible to respond quickly and correctly to hazardous situations.

„ After comfort seat, right armrest and steering column have been set, check whether the control lever can be moved freely in all directions.

„ Adapt the setting when the control lever cannot be moved freely in all directions.

WARNING

Risk of injury due to incorrectly set driver's seat!

When the driver's seat is not adjusted individually to the driver, the driver may damage his health due to bad posture while working.

„ Before starting up the machine, adjust the driver's seat ergonomically and individually to the driver.

WARNING

Danger of injury resulting from unintentional movement of machine parts

If the vibration damper has been set too softly, the seat may hit the floor when driving on a bad road and contact with the operating elements is no longer guaranteed. It may then not be possible to respond quickly and correctly to hazardous situations. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Always set the vibration damper of the comfort seat tightly enough to prevent the seat from hitting the floor even when driving on a bad road.

WARNING

Risk of accident due to brief distraction of the driver

When the driver's seat or steering column is adjusted while driving, the driver cannot pay adequate attention to the travel path. This may result in serious accidents.

„ Adjust the driver's seat and the steering column only when the machine is at a standstill.

122

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

8.2.1.1

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "Standard" version)

8

8.2

BXG000-100

3

4

1

2

5

6

Driver's seat

Seat depth adjustment

Seat angle adjustment

Longitudinal adjustment

Horizontal suspension

Height setting

7

8

9

10

11

12

Adjustment of the backrest

Left armrest

Lumbar support

Headrest

Cover cap armrest adjustment

Vibration damper setting

The air comfort seat (1) can be individually adapted to the requirements of the driver.

Height adjustment

The height can be adjusted continuously by means of a hydraulic system. In order to prevent damage, actuate the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.

„ Pull lever (6) completely upward.

ð The driver's seat (1) is moved upwards.

„ Press lever (6) completely down.

ð Move driver's seat (1) downwards.

Æ When the upper or lower end stop of the height adjustment mechanism is reached, the height will be adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum spring travel.

Horizontal suspension

The shock load in direction of travel through the driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by the horizontal suspension.

„ To activate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the front.

„ To deactivate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the rear.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 123

8

8.2

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

Longitudinal adjustment

„ Pull locking lever (4) up, push driver's seat (1) forward or backward into the desired position and permit the locking lever (4) to lock in place.

„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. The driver's seat must no longer be movable into another position.

Seat angle adjustment

„ Pull the key (3) up and set the inclination of the seat base by simultaneously increasing or decreasing the pressure on the seat base.

Seat depth adjustment

„ Pull key (2) up and move seat base to the desired position by moving it forward and backward simultaneously.

Adjustment of the backrest

„ Pull locking lever (7) up, set the inclination of the backrest and allow the locking lever (7) to engage.

„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. Make sure that the backrest cannot be moved.

Weight adjustment

In order to prevent damage to health, the individual driver’s weight setting should be checked and adjusted prior to starting up the machine. The setting should be carried out whilst sitting absolutely stationary.

„ Briefly pull the lever (6) upwards.

Headrest

The headrest has been optimally set when the upper edges of the head and headrest are at the same height.

„ Pull out or push in the headrest (10) over the perceptible notches until the correct height has been reached.

Lumbar support

„ Turn the hand wheel (9) to the left or right in order to individually adjust the height as well as the intensity of the arching in the backrest.

Adjusting the vibration damper

The vibration behaviour of the driver's seat can be optimally adjusted to each driving situation from "soft" to "hard" using the infinitely adjustable vibration damper.

„ Pull (12) lever upwards to set soft seating comfort.

„ Pull (12) lever downwards to set hard seating comfort.

Setting the left armrest

124

BM000-047

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.

„ Remove cover cap (11) to adjust the armrest height.

„ Loosen hexagon nut, move armrest into desired position and tighten hexagon nut.

„ Press cover cap (11) on hexagon nut.

Setting the right armrest

8

8.2

8.2.1.2

BM000-048

The right armrest (13) and the control lever form a unit.

„ To set the right armrest, raise lever (14).

„ Fold right armrest up or down, forward or backward and release the lever (14).

Æ The setting remains the same.

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "ACTIVO" version)

BXG000-099

3

4

1

2

Air-cushioned comfort seat

Seat depth adjustment

Seat angle adjustment

Longitudinal adjustment

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

8

9

10

11

Left armrest

Seat heating and air conditioning on/off

Headrest

Cover cap armrest adjustment

125

8

8.2

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

5

6

7

Horizontal suspension on/off

Weight and height setting

Adjustment of the backrest

12

13

14

Vibration damper setting

Lumbar support setting at bottom

Lumbar support setting at top

The air comfort seat (1) can be individually adapted to the requirements of the driver.

Height adjustment

The height can be adjusted continuously by means of a hydraulic system. In order to prevent damage, actuate the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.

„ Pull lever (6) completely upward.

ð The driver's seat (1) is moved upwards.

„ Press lever (6) completely down.

ð Move driver's seat (1) downwards.

Æ When the upper or lower end stop of the height adjustment mechanism is reached, the height will be adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum spring travel.

Horizontal suspension

The shock load in direction of travel through the driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by the horizontal suspension.

„ To activate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the front.

„ To deactivate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the rear.

Longitudinal adjustment

„ Pull locking lever (4) up, push driver's seat (1) forward or backward into the desired position and permit the locking lever (4) to lock in place.

„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. The driver's seat must no longer be movable into another position.

Seat angle adjustment

„ Pull the key (3) up and set the inclination of the seat base by simultaneously increasing or decreasing the pressure on the seat base.

Seat depth adjustment

„ Pull key (2) up and move seat base to the desired position by moving it forward and backward simultaneously.

Adjustment of the backrest

„ Pull locking lever (7) up, set the inclination of the backrest and allow the locking lever (7) to engage.

„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. Make sure that the backrest cannot be moved.

Weight adjustment

The weight is automatically adjusted when the seat is loaded by the driver.

Setting the vibration damper

126

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

8

8.2

BM000-050

The oscillating behaviour of the driver’s seat can be adapted ideally to each driving situation via the adjustable vibration damper.

Damping level II is the default setting recommended by the manufacturer at average driver’s weight.

The lever (12) for the setting of the oscillating behaviour has three settings:

Pos.

I

II

III

Explanation

Soft damping

Medium damping

Hard damping

„ To set the vibration damper, turn lever (12) to desired stage and release it.

The damping behaviour can be coordinated between the damping levels by two additional setting positions each.

Lumbar support

BM000-051

The intensity of the arching of seat backrest can be adapted individually so that the spine is supported and the pressure on the back is relieved.

„ In order to adapt the intensity of the arching in the upper area of the backrest, press „+“ or

„-“ on switch (14) until the desired setting is reached.

„ In order to adapt the intensity of the arching in the lower area of the backrest, press on “+” or “-” on switch (13) until the desired setting is reached.

Seat heating and seat climate control

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 127

8

8.2

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

BM000-052

The seat surface can be vented via seat climate control so that a cool and dry seating is enabled.

The switch (9) has three positions:

Pos.

0

I

II

Explanation

Seat heating and seat climate control OFF

Seat climate control ON (seat heating OFF)

Seat heating ON (seat climate control OFF)

„ In order to switch on seat climate control, switch the switch (9) to position I.

Æ The left light indicates the operation of seat climate control.

„ To switch on the seat heating, switch the switch (9) to position II.

Æ The right lamp indicates the operation of the seat heating.

Setting the left armrest

128

BM000-047

Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.

„ Remove cover cap (11) to adjust the armrest height.

„ Loosen hexagon nut, move armrest into desired position and tighten hexagon nut.

„ Press cover cap (11) on hexagon nut.

Setting the right armrest

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

8

8.2

8.2.2

BM000-048

The right armrest (13) and the control lever form a unit.

„ To set the right armrest, raise lever (14).

„ Fold right armrest up or down, forward or backward and release the lever (14).

Æ The setting remains the same.

Steering column adjustment

WARNING

Risk of accident due to brief distraction of the driver

When the driver's seat or steering column is adjusted while driving, the driver cannot pay adequate attention to the travel path. This may result in serious accidents.

„ Adjust the driver's seat and the steering column only when the machine is at a standstill.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 129

8

8.2

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

8.2.3

BM000-054

„ To adjust the inclination of the steering column around the lower pivot point (a), actuate the unlocking pedal (1) and move the steering column (3) into the required position.

„ To lock the steering column (3), release the unlocking pedal (1).

„ To adjust the height of the steering wheel (c) and the inclination of the steering column around the upper pivot point (b), release the release lever (2) and move the steering column

(3) into the required position.

„ To lock the steering column (3), lock the release lever (2).

Setting the terminal

130

BXG001-114

The position of the terminal can be adjusted to the driver and to the visible conditions by turning the support (11) and the terminal.

Adjusting the inclination of the terminal forwards/backwards:

„ Loosen the lever (2) and adjust the inclination of the terminal forwards/backwards (8).

„ Tighten the lever (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

8.2.4

Start-up

Setting driver’s seat

Adjusting the inclination of the terminal sideways:

„ Loosen the screw (1) and adjust the inclination of the terminal sideways (7).

„ Tighten the screw (1).

Rotating the terminal to the left/right:

„ Loosen the screw (3) and rotate the terminal to the left/right (6).

„ Tighten the screw (3).

Adjusting the height of the terminal:

„ Loosen the screw (4) and rotate (10) the support (11) until the required height has been reached.

„ Tighten the screw (4).

Swiveling the terminal to the left/right:

„ Loosen the lever (5) and swivel the support (11) to the left/right (9).

„ Tighten the lever (5).

8

8.2

Sun visor

8.2.5

BM000-044

„ Manually adjust the position of the sun visor (1) as required.

Adjustable air nozzles

BXG000-044

Adjust the air nozzles (1) to prevent the discs from misting over.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 131

8

8.3

8.2.6

Start-up

General aspects

Inside rear mirror

8.3

8.3.1

BM000-042

„ Manually set the inside rear mirror (1) so that the required outside area is visible in the mirror.

General aspects

Instructional seat

WARNING

Danger of accident due to distraction of the driver

The driver may be distracted by a second person in the cabin, possibly causing him not to pay adequate attention to his driving. This may result in serious accidents with personal injury.

„ The passenger seat may only be used while the driver is being instructed.

„ While the machine is being operated, there must be no other person in the cabin or on the machine except for the driver, unless the driver is being instructed.

132

BXG000-042

„ Before using the passenger seat (1), fold down its seating area.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

8.3.2

Cooling box (version with "Insulated thermobox")

Start-up

General aspects

8

8.3

8.3.3

BX001-142

The cooling box (1) is located below the instructional seat (2) in the cabin.

„ To use the cooling box, connect the 12 V plug (4) to the 12 V socket (3) on the left next to the driver's seat.

Topping up fresh water

8.3.4

BMG000-065

The reservoir for fresh water (2) is in the storage compartment above the right front wheel.

„ Open the storage compartment (1).

„ In order to top up the reservoir (2), open the cover (3).

„ Close the cover (3).

„ Close the storage compartment (1).

Drawer for first-aid kit and operating instructions

BM000-085

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 133

8

8.3

Start-up

General aspects

The drawer (2) for the first-aid kit and the operating instructions is located below the front of the driver’s seat (1).

„ To remove the first-aid kit or the operating instructions, pull the drawer (2) forwards.

134

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

9

9.1

Commissioning – mowing operation

Connecting the front mounted mower

Commissioning – mowing operation

9

9.1

Checks before commissioning – mowing operation

ü The hunting community is informed about the mowing time.

ü The area is searched for wildlife and clutches of eggs.

ü

The front mounted mower has been mounted, see Page 135 .

ü The side mounted mowers have been mounted,

see Page 141

.

ü

The "swathing" components or the cross conveyors are mounted. For "swathing" see

Page 148

, for cross conveyor see Page 155 .

ü All mowers have been checked for missing and worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs and mowing discs or mower drums, and replacements have been made as necessary

see

Page 322

.

ü The tine conditioners have been checked for wear and any that were missing have been replaced,

see Page 321

.

ü

All guard cloths are complete and undamaged, see Page 332 .

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

Connecting the front mounted mower

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine

During the connecting/decoupling process of the front mounted mower, the machine may start to move unexpectedly and may therefore result in injury.

„ Only one person may carry out the connecting/decoupling process.

„ Make sure there is nobody in the danger zone during the connecting/decoupling process.

„ Stop the connecting/decoupling process immediately if there is somebody in the danger zone.

INFO

It is recommended to couple/uncouple the front mowing unit using the support jack and the top link support. The materials can be purchased from KRONE.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü

The front mounted mower is safety supported, see Page 31

or with the "Parking support" version

: The parking support is in the support position, see Page 194 .

ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "II" position ,

see Page 102

.

ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position,

see Page 101

.

ü The mowing functions menu "Connect front mounted mower" has been opened in the terminal.

„ Press "Connect" in the terminal.

„ To start the connecting process, press in the terminal.

„ To depressurise the lower links, press the key on the control lever and keep it pressed until the next screen is displayed on the terminal.

„ Press both lower links down to the bottom position.

„ Press "Next" in the terminal.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 135

9

9.1

Commissioning – mowing operation

Connecting the front mounted mower

„ Start the diesel engine.

„ Turn the Main Mode Switch to "Field mode".

„ Press the or key to approach field position,

see Page 99

.

„ Press "Next" in the terminal.

„ Move the machine up to the front mounted mower in such a way that the lower link hooks are below the holding fixture at the front mounted mower.

2

1

BM000-420

„ Set the main mode switch to "Maintenance mode".

„ Press the key on the control lever until the lower link hooks (2) of the lower links (1) engage on the front mowing unit.

If the two lower links do not raise evenly, control the lower links separately:

„ Raise the left lower link separately by simultaneously pressing the

"M1" key.

key and the

„ Raise the right lower link separately by simultaneously pressing the

"M2" key.

key and the

If the two lower link hooks do not engage in the two holding fixtures at the front mounted mower, rectify the machine position in the following way:

„ Set the main mode switch to "Field mode" position.

„ Move the machine up to the front mounted mower in such a way that the lower link hooks can run into the holding fixtures.

„ Set the main mode switch to the "Maintenance mode" position.

136

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Commissioning – mowing operation

Connecting the front mounted mower

9

9.1

„ Press the key on the control lever until the lower link hooks (2) of the lower links (1) engage on the front mowing unit.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Turn the ignition key to the "II" position.

„ To depressurise the top link and the side guards for version with "Hydraulically folding side guards" , press the key on the control lever and keep the key pressed until the next screen is displayed on the terminal.

1

2

3

4

BM000-248

„ Mount the bolt (3).

„ Mount the linch pin (2).

„ For version with "Top link support": Remove the top link support (4).

3

1

2

2

BM000-252

„ Fit the locking screws (3) of the lower link hooks (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 137

9

9.1

Commissioning – mowing operation

Connecting the front mounted mower

BM000-253

„ Position the universal shaft (1).

„ Tighten the nut (3) with a socket wrench (2) (tightening torque=80 Nm).

„ Pull the universal shaft guard forwards and let it engage.

„ Proceed in the same manner to mount the universal shaft at the front mounted mower.

138

BM000-250

„ Connect the lubrication line (3) at the front mounted mower.

„ Attach the plug connection (1) on the machine side.

„ For the version with "Hydraulically foldable side guards": Connect the hydraulic hoses

(2) to the machine.

„ To complete the connecting process, press "Finish" .

„ With the "Parking support" version: Move the parking support into the transport position,

see Page 193

.

„ Set the parameter KMC-60 "Top link position" in the mowing functions menu "Cutting height settings".

„ Check the lifting unit functions.

„ Calibrate the cutting height,

see Page 380

.

„ Finely calibrate the cutting height,

see Page 382

.

„ Calibrate the mower load relief,

see Page 378

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

9.2

Commissioning – mowing operation

Decoupling the front mounted mower

Decoupling the front mounted mower

9

9.2

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine

During the connecting/decoupling process of the front mounted mower, the machine may start to move unexpectedly and may therefore result in injury.

„ Only one person may carry out the connecting/decoupling process.

„ Make sure there is nobody in the danger zone during the connecting/decoupling process.

„ Stop the connecting/decoupling process immediately if there is somebody in the danger zone.

INFO

It is recommended to couple/uncouple the front mowing unit using the support jack and the top link support. The materials can be purchased from KRONE.

ü With the "Parking support" version: The parking support is in the support position.

ü The diesel engine has been started.

ü The main mode switch is in "Field mode" position.

ü The mowing functions "Connect front mounted mower" menu has been opened in the terminal.

„ Press "Decouple" on the terminal.

„ To start the decoupling process, press .

„ Press the or key to approach field position,

see Page 99

.

„ Press "Next" in the terminal.

„ To lower the front mowing unit, press the key the control lever and keep the key pressed until the next screen is displayed on the terminal.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Turn the ignition key to position II.

„ Set the main mode switch to the "Maintenance mode" position.

„ To depressurise the top link and the side guards for version with "Hydraulically folding side guards" , press the key on the control lever and keep the key pressed until the next screen is displayed on the terminal.

„ If the front mounted mower is uncoupled without "Parking support" version, securely support the front mounted mower,

see Page 31

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 139

9

9.2

Commissioning – mowing operation

Decoupling the front mounted mower

2 3

5

6

4

1

4

1

BM000-418

„ For version with "Top link support" : To mount the top link support (1), insert the

2 bolts (2) and secure with the linch pins (3).

„ Dismount the top link (4) from the front mowing unit, dismount the linch pin (6) and the bolt (5).

„ For version with "Top link support" : Place the top link (4) on the top link support (1).

„ If decoupling is done without a top link support, fix the top link (4) using a lashing strap.

BM000-250

„ Detach the plug connection (1).

„ Detach the lubrication line (3) from the front mounted mower.

„ For "Hydraulically foldable side guards" version : Decouple both hydraulic hoses (2).

140

BM000-251

„ Using a suitable tool, loosen and push down the universal shaft guard (1).

„ To dismount the universal shaft (2) from the machine, use a fork spanner (3) to unscrew the nut (4).

„ Proceed in the same manner to dismount the universal shaft (2) from the front mounted mower.

„ Put the universal shaft (2) aside.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Commissioning – mowing operation

Mounting the side mounted mowers

9

9.3

9.3

2

3

1

2

BM000-252

„ Unscrew the locking screws (3) of the two lower link hooks (2).

„ Pull on the lower link hooks (2) to loosen them.

„ Press "Next" in the terminal.

„ To depressurise the lower links (1), press the key on the control lever and keep it pressed until the next screen is displayed on the terminal.

„ Press down both lower links.

„ To complete the decoupling process, press "Finish".

Mounting the side mounted mowers

The assembly of the side mounted mowers is described using the right side mounted mower as an example.

„ Proceed in the same way to assemble the left side mounted mower.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Carefully raise the mower onto the machine until the mower can be mounted on the

outrigger arm. To raise the mower, see Page 335 .

„ Securely support the mower,

see Page 31

.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 272 .

1

2

1

3

4

BM000-278

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 141

9

9.3

Commissioning – mowing operation

Mounting the side mounted mowers

Pos.

(A)

(B)

Quantity

1

Designation

Retaining ring 40 x 1.75

Shim ring 40 x 50 x 2

Material surface

Zn8

Strength class

„ To mount the mower on the outrigger arm, insert the bolt (1) and compensate with shim rings (B) in the positions (4).

„ Mount 1 retaining ring (A) in position (3) on the end of the bolt (1) and, if required, compensate with shim rings (B) in position (2).

2

1

2

3

BM000-283

Pos.

(A)

(B)

(C)

Quantity

1

1

1

Designation

Hexagon head screw M8 x 25

Detent edged washer SKM 8

Roll pin 6 x 35

„ Push in the bolt (2).

„ Mount the screw connection (A, B) in position (3).

„ Mount the roll pin (C) in position (1).

Material surface

Zn8

ZLÜ

ZLÜ

Strength class

8.8

142

1 2

BM000-467

Pos.

1

2

Designation

Lift/lower left side mounted mower

Lift/lower right side mounted mower

Explanation

Horizontal position: closed

Vertical position: opened

Horizontal position: closed

Vertical position: opened

„ To hydraulically depressurize the lifting cylinder for the mowing unit, open the stop cock (2)

"Lift/lower right side mounted mower". (For assembly of the left side mounted mower, open the stop cock (1) "Lift/lower left side mounted mower".)

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

1

2

Commissioning – mowing operation

Mounting the side mounted mowers

9

9.3

3

4

BM000-284

Pos.

(A)

Quantity

2

Designation

Roll pin 6 x 35

„ Push in the bolt (2).

„ Mount the roll pin (A) in position (1).

„ Push in the bolt (4).

„ Mount the roll pin (A) in position (3).

Material surface

ZLÜ

Strength class

1

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

2

BM000-285

„ Connect the hydraulic hoses (2, 3, 4, 5) to the central support; observe the correct assignment and sequence.

6

„ Mount the pipe clamps (1, 6); route the hydraulic hoses (2, 3, 4, 5) so that abrasion points and pinch points are avoided.

1

2

BMG000-054

„ Mount the lubrication line (1).

„ Mount the plug (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 143

9

9.4

Commissioning – mowing operation

Dismounting the side mounted mowers

BM000-467

Pos.

1

2

Designation

Lift/lower left side mounted mower

Lift/lower right side mounted mower

Explanation

Horizontal position: closed

Vertical position: opened

Horizontal position: closed

Vertical position: opened

„ Close the stop cock (2) "Lift/lower right side mounted mower". (For assembly of the left side mounted mower, close the stop cock (1) "Lift/lower left side mounted mower".)

1

3

1 2

5

9.4

2

4

BM000-410

„ Push the universal shaft (1) onto the PTO shaft end on the mower.

„ Tighten the screw (2) with a tightening torque of M

A

=85 Nm.

„ Push the universal shaft guard (4) over the housing (3).

„ Mount the clamp (5).

„ Calibrate the cutting height,

see Page 380

.

„ Finely calibrate the cutting height,

see Page 382

.

„ Calibrate the mower load relief,

see Page 378

.

Dismounting the side mounted mowers

The disassembly of the side mounted mowers is described using the right side mounted mower as an example.

„ Proceed in the same way to disassemble the left side mounted mower.

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü

The side mounted mower is securely supported, see Page 31 .

144

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Commissioning – mowing operation

Dismounting the side mounted mowers

9

9.4

1 2

BM000-467

Pos.

1

2

Designation

Lift/lower left side mounted mower

Lift/lower right side mounted mower

Explanation

Horizontal position: closed

Vertical position: opened

Horizontal position: closed

Vertical position: opened

„ To hydraulically depressurize the lifting cylinder for the mowing unit, open the stop cock (2)

"Lift/lower right side mounted mower". (For assembly of the left side mounted mower, open the stop cock (1) "Lift/lower left side mounted mower".)

1

3

2

3

4

5

2

BM000-285

„ Dismount the pipe clamps (1, 6).

„ Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (2, 3, 4, 5) at the central support.

5

4

6

1

2

BMG000-054

„ Remove the lubrication line (1) and seal both sides to prevent dirt ingress.

„ Remove the plug (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 145

9

9.4

Commissioning – mowing operation

Dismounting the side mounted mowers

1

2

BM000-284

„ Dismount the roll pin (3).

„ Unscrew the bolt (4).

„ Dismount the roll pin (1).

„ Unscrew the bolt (2).

3

4

1 2

BM000-467

Pos.

1

2

Designation

Lift/lower left side mounted mower

Lift/lower right side mounted mower

Explanation

Horizontal position: closed

Vertical position: opened

Horizontal position: closed

Vertical position: opened

„ Close the stop cock (2) "Lift/lower right side mounted mower". (For assembly of the left side mounted mower, close the stop cock (1) "Lift/lower left side mounted mower".)

146

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Commissioning – mowing operation

Dismounting the side mounted mowers

9

9.4

2

1

2

3

BM000-283

„ Remove the screw connection (3).

„ Dismount the roll pin (1).

„ Unscrew the bolt (2).

1

2

3

4

BM000-278

„ Dismount the washer (2) and the retaining ring (3) at the end of the bolt.

„ Dismount the bolt (1) with the washers (4).

1

4

2 3

BM000-411

„ Dismount the clamp (2).

„ Push down the universal shaft guard (1).

„ Loosen the screw (4).

„ Remove the universal shaft (3) from the PTO shaft end on the mower.

„ Raise the mower using a suitable hoist and put it aside,

see Page 335 .

1

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 147

9

9.5

9.5

Commissioning – mowing operation

Mounting components "swathing"

Mounting components "swathing"

With version "Standard swathing"

1

148

BM000-394

Assembly of the "swathing" components (1) is described using the right-hand side mounted mower as an example.

„ Proceed in the same way to assemble the "swathing" components on the left side mounted mower.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 272 .

1 4

7

6

5

3 2

BM000-386

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü

The side mounted mowers have been securely supported, see Page 31

.

ü

The cross conveyors have been removed, see Page 158 .

NOTE! Damage to the sensor due to carelessness when working on the pulley! When mounting and dismounting the pulley, ensure that the sensor behind the pulley is not damaged.

„ To dismount the support (2), remove the screw connections (3).

„ Dismount the belt pulley (1),

see Page 256

.

„ Dismount the roll pin (4).

„ Pull out the bolt (6).

„ Remove the entire segment (5).

„ Remove the journal (7) from both sides of the mower.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Commissioning – mowing operation

Mounting components "swathing"

9

9.5

1

2 1

2

7

8

5

X

6

4

3

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

(E)

BM000-387

Pos.

2

2

6

1

Quantity

6

Designation

Hexagon head screw M10 x 25

Detent edged washer SKM 10

Disc 14 x 58

Support disc S 35 x 45 x 2.5

Ring 35 x 80 x 20

Material surface

Zn8

ZLÜ

Zn8 A

Zn8

Strength class

8.8

S355MC

S355MC

„ In the following sequence push the mounting material (D, E), the timing disc (1) and the mounting material (E, D) onto the shaft.

„ Mount the screw connection (2) (C, B, A).

„ Mount the support (3) using the screw connections (4) (B, A).

„ Align the sensor (5) so that the distance between sensor (5) and timing disc (1) X=3 mm .

Ensure that the sensor (5) is aligned at right angles to the timing disc (1) and is centred over the holes in the timing disc.

„ To set the distance between sensor (5) and timing disc (1), loosen both nuts (6).

„ Turn the nuts (6) until the dimension X=3 mm has been reached.

„ Tighten the nuts (6) to a tightening torque of M

A

=10 Nm.

„ Mount the guard (8) using the screw connections (7) (B, A).

2

1

1

3

BM000-388

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 149

9

9.5

Commissioning – mowing operation

Mounting components "swathing"

Item

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

(E)

Quantity

2

2

4

8

8

Designation

Hexagon head screw M16 x 50

Hexagon head screw M16 x 130

Locknut low shape M16

Detent edged washer SKM 16

Disc 17 x 40 x 6

Material surface

Zn8

Zn8

Zn8

ZLÜ

Zn8

Strength class

8.8

8.8

10

„ Using a suitable hoist, lift the pre-assembled "swathing" components (2) to the mower.

„ Using the screw connections (1) (B, D, E, E, D, C) and the screw connections (3) (A, D, E, E, D, C), mount the "swathing" components (2) on both sides.

4

1 1

2 2

3 3

3

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

(E)

(F)

(G)

(H)

BM000-397

Pos.

2

4

2

4

2

4

4

Quantity

2

Designation

Square coach screw M12 x 80

Square coach screw M8 x 30

Locknut low shape M8

Ring nut M12

Detent edged washer SKM 8

Disc 13 x 37 x 3

Disc 8.4 x 24 x 2

Disc 17 x 37 x 3

Material surface

Zn8

Zn8

Zn8

Zn8

ZLÜ

Zn8

Zn8

Strength class

8.8

8.8

8

C15

PA 6

„ Mount the swath flaps (3) on both sides using the screw connection (1) (D, F, H, A).

„ Mount the screw connections (2) (B, G, E, C).

„ "Deflector sheets" version : Tighten the palm knobs (4) on the deflector sheets as tightly as possible, as they can easily get lost due to vibrations.

„ In the mowing functions menu "Mower drive settings", set the parameter KMC-183 "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood installed" to "No".

150

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

9.6

Commissioning – mowing operation

Dismounting the "swathing" components

Dismounting the "swathing" components

9

9.6

WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being flung out

If the machine is used without cross conveyor or the "swathing" components, crops and foreign objects will be ejected and can injure or kill people.

„ Use the machine only with cross conveyor or the "swathing" components.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 272 .

1

BM000-394

Disassembly of the "swathing" components (1) is described using the right-hand side mounted mower as an example.

„ Proceed in the same way to disassemble the "swathing" components on the left side mounted mower.

1 1

2

3

3

BM000-389

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü

The side mounted mowers have been securely supported, see Page 31

„ Remove the screw connections (2).

„ Remove the screw connections (1) and put aside with the swath flaps (3).

3

2

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 151

9

9.6

Commissioning – mowing operation

Dismounting the "swathing" components

152

2

1

1

3

BM000-388

„ Using a suitable hoist, pick up the "swathing" components (2) and secure the swathing (2) to prevent it from dropping.

„ Remove the screw connections (1, 3).

„ Using the hoist, put the "swathing" components (2) to the side.

3

1

2

6

4

5

BM000-392

„ Remove the screw connections (1) and put aside with the guard (2).

„ Remove the screw connections (5) and put aside with the support (4).

„ Remove the screw connection (3).

„ Remove the timing disc (6) and the mounting material from the shaft and put aside.

2 4

7

1

3

6 5

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

BM000-393

Pos.

2

2

Quantity

2

2

Designation

Hexagon head screw M10 x 25

Hexagon head screw M16 x 65

Locknut low shape M18 x 1.5

Detent edged washer SKM 10

Material surface

Zn8

ZN8

Zn8

Dacromet

Strength class

8.8

8.8

8

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Commissioning – mowing operation

Mounting / dismounting "swath width CV" components

Pos.

(E)

(F)

(G)

2

2

Quantity

2

Designation

Detent edged washer SKM 16

Disc 17 x 40 x 6

Disc (20) 21 x 37 x 3

Material surface

ZLÜ

Zn8

„ Mount the belt tensioner (3) with the bolt (1) and the roll pin (2).

„ Mount the journal (7) on both sides of the mower using the mounting material (B, E, F, G, C).

„

Mounting the belt pulley (4), see Page 257 .

„ Mount the support (5) using the screw connections (6) (A, D).

„ Mounting the cross conveyor,

see Page 155 .

1

1

3

4

3

X

Strength class

140 HV

2

9

9.7

9.7

BM000-395

„ Align the sensor (3) behind the belt pulley on the conditioner so that the distance between sensor (3) and inside (2) of the belt pulley (1) X=3 mm . Ensure that the sensor (3) is aligned at right angles to the belt pulley (1) and is centred over the holes in the belt pulley.

„ To set the distance between sensor (3) and the inside (2) of the belt pulley (1), loosen both nuts (4).

„ Turn the nuts (4) until the dimension X=3 mm has been reached.

„ Tighten the nuts (4) to a tightening torque of M

A

=10 Nm.

Mounting / dismounting "swath width CV" components

With the "Swath width CV" version

Certain operating conditions may require the crops to be laid in a narrower swath. To do this, extensions are mounted on the auger conveyor and the auger tray.

Mounting"swath width CV" components

NOTICE

Risk of machine damage due to less ground clearance

When the "Swath width CV" components are mounted, the ground clearance underneath the side mounted mowers is reduced in transport position. Carelessness can cause damage to the machine.

„ When driving on roads or crossing fields, take the reduced ground clearance into account and adjust the driving speed accordingly.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 153

9

9.7

Commissioning – mowing operation

Mounting / dismounting "swath width CV" components

1

2

BM000-501

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ To dismount the shaft guard (1), dismount the screw connections (2).

1

2

4

3

BM000-500

„ Mount the ancillary conveyor (3) with the linch pin (4).

„ Mount the auger tray extension (1) with the 6 screw connections (2) (hexagon head screw

M10 x 30 ZLÜ, detent edged washer SKM 10 ZLÜ and disc 10.5 x 25 x 4 Zn8) montieren.

154

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Commissioning – mowing operation

Mounting the cross conveyor

Dismounting "swath width CV" components

9

9.8

1

2

4

3

BM000-500

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ To dismount the auger tray extension (1), remove the 6 screw connections (2).

„ To dismount the ancillary conveyor (3), remove the linch pin (4).

1

9.8

2

BM000-501

„ Mount the shaft guard (1) with 2 hexagon head screws (M10 x 20 Zn8) and 2 detent edged washers(SKM 10 ZLÜ).

Mounting the cross conveyor

With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 272 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 155

9

9.8

Commissioning – mowing operation

Mounting the cross conveyor

WARNING

Risk of injury due to raised cross conveyor

There is a risk to individuals from the cross conveyor falling or swivelling in an uncontrolled manner.

„ Use only approved hoists and slings which have a load-bearing capacity of at least

1000 kg.

„ Note the information on the suspension points provided.

„ Make sure the slings are properly secured.

„ Never stand under the raised cross conveyor.

1

3

1

4

2

BM000-282

„ To be able to hook the cross conveyor into a suitable hoist, mount 1 ring nut (M16 Zn8) with

2 discs (17 x 40 x 6 Zn8) and 1 hexagon head screw (M16 x 90 Zn8) on each of the lifting points (1).

„ To raise the cross conveyor, use the lifting points (1, 2).

„ Carefully raise the cross conveyor onto the machine and before lowering it, ensure that the position of the journal support (3) and the journal (4) is the same on both sides.

156

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Commissioning – mowing operation

Mounting the cross conveyor

9

9.8

2

3

1

2

BM000-281

„ Fit the screws (1, 2).

„ Mount the hydraulic hoses according to the respective version; observe the correct sequence.

1 2 4

1

2

3

BMG000-042

„ Connect the lubrication line (2) at the coupling point (3).

„ Attach the plug connection (4).

1

2

3

BMG000-041

„ Attach the lubrication line (2) to the coupling point (3).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 157

9

9.9

Commissioning – mowing operation

Dismounting the cross conveyor

BM000-196

„ Mount the hydraulic hoses (1); observe the correct sequence. The ball (2) must be in alignment with the groove (3).

9.9

BM000-195

„ Mount the pipe clamp (1); route the hydraulic hoses in such a way as to prevent abrasion points and pinch points.

„ Mount the guard cloth between the cross conveyor and the machine frame,

see Page 113

.

„ Ensure that the belt pulleys are in alignment. If required, compensate with support discs.

„

Place the kraftband on the auger drive and tension, see Page 315 .

„

Mount the guard of the auger conveyor drive, see Page 311

.

„ In the mowing functions menu "Mower drive settings", set the parameter KMC-183 "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood installed" to "Yes".

Dismounting the cross conveyor

With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being flung out

If the machine is used without cross conveyor or the "swathing" components, crops and foreign objects will be ejected and can injure or kill people.

„ Use the machine only with cross conveyor or the "swathing" components.

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

158

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Commissioning – mowing operation

Dismounting the cross conveyor

9

9.9

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 272 .

„ Remove the guard of the auger drive,

see Page 311

.

„ Relieve the pressure on the auger drive kraftband and remove the kraftband,

see Page 315

.

„ Dismount the deflector curtain between the cross conveyor and the machine frame from the machine frame and fold it back,

see Page 113

.

BM000-195

„ To dismount the pipe clamp (1), loosen both nuts using two socket wrenches.

BM000-196

„ Clean the area around the hydraulic hoses at the central support.

„ Dismount both hydraulic hoses (1) of the swath hood, remember the sequence of the connections and make sure the ball (2) is in alignment with the groove (3).

1

2

3

BMG000-041

„ Disconnect the lubrication line (2) at the coupling point (3). Seal the end of the lubrication line at the cross conveyor to prevent dirt from getting into the system.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 159

9

9.9

Commissioning – mowing operation

Dismounting the cross conveyor

If the machine is used with swath hoods:

„ Remove the sealing plug on the connecting piece (1) and retain for subsequent assembly.

„ Mount end of the lubrication line (2) at the mower to the connecting piece (1).

1 2 4

3

BMG000-042

„ Disconnect the plug connection (4).

„ Disconnect the lubrication line (2) at the coupling point (3). Seal the end of the lubrication line at the cross conveyor to prevent dirt from getting into the system.

If the machine is used with swath hoods:

„ Remove the sealing plug on the connecting piece (1) and retain for subsequent assembly.

„ Mount end of the lubrication line (2) at the mower to the connecting piece (1).

WARNING

Risk of injury due to raised cross conveyor

There is a risk to individuals from the cross conveyor falling or swivelling in an uncontrolled manner.

„ Use only approved hoists and slings which have a load-bearing capacity of at least

1000 kg.

„ Note the information on the suspension points provided.

„ Make sure the slings are properly secured.

„ Never stand under the raised cross conveyor.

1 1

160

2

BM000-279

„ To be able to hook the cross conveyor into a suitable hoist, mount 1 ring nut (M16 Zn8) with

2 discs (17 x 40 x 6 Zn8) and 1 hexagon head screw (M16 x 90 Zn8) on each of the lifting points (1).

„ Hook the hoist into the lifting points (1, 2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

9.10

Commissioning – mowing operation 9

Mounting the rear weight 9.10

2

2

3

1

2 1

BM000-281

„ To unscrew the screws (2), at first the hydraulic screw connections (3) of the hydraulic cylinder must be unscrewed according to the respective version. Pay attention to the sequence of the connections to ensure the hydraulic hoses are not mixed up. Seal the open hydraulic connections to prevent dirt ingress.

„ Dismount the screws (1).

„ Carefully raise the entire cross conveyor and put it aside.

„ If the machine is used with swath hoods, in the mowing functions menu "Mower drive settings", set the parameter KMC-183 "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood installed" to "No".

Mounting the rear weight

For "rear weight" version

ü

The rear axle is raised completely, see Page 99 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

1

1

2

BM000-493

The rear weight weighs approx. 285 kg.

„ Raise the pre-assembled rear weight (1) on the pallet and rest its front end safely on a suitable support (2) (a squared timber, for example).

„ Using a suitable device, such as a forklift, move the pallet with the rear weight from the rear below the machine so that the rear weight (1) can be mounted.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 161

9 Commissioning – mowing operation

9.11

Removing the rear weight

1

9.11

1

3

2

BM000-494

Item

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

(E)

(H)

Quantity

2x

2x

6x

6x

2x

2x

Designation

Square coach screw M12 x 35 Zn8

Disc (12) 13 x 37 x 3 Zn8 140 HV

Detent edged washer SKM 12 ZLÜ

Locknut low shape M12 Zn8

Square coach screw M12 x 55 Zn8

Square coach screw M12 x 30 Zn8

Take the following steps on both sides of the machine:

WARNING! Risk of injury due to suspended load. Never work under a suspended load.

Mount the rear weight only from the side.

„ Tighten the screw connection (2) (A, B, C, D) with your fingers.

„ Mount the screw connection (1) (E, C, D) and tighten it with your fingers. Ensure that the screw connection (1) sits completely in the recess provided on the machine.

„ Remove the pallet from underneath the machine.

„ Tighten the screw connection (3) (H, C, D) with your fingers.

„ Tighten the screw connection (2) with the tightening torque specified in

see Page 272

.

„ Tighten the screw connection (1) with the tightening torque specified in

see Page 272

.

„ Tighten the screw connection (3) with the tightening torque specified in

see Page 272

.

Removing the rear weight

For "rear weight" version

ü

The rear axle is raised completely, see Page 99 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

162

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

1

Commissioning – mowing operation 9

Adjusting GPS guidance 9.12

3

2

4

9.12

BM000-495

The rear weight weighs approx. 285 kg.

Take the following steps on the right-hand and left-hand side of the machine.

WARNING! Risk of injury due to suspended load. Never work under a suspended load.

Dismount the rear weight only from the side.

„ Remove the screw connection (1).

„ Position a suitable device, such as a forklift with a pallet, directly underneath the rear weight (2) so that the rear weight (2) cannot drop down during removal.

„ Remove the screw connection (3).

„ Remove the screw connection (4).

„ Using a suitable device, such as a forklift, remove the rear weight (2) from underneath the machine.

Adjusting GPS guidance

For "GPS guidance" version

Settings on the CCI terminal

Make the following settings in the CCI terminal when the CCI terminal is used as a Task

Controller server.

Verifying the licence data

„ To open the "CCI.Config" menu, press .

„ To display the licence data, press .

„ Ensure that "Parallel tracking" is activated at .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 163

9 Commissioning – mowing operation

9.12

Adjusting GPS guidance

Activating apps

„ To open the "Apps" menu, press

„ Open "App administration".

„ Activate .

.

„ Activate

Deactivating TECU

.

„ Deactivate TECU in the app.

Machine profile

The machine profile is automatically recognised and loaded. The active machine profile is displayed on the CCI terminal.

Status displays of the GPS guidance steering system on the CCI terminal

Icon Explanation

The "GPS guidance" steering system is not ready. The requirements for activation are not completely satisfied.

The "GPS guidance" steering system is ready. All requirements for activation are satisfied.

The "GPS guidance" steering system is active and the machine is in threading mode.

The "GPS guidance" steering system is active and the machine moves on the lane.

Displaying the GPS quality on the CCI terminal

Icon Explanation

RTK reception active (corrected GPS reception)

EGNOS / WAAS reception active (corrected GPS reception)

GPS reception active (uncorrected GPS reception - quality not sufficient for using the "GPS guidance" steering system)

No GPS reception

9.12.1

Adjusting overlapping and beds

Adjusting working width overlapping

164

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Commissioning – mowing operation 9

Adjusting GPS guidance 9.12

Depending on ground conditions, inclination and driving speed, overlapping of 35 ... 60 cm is recommended. This value describes the overlapping of the entire machine. Half of the selected value overlaps on each side of the machine.

The working width of the machine is loaded automatically with the profile.

„ Select the overlapping in the app at Settings, "Parallel tracking". See the instructions for the CCI terminal in the chapter "Map view, commissioning, adjusting parallel tracking".

Adjusting beds

„ If necessary, select beds in the app at Settings, "Parallel tracking". See the instructions for the CCI terminal in the chapter "Map view, commissioning, adjusting parallel tracking".

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 165

10 Driving and Transport

10.1

Preparing the machine for road travel

10 Driving and Transport

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

10.1

Preparing the machine for road travel

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü Soiling and crop residue have been removed from the machine, in particular from the lighting and identification elements.

ü

All mowers are in transport position, see Page 97

ü

The side guards of the mowers are in transport position, see Page 190 ,

see Page 167 .

ü For the "Side shift of front mounted mower" version: The front mounted mower is in

central position, see Page 186 .

ü

The lockings of side mounted mowers are engaged, see Page 167 .

ü

The wheel chocks are located in the storage compartment above the front right wheel, see

Page 178

.

ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "Road mode" position,

see Page 101

.

10.1.1

Transport position

The machine must be in transport position when travelling on roads; to this end:

„

Fold up side mounted mowers, see Page 97

.

„

Check the lock for side mounted mowers, see Page 167 .

„ Lift the front mounted mower into the transport position,

see Page 97

.

„ For the "Side shift front mounted mower" version : Move the front mounted mower into

the central position, see Page 186 .

„

Fold up the side guards of the front mounted mower into transport position, see Page 190 .

„ Make sure that the side guards of the side mounted mowers are in the transport position,

see Page 167

. For the version with "Hydraulically foldable side guards" : Move the side

guards of the side mounted mowers manually into transport position, see Page 190

.

„

The main mode switch is in the "Road mode" position, see Page 101 . The axles lower

automatically to the road position.

166

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

10.1.2

Driving and Transport 10

Preparing the machine for road travel 10.1

Checking lockings of lateral mowers

WARNING

Danger of accident due to the side mounted mowers coming folded out during road travel

If the mowing units are not correctly locked in the transport position, they may unintentionally come folded out. This can result in serious accidents.

„ Perform a visual inspection to determine whether the side mounted mowers are locked correctly.

„ Do not place the machines in operation or stop them immediately if error messages appear regarding the transport position or locking of the side mounted mowers.

10.1.3

BM000-008

„ Perform a visual inspection on the left-hand and right-hand side of the machine to determine whether the catch (1) has completely enclosed the journal (2) of the side mounted mower.

If not:

„ Check the area for soiling and clean if required.

„ Check the catch for damage.

„ Fold in the side mounted mower again.

Checking side guards of lateral mowers

NOTICE

Machine damage due to increased machine height.

If the side guards of the side mounted mowers in transport position are not folded in, the machine height is raised considerably and this may cause damage to the machine.

„ Before travelling on the road, always ensure that the side guards of the side mounted mowers are folded in.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 167

10 Driving and Transport

10.2

Starting engine

10.2

BM000-005

„ Before travelling on the road, always check that the side guards (1) on the right/left of the

side mounted mowers are folded into the transport position, see Page 190

.

ð The side guard are not in transport position:

For the version with "Hydraulically foldable side guards":

„ To fold up the side guards, actuate the "Fold up side guards" key, Operating and

display elements on the keypad, see Page 99

.

For the "series" version:

„ Fold down side mounted mowers.

„ Check locking of the side guards,

see Page 253

.

„ Move the side guards of the side mounted mowers manually into transport position.

„ Fold up side mounted mowers.

Starting engine

WARNING

Risk of poisoning from toxic exhaust gases

If the machine is operated in closed rooms without adequate ventilation, the pollutant load increases in the air.

Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms.

„ Vent the room sufficiently.

WARNING

Impact and crushing hazard for people in the vicinity of the machine due to movement of the machine!

When the machine is put into motion, there is a risk for people in the vicinity of the machine of being overrun or crushed by the machine.

„ Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone of the machine.

„ Actuate the horn before starting the engine.

„ Only start the engine from the driver's seat.

168

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Driving and Transport 10

Starting engine 10.2

WARNING

Risk of injury during operation

If the driver is not protected from the engine noise while working, his hearing will be permanently damaged.

„ Make sure that the doors and windows of the cabin are closed while the machine is used.

„ If the engine was shut down beforehand for longer than 30 days, take measures to start up and start the engine following shutdown,

see Page 295

.

1 2

3

BXG000-059

ü The Main Mode Switch (2) is in the "Neutral" position (3),

see Page 101

.

„ Press the main battery switch (1) to close the circuit,

see Page 179

.

Æ The main battery switch LED is lit.

BMG000-005

„ Turn the ignition key (1) in the ignition lock clockwise to position "II".

Æ Warning lamp "Charging control" (2) lights up.

„ Wait for at least 2 seconds, then turn the ignition key in the ignition lock to position "III".

When the engine starts:

„ Immediately release the ignition key.

Æ The ignition key automatically jumps to the operating position.

Æ Warning lamp "Charging control" (2) goes out.

„ Leave the engine to idle until the temperature display coolant rises.

If the warning lamp "Charging control" (2) lights up:

„ Switch off the engine and eliminate the malfunction.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 169

10 Driving and Transport

10.3

Behaviour after the engine has stalled

If the engine does not start within 30 s:

„ Turn the ignition key to the "STOP" position.

„ After a 1 minute delay repeat the starting process.

If the engine still does not start:

„ Turn the ignition key to the "STOP" position.

„ Rectify the cause of the poor starting behaviour, see applicable engine manufacturer operating instructions.

10.2.1

Observing indicator and warning lamps

1

10.3

BMG000-006

„ As long as the diesel engine is running, the indicator and warning lamps on the steering column must be observed.

Warning lamp "Charging control" (1):

"Charging control" warning lamp does not light up at all when the ignition key is in ignition stage

I, lights up continuously in ignition stage II and lights up briefly after the diesel engine has started.

If the warning lamp "Charging control" is lit continuously while the diesel engine is running, the output voltage of the alternator is not adequate to charge the batteries.

„ Check the cables and connections on the alternator and the batteries, batteries

see

Page 354

.

„ Check the V-belt on the alternator.

Behaviour after the engine has stalled

NOTICE

Heat accumulation after the engine has stalled

If a warm engine stalls, the heat accumulation, caused by the lack of cooling, may damage the engine.

„ Immediately start again when a warm engine is stalled.

„ Before finally switching engine off, allow it to run at idle speed for at least 3 minutes.

170

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

10.4

Driving and Transport 10

Starting up the machine 10.4

Starting up the machine

WARNING

Danger to life by movements of the machine

People are at risk from the large movements of the machine, unusual driving behaviour and the option of riding on the outside of the machine while it is being driven.

„ Make sure that there is no second person on the machine when travelling.

„ Adapt driving speed of machine on road and field to the given conditions.

„ When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to environmental conditions.

„ Make sure when driving around curves that the machine does not swing out.

10.4.1

Setting the acceleration behaviour

BM000-017

Four different acceleration stages can be selected, even while driving, with the "Acceleration stage" switch (2) attached to the control lever (1).

If the control lever (1) is actuated constantly in one direction and at a constant engine speed, the driving speed will increase slowest in acceleration stage I and fastest in acceleration stage

IV.

„ Switch to the required acceleration stage using the "Acceleration stage" switch (2).

Æ The selected acceleration stage (3) is displayed on the working screen of the terminal.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 171

10 Driving and Transport

10.4

Starting up the machine

10.4.2

Notices on driving the machine

10.4.3

BM000-019

„ Adapt driving behaviour to the modified handling of the machine due to rear steering.

„ Take into consideration the different ways the machine handles in acceleration stages 1 - 4.

„ React to the different handling of the machine in road mode and field mode

„ If an error message is indicated on the terminal, immediately stop and eliminate the error. If this is not possible, inform a KRONE service partner.

„ Adapt driving behaviour to the particular terrain and ground conditions,

see Page 185

.

Emergency steering forces

The steering also operates when the engine has stopped. However, considerably more force must be applied.

Driving forwards and stopping

172

BM000-018

Driving forwards from standstill:

„ Set the main mode switch to "road mode" or "field mode" position,

see Page 101

.

„

Release the parking brake, see Page 176 .

„ Press and hold down the activation key for traction drive (2).

„ Push the control lever (1) forwards.

Æ The machine moves forwards and accelerates.

„ Release the control lever (1) to keep the speed at a constant level.

Æ The control lever automatically returns to the central position (0).

„ To slow down the machine, pull the control lever (1) backwards while driving or depress the brake pedal.

Æ The machine is decelerated until it stops.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Driving and Transport 10

Starting up the machine 10.4

10.4.3.1

Cruise control

The cruise control can be activated only when travelling forwards.

When cruise control is activated, the machine is accelerated or decelerated with the set acceleration stage to the speed saved for operation with the cruise control.

Saving speed for operation with cruise control

BM000-022

„ Accelerate the machine to the desired speed.

„ While driving, press and hold down the activation key for the traction drive (2) and at the same time, move the control lever (1) to the right and back to the central position.

Æ The current driving speed is saved.

The saved speed (3) is displayed on the working screen of the terminal display.

The speed is saved for the operating mode the machine is currently in. One speed each can be saved for road travel and field mode.

If the operating mode (“Road mode”/”Field mode”) is changed, the display switches to the value saved for the corresponding operating mode (road or field speed).

Activating cruise control

BMG000-004

„ While driving, actuate the control lever (1) to the right.

Æ The machine is started with the set speed.

The icon with the value of the set speed appears on the display.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 173

10 Driving and Transport

10.5

Stopping the machine

Deactivating cruise control

Cruise control is deactivated by overriding the control lever, actuating the service brake or switching off the traction drive.

10.4.4

Driving backward and stopping

10.5

BM000-018

Reverse from standstill:

„

Set the main mode switch to “road mode” or “field mode” position, see Page 101 .

„

Release the parking brake, see Page 176 .

„ Press and hold down the activation key for traction drive (2).

„ Pull control lever (1) to the rear.

Æ The machine moves backward and accelerates.

„ Release the control lever (1) to keep the speed at constant level.

Æ The control lever automatically returns to central position (0).

„ To decelerate the machine, push control lever (1) to the front while driving.

Æ The machine is decelerated until it is at standstill.

Stopping the machine

The machine can be stopped with both control lever and service brake.

174

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

10.5.1

Stopping machine by using control lever

Stopping from forward travel

Driving and Transport 10

Stopping the machine 10.5

BM000-025

„ Pull the control lever (1) backwards while driving.

Æ The machine decelerates until it stops.

Stopping from reverse travel

BM000-026

„ Push the control lever (1) forwards while driving.

Æ The machine decelerates until it stops.

Quickly braking the machine

BM000-027

„ To brake the machine quickly, move the control lever (1) to the left while driving.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 175

10 Driving and Transport

10.6

Applying parking brake

Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)

When fast reversing during forward travel, the machine decelerates to a standstill and accelerates backwards to 70% of the previous driving speed.

When fast reversing during reverse travel, the machine decelerates to a standstill and accelerates forwards to 100% of the previous driving speed.

Fast reversing is possible in field mode only.

10.5.2

BMG000-007

ü The main mode switch is in the "field mode" position.

To activate fast reversing:

„ While driving, press and hold down the activation key for the traction drive (2), move the control lever (1) to the left and back to the central position.

Stopping machine with the service brake

WARNING

Risk of injury due to defective service brake

If the service brake has a restricted function, the machine cannot be brought to a standstill in time and people and material assets are at risk.

„ Before starting the machine, always check service brake and ensure its functionality.

Braking the machine slightly

„ Depress the foot brake slightly.

Æ When the brake pedal is released, the machine continues moving at the reduced driving speed.

Braking the machine forcefully (hazard braking)

„ Depress the service brake very forcefully.

Æ The machine is braked to an immediate standstill.

10.6

Applying parking brake

WARNING

Risk of injury due to the unsecured machine rolling away

If the unsecured machine starts moving, there is a risk of people being struck or run over.

„ When the “Parking brake” key has been pressed, check the status of the parking brake on the terminal or via the LED in the “Parking brake” key.

176

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Driving and Transport 10

Applying parking brake 10.6

INFO

If the "Parking brake" key is pressed while driving, the traction drive is braked and, when the machine has stopped, the parking brake is applied.

The parking brake is automatically released or applied under certain operating conditions and can be manually actuated by pressing the "Parking brake" key (1).

BXG000-013

To apply the parking brake manually via the keypad:

„ Press the "Parking brake" key (1).

To release the parking brake manually via the keypad:

„ When the diesel engine is running, depress the brake pedal.

„ Press the "Parking brake" key (1).

The status of the parking brake is indicated by the LED in the "Parking brake" key:

„ The parking brake has been applied when the LED is lit.

„ The parking brake has been released when the LED is not lit.

EQG002-020

The status of the parking brake is also displayed on the working screen of the terminal:

• The parking brake has been applied when the "Parking brake"  indicator lamp appears on the terminal.

• The parking brake has been released when the "Parking brake" indicator lamp is not lit on the terminal.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 177

10 Driving and Transport

10.7

Switching off the engine

Automatic actuation of the parking brake:

• The parking brake is automatically applied when the driver's seat is not occupied.

• The parking brake is automatically applied when the diesel engine is switched off.

• The parking brake is automatically released when the machine starts.

• The parking brake is automatically released when the brake pedal is depressed

10.7

Switching off the engine

NOTICE

Engine will be damaged by heat accumulation

If the engine is immediately switched off after operation under load, the heat accumulation, caused by the lack of cooling, may damage the engine.

„ Before switching off the engine, let it run at idle speed for at least 3 minutes.

„ Stop the machine,

see Page 174 .

„ To cool down the engine, leave the engine running for three minutes at a low idle speed.

10.8

BM000-029

„ Turn the ignition key (1) anti-clockwise to the "STOP" position.

„ Move the main mode switch into the "Neutral" position,

see Page 101

.

„

If the engine will be shut down for longer than 30 days, take measures to shut it down, see

Page 295

.

Fitting wheel chocks

1

1 1

BXG000-003

178

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

10.9

Driving and Transport 10

Main battery switch 10.9

The wheel chocks (1) secure the machine against rolling away. 2 wheel chocks are affixed to the machine.

ü The machine is parked on a stable, horizontal and even surface.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Remove the wheel chocks (1) from the storage compartment above the right front wheel.

„ Place the wheel chocks (1) tightly in front of and behind the same wheel of the front axle to prevent the machine from rolling away.

Main battery switch

The main battery switch is used to switch on or interrupt the machine’s power supply.

1

2

BXG000-002

The main battery switch (2) is located in the storage compartment (1) below the left platform.

The main battery switch is designed as a momentary switch with integrated LED.

The power supply is automatically interrupted after 24 hours.

If the main battery switch is pressed for not longer than 1 second, the power supply is automatically interrupted after a delay of about 120 seconds. This guarantees the run-down time (cleaning) of the exhaust aftertreatment system.

If the main battery switch is pressed for longer than 2 seconds, the power supply is interrupted immediately. There is no run-down time (cleaning) of the exhaust aftertreatment system.

„ After using the machine, in emergencies and for repairs, interrupt the power supply.

NOTE! Damage to the exhaust aftertreatment system Do not press the main battery switch for longer than 1 second.

„ To switch on or interrupt the power supply, press the main battery switch:

Æ When the LED is lit, the power supply is switched on

Æ When the LED is flashing, the run-down time is running (approx. 120 second) to allow cleaning of the exhaust aftertreatment system.

Æ When the LED is not lit, the power supply is interrupted.

„ To interrupt the power supply as quickly as possible in an emergency, press the main battery switch for 2 seconds.

Æ The power supply is interrupted immediately.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 179

10 Driving and Transport

10.10 Parking the machine

10.10

Parking the machine

WARNING

Risk of injury due to the unsecured machine rolling away

If the machine is not secured against rolling away when it has been switched off, there is a risk of people being injured by the machine rolling away in an uncontrolled manner.

„ Secure the machine against rolling using wheel chocks.

„

Fold up side mounted mowers, see Page 97

.

Æ

The lockings of side mounted mowers are engaged, see Page 167 .

„ Ensure that the outer side guards of the right/left side mounted mowers have been folded into transport position,

see Page 167

.

„ Fold up the side guards of front mounted mower,

see Page 190

.

„ Move front mounted mower to central position,

see Page 186

.

„

Switch Main Mode Switch to "neutral" position, see Page 101 .

„ Apply the parking brake,

see Page 176

.

„

Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 31 .

10.11

Recovering the Machine

WARNING

Danger of accidents due to uncontrolled movement of the machine!

When recovering the machine there is a danger that the driver will loose control of the machine, since the diesel engine is stopped, which increases steering and braking forces. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone.

„ Only move the machine out of the danger zone.

„ Note that steering and braking forces are increased when the diesel engine is stationary.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to incorrect operation

If retrieval is not performed correctly, power transmission components or the diesel engine may be damaged.

„ Turn the Main Mode Switch to "Neutral mode".

„ Release the parking brake, if required release manually,

see Page 176

,

see Page 181

.

„ Switch off the diesel engine.

„ Pull the fuses F30 and F98 so that the hydraulic motors are at idle,

see Page 367

.

„ Switch on the ignition so that the direction indicators/flashing warning lamps and the brake lamps function.

„ Only move the machine out of the danger zone (at max. 8 km/h).

180

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Driving and Transport 10

Recovering the Machine 10.11

1

BM000-256

„ To retrieve the machine, select the suspension points (1) on the front of the machine.

„ Turn the Main Mode Switch to "Neutral mode".

„

Release parking brake, see Page 176 .

If the machine no longer builds up the oil pressure required for releasing the parking brake:

„

Release the parking brake manually, see Page 181 .

„ Switch off the diesel engine.

„ Pull the fuses F98 and F30,

see Page 367

.

„ Turn the ignition key in the ignition lock to the "I" position so that the direction indicators/ flashing warning lamps and the brake lamps function.

„ Move the machine out of the danger zone.

10.11.1

Release the parking brake manually

1

3

2

4

BXG000-062

Securing the machine against rolling away:

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Secure the machine against rolling using wheel chocks.

The parking brake can be released with the hand pump (1):

„ Pull and release the knob handle (2) of the valve.

Æ The knob handle remains in the pulled position.

„ Insert the pump lever (4) into the lever holder (3) on the hand pump (1).

„ Release the parking brake by pumping the hand pump.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 181

10 Driving and Transport

10.12 Preparing the machine for shipment

If the effort during pumping increases considerably:

„ Check whether the brake has been released by moving the machine.

Æ The parking brake is released as long as the knob handle (2) of the valve is in the pulled position.

Restoring the braking function on the parking brake:

„ Press the knob handle (2) of the valve.

10.12

Preparing the machine for shipment

NOTICE

Damage to the exhaust aftertreatment system due to ingress of water through the exhaust pipe

If the machine is being transported on a transport vehicle against the direction of travel, rain water may penetrate the exhaust aftertreatment system via the exhaust pipe and damage the exhaust aftertreatment system.

„ Transport the machine in the direction of travel only.

NOTICE

Risk of accident if machine not correctly prepared

If the machine is not correctly prepared for transportation by vehicle, this may result in accidents and damage to the machine.

„ Carry out the following measures to prepare for conveyance of the machine.

ü The mowers are in transport position.

ü Ensure that the side guards have been folded in,

see Page 167

,

see Page 190

.

ü For version with "Side shift of front mounted mower": The front mounted mower is in

central position, see Page 186 .

ü

The axles have been lowered, see Page 99

.

ü After parking the machine, shut down and safeguard the machine,

see Page 31

.

ü Ensure that the cabin door, the side window and the hoods are closed.

ü Secure the machine using suitable lashing material at the designated lashing points,

see

Page 182

.

ü For "SMV emblem" version : The SMV emblem is covered or removed,

see Page 62 .

10.12.1

Lashing the machine

WARNING

Danger to life caused by uncontrolled machine movement

If the machine is not properly lashed for transportation by vehicle, the machine may move in an uncontrolled manner and endanger people.

„ Before transporting the machine, secure it properly to the designated lashing points using suitable lashing material.

Appropriate lashing points are provided on the machine for attachment of the lashing material.

182

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

1

2

Driving and Transport 10

Preparing the machine for shipment 10.12

3 4

BM000-330

1 Lashing point at rear left

2 Lashing point at rear right

3 Lashing point right front

4 Lashing point left front

10.12.2

Removing the machine wheels

The wheels must be removed if this is necessary to transport the machine. The machine may only be jacked up by authorised technicians,

see Page 387

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 183

11 Operation

11.1

Field Mode

11 Operation

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

11.1

Field Mode

WARNING

Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts

If people remain in or enter the danger zone of the machine during operation, there is an increased risk of injury.

„ Do not start the machine until all safety devices have been fitted and are in sound condition.

„

Make certain there is no one in the danger zone of the machine (safety distance, see

Page 20 ).

If people enter the danger zone:

„ Stop the machine immediately.

„ Instruct persons to leave the danger zone.

„ Do not restart the machine until there is nobody in the danger zone.

The settings for field mode, including mowing functions, sidehill levelling (for the "Hydraulic side shift front mounted mower" version), settings for cutting height and headland,

see Page 205

and

see Page 231 .

Game animal protection

184

EQ003-725

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Operation 11

Field Mode 11.1

When mowing from “outside to inside”, the animals are slowly forced from the safe boundary area into the centre of the area, which makes the possibility for a life-saving escape for the animal more difficult or takes it away.

A remedy for this issue is the mowing method from “inside to outside” of the area.

Instead of mowing any edge sections at first, the operator drives straight into the middle of the field and then mows in a left-handed spiral "from the inside to the outside". This allows animals to escape from the field unharmed by following their natural instinct to flee.

11.1.1

Working position

For use in the field, the machine must be in the working position, for this:

„

Turn the main mode switch in the "Field mode" position, see Page 101 .

„

Fold down the mowers into working position, see Page 97

.

„ Fold down the side guards of the front mounted mower or with the "Hydraulically foldable side guards" version ensure that the side guards are folded down into the working position,

see Page 190 .

„ Make sure that the side guards of the side mounted mowers are folded down into the working position,

see Page 190

.

„ Checks before commissioning – observe mowing operation,

see Page 135 .

11.1.2

Field mode on slopes

„ Dangers when operating the machine on slopes,

see Page 24

.

„ Before working on a slope, increase the tyre pressure by 0.4 bar more than indicated in the technical data,

see Page 78

„ After working on the slope, the tyre pressure must be set to the values in the tyre pressure table,

see Page 78

.

BM000-267

„ Do not bring the machine from the transport position into the working position or from the working position into the transport position as long as the machine is positioned and used across a slope.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 185

11 Operation

11.1

Field Mode

11.1.2.1

Moving front mounted mower into the central position

For the "Side shift front mounted mower" version

1

2

BM000-139

„ To move the front mounted mower to the central position, actuate the "Side shift front mounted mower left" key or the "Side shift front mounted mowing right" key on the control

lever alternately, see Page 97

.

Æ The front mounted mower is in the central position when the top link (1) and the marking (2) on front guard of the cabin are in line.

11.1.3

Operating mowers

WARNING

Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine due to uncontrolled lowering of a mower

When lowering a mower into the working position, people or animals in the swivel range may be seriously injured.

„ Do not lower the mowers until you are absolutely sure that neither people, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowers.

ü The circuit is closed (LED on main battery switch is lit),

see Page 179

.

ü

The main mode switch is in the “field mode” position, see Page 101 .

„

Start the engine, see Page 169 .

Operating all mowers simultaneously

„ To fold out all mowers from the transport position into the headland position, press the release button, subsequently press the "Lower/Fold out all mowers simultaneously" key on the control lever,

see Page 97

.

„ To lower all mowers, press the "Lower/Fold out all mowers simultaneously" key on the control lever,

see Page 97

.

„ Fold down the side guards of the front mounted mower,

see Page 190

„ Make sure the side guards of the side mounted mowers have been folded down automatically; if not, set the locking,

see Page 253

.

„ Connect the guard cloths "front" and "side guard" using the turnlock fastener.

„ To fold in all mowers from the headland position into the transport position,

„ loosen the turnlock fasteners of the guard cloth "front" and "side guard".

186

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Operation 11

Field Mode 11.1

„ Press the release button, subsequently press the "Raise/Fold in all mowers simultaneously" key on the control lever,

see Page 97

.

„ Make sure the side guards of the side mounted mowers have been folded up automatically; if not, set the locking,

see Page 253 .

„

Fold up the side guards of the front mounted mowers, see Page 190 .

„ To raise all mowers, press the "Raise/Fold in all mowers simultaneously" key on the control lever,

see Page 97 .

Raising/lowering the front mower

„ To lower the front mounted mower, press the "Lower front mounted mower" key on the control lever,

see Page 97

.

„ Fold down the side guards of the front mounted mower,

see Page 190

„ To raise the front mounted mower, press the "Raise front mounted mower" key on the control lever,

see Page 97

.

„

Fold up the side guards of the front mounted mowers, see Page 190 .

Moving the front mounted mower to the side (for "Hydraulic front mounted mower side shift" version)

„ To move the front mounted mower to the left, press the "Front mounted mower left" key on the control lever,

see Page 97

.

„ To move the front mounted mower to the right, press the "Front mounted mower right" key on the control lever,

see Page 97

.

Operating the right side mounted mower

„ To fold out the right side mounted mower from the transport position into the headland position, press the release button, subsequently press the "Lower/Fold out right side

mounted mower" key on the control lever, see Page 97 .

„ To lower the right side mounted mower, press the "Lower/Fold out right side mounted mower" key on the control lever,

see Page 97

.

„ Make sure the side guard of the side mounted mowers has been folded down automatically; if not, set the locking,

see Page 253 .

„ Connect the guard cloths "front" and "side guard" using the turnlock fastener.

„ To fold in the right side mounted mower from the headland position into the transport position,

„ loosen the turnlock fasteners of the guard cloth "front" and "side guard".

„ Press the release button, subsequently press the "Raise/Fold in right side mounted mower" key on the control lever,

see Page 97 .

„ Make sure the side guard of the side mounted mowers has been folded up automatically; if

not, set the locking, see Page 253 .

„ To raise the right side mounted mower, press the "Raise/Fold in right side mounted mower"

key on the control lever, see Page 97 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 187

11 Operation

11.1

Field Mode

Operating the left side mounted mower

„ To fold out the left side mounted mower from the transport position into the headland position, press the release button, subsequently press the "Lower/Fold out left side mounted mower" key on the control lever,

see Page 97

.

„ To lower the left side mounted mower, press the "Lower/Fold out left side mounted mower"

key on the control lever, see Page 97 .

„ Make sure the side guard of the side mounted mowers has been folded down automatically; if not, set the locking,

see Page 253 .

„ Connect the guard cloths "front" and "side guard" using the turnlock fastener.

„ To fold in the left side mounted mower from the headland position into the transport position,

„ loosen the turnlock fasteners of the guard cloth "front" and "side guard".

„ Press the release button, subsequently press the "Raise/Fold in left side mounted mower" key on the control lever,

see Page 97 .

„ Make sure the side guard of the side mounted mowers has been folded up automatically; if

not, set the locking, see Page 253 .

„ To raise the left side mounted mower, press the "Raise/Fold in left side mounted mower"

key on the control lever, see Page 97 .

11.1.4

Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)

When fast reversing during forward travel, the machine decelerates to a standstill and accelerates backwards to 70% of the previous driving speed.

When fast reversing during reverse travel, the machine decelerates to a standstill and accelerates forwards to 100% of the previous driving speed.

Fast reversing is possible in field mode only.

11.1.5

BMG000-007

ü The main mode switch is in the "field mode" position.

To activate fast reversing:

„ While driving, press and hold down the activation key for the traction drive (2), move the control lever (1) to the left and back to the central position.

Switching the mower drive on and off

ü The circuit is closed (LED on main battery switch is lit),

see Page 179

.

ü

The engine is started, see Page 169 .

ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "field mode" position,

see Page 101

.

ü

All the mowers are in the headland position, see Page 186 .

188

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Operation 11

Field Mode 11.1

ü The side guards are folded down,

see Page 99 and

see Page 190 .

„ To check the operating state of the mower drives, observe the LED at top left on the

respective key, see Page 99

.

For more detailed information on the keypad see

see Page 99

.

Switching all mower drives on or off

„ To switch on all mower drives, first press and then on the keypad.

„ To switch off all mower drives press the key on the keypad.

Switching the front drive on or off

„ To switch on the front drive, first press and then on the keypad.

„ To switch off the front drive press on the keypad.

Switching the right/left mower drives on or off

„ To switch on the left mower drive, first press and on the keypad.

„ To switch off the left mower drive press on the keypad.

„ To switch on the right mower drive, first press and on the keypad.

„ To switch off the right mower drive press on the keypad.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 189

11 Operation

11.2

Folding up/folding down side guards

11.2

Folding up/folding down side guards

For the "Series" version

Front mounted mowers

2

1

1

4

3

BMG000-040

ü The front mounted mower is in working position,

see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

Folding up side guard (transport position)

„ Open the turnlock fasteners (3).

„ In order to unlock the side guard (1), press down the ratchet by means of a screwdriver (2).

„ Fold up the side guard (1) until the side guard engages in the latch.

Folding down side guard (working position)

„ To fold down the side guard (1), pull the side guard out of the latch while the locking is (4) pulled and fold it down.

„ Secure the guard cloths by means of the turnlock fasteners (3).

Side mounted mowers

The side guards of the side mounted mowers fold up and down automatically when folding the mowers up and down.

„ Before the side mounted movers are folded into the transport position, release the turnlock fasteners on the guard cloths.

„ After folding the side mounted mowers into the working position, close the turnlock fasteners on the guard cloths.

„ Make sure that the side guards on the side mounted mowers have folded automatically into the transport position and have also folded down automatically into the working position,

see

Page 167

.

For the version with "Hydraulically foldable side guards"

The side guards on the front mounted mower and the side mounted mowers are folded up and down hydraulically.

190

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Operation 11

Folding up/folding down side guards 11.2

WARNING

Crush hazard caused by lowering the loading side guards

While the hydraulic side guard is being lowered there is a crush hazard between the side guard and the top guard sheet .

„ Make certain while the hydraulic side guard is being lowered that there are no persons remaining in the danger zone.

1

1 2 1

2

BMG000-046

Folding up side guards into transport position

„ Open the turnlock fasteners (2).

„ To fold up the side guards (1), actuate the "Fold up side guards" key,

see Page 99

.

Folding down side guards into working position

„

To fold own the side guards (1), press the "Fold down side guards" key see Page 99

.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Secure the guard cloths using the turnlock fasteners (2).

Automatic folding up/down of the side guards

WARNING! Risk of injury from automatic fold-up and fold-down of the side guards! When pressing the keys "Raise/fold in all mowers simultaneously" and "Lower/fold down all mowers simultaneously", ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone of the machine.

„ Before the mowers are folded into transport position, make sure that the turnlock fasteners on the guard cloths are open.

• If the key "Raise/fold in all mowers simultaneously" is actuated and the release button has already been pressed, the side guards will automatically fold up as of the headland position,

see Page 99

.

• If the "Lower/fold down all mowers simultaneously" key is pressed and the release button has already been pressed, the side guards fold down automatically as of the headland position,

see Page 99

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 191

11 Operation

11.3

Front guard

11.3

Front guard

WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being flung out

If the front guard/side guard is folded up during work, objects may be flung out. As a result, people may be seriously injured.

„ Fold down the front guard/side guard.

„ Connect the guard cloths of the front guard and the side guard using the turnlock fasteners.

11.3.1

Folding up the front guard

The front guard can be folded up for repair and maintenance.

This is described below using the example of the side mounted mower; the procedure for the front mounted mower is identical.

2

3

4

1

11.3.2

KMG000-006

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Open the turnlock fasteners (3).

„ To fold up the front guard (1), press the catch with a screwdriver (2) and fold up the front guard.

„ Fix the front guard (1) in place with the wedge (4).

Fold down the front guard

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

192

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Operation 11

Operating support jack 11.4

11.4

3

2 4

1

KMG000-082

„ Hold the front guard (1) firmly in place and push the wedge (4) upwards.

„ Fold down the front guard (1).

„ Ensure that the front guard (1) is engaged in the lock (2) on the right and left sides of the machine.

„ Close the turnlock fasteners (3).

Operating support jack

For the version with “support jack”

INFO

In order to increase the base of the support jack when the ground is soft, use a suitable support.

11.4.1

Moving support jack into transport position

1

2

1

2

KMG000-065

„ Raise the machine via front hydraulics until the support jack (2) can be inserted.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

WARNING! Crush hazard due to the support jack! Keep hands and feet out of the danger zone of the support jack.

„ Pull the tension bar (1), insert the support jack (2) and lock it with the tension bar (1).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 193

11 Operation

11.5

PowerSplit

11.4.2

Moving support jack into support position

11.5

2

1

1

2

KMG000-064

„ Raise the machine via front hydraulics until the support jack (2) can be lowered.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

WARNING! Crush hazard due to the support jack! Keep hands and feet out of the danger zone of the support jack.

„ Pull the tension bar (1), lower the support jack (2) and lock it with the tension bar (1).

PowerSplit

The PowerSplit is used to increase the efficiency of the machine. The continuous engine performance is adjusted to the application conditions, thereby helping to optimise fuel consumption.

The PowerSplit automatically switches between ECO-Power and M-Power, depending on the speed of the diesel engine.

ECO-Power automatically switches to M-Power if the engine speed drops below 1550 min -1 .

M-Power automatically switches to ECO-Power when the engine speed exceeds 1550 min -1 again and the engine load is above the switchover load (factory basic setting 80%).

M-Power always switches back to ECO-Power mode abruptly as soon as the engine is relieved accordingly.

EQ003-142

194

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Operation 11

Operating SectionControl 11.6

EQ003-141

Setting the PowerSplit:

„ In the main menu -> Menu Engine -> Submenu "Diesel engine settings" set the "PowerSplit" changeover type to "Abrupt switchover" or "Stepless changeover".

In the case of abrupt changeover, the changeover occurs abruptly at the set rotational speed.

In the case of stepless changeover, the changeover occurs continuously and starts 100 min -1 before the set rotational speed.

11.6

EQ003-143

Following activation of the PowerSplit, the indicator lamp on the terminal is lit for the engine management (1) or for the automatic changeover of the engine management.

As soon as the "ECO/M-Power" key for manual ECO-Power/M-Power changeover is pressed on the keypad, the automatic operation of the PowerSplit is interrupted and the selected engine characteristic ECO-Power or M-Power is retained.

Operating SectionControl

With "SectionControl" version

ü Section control is allocated to one of the memory keys on the control lever, in the menu

Cabin "Control lever".

ü Section Control is enabled and activated, see menu Machine "Electronics, E-solutions,

Activated add-ons".

ü SectionControl is activated in the CCI terminal.

ü

The main mode switch is in the "field mode" position, see Page 101 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 195

11 Operation

11.7

Operating GPS guidance

ü

The mowers are in headland position or working position, see Page 97 .

ü At least one mower drive has been switched on,

see Page 99

ü The machine is at a standstill or moves forwards.

„ On the control lever, press the memory key that has SectionControl allocated.

ð The status of SectionControl is shown in the status line in the terminal of the machine,

see Page 206

.

„ Start up the machine,

see Page 171

.

Æ The mowers are automatically raised and lowered via SectionControl.

SectionControl is switched off automatically as soon as there is a manual intervention in mower control (for example raising/lowering the mowers or switching the mower drives on/off).

INFO

The lowering times of the mower can be selected in the menu Machine, "ISOBUS". The higher the value, the earlier the mower is lowered.

11.7

196

Recommended procedure

• Create a new job.

• Mow the headland with the machine.

• Draw in the field boundaries.

• Use SectionControl automatic.

Operating GPS guidance

For "GPS guidance" version

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine

By activating the "GPS guidance" steering system, the machine is automatically threaded and held in previously defined lanes. As a result, people can be seriously or fatally injured.

The "GPS guidance" steering system is not an autonomous steering system. Moving the steering wheel manually overrides and deactivates the steering system.

„ Never leave the driver's position during operation. Watch the behaviour of the machine continuously and intervene if necessary.

„ Manually drive around obstacles in the field/lanes, such as electricity pylons. The steering system does not automatically recognise obstacles.

„ At the end of a lane, steer the machine to the next lane. The steering system does not steer automatically to the next selected lane.

„ Deactivate and/or override the steering system at once and stop and secure the machine if there are persons in the danger zone.

„ Deactivate the steering system if poor visibility does not allow safe operation.

„ Do not use the "GPS guidance" steering system on public roads and paths.

ü The lanes are established, see chapter "Map view, lanes" in the instructions for the CCI terminal.

ü All necessary settings are made,

see Page 163

.

ü

The correct machine profile was recognised, see Page 164 .

ü A GPS signal is available,

see Page 164

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Operation 11

Operating GPS guidance 11.7

ü The main mode switch is in "Field mode" position.

ü The machine moves forward at a speed between 0.5 km/h and 12 km/h.

ü

The "GPS guidance" steering system is ready, see Page 163

.

ü The driver does not actively manipulate the steering wheel.

„ For operation of the CCI terminal, see instructions for the CCI terminal.

„ To activate the "GPS guidance" steering system, press the "Automatic steering system" button on the control lever,

see Page 97 .

Æ The "GPS guidance" steering system threads the machine onto the marked lane and holds it in the lane until the driver intervenes.

At the end of the lane, the driver must intervene manually and steer to the next lane. Without intervention by the driver, the steering system would keep steering the machine straight ahead.

The machine would also move beyond field boundaries.

Adjusting track detection and steering response

If the machine steers too strongly or too weakly when threading onto the marked lane, the intensity of the steering can be adjusted. To do this:

„ In CCI.Command, open the menu Settings, "AutoGuidance".

„ Adjust track detection .

Æ The higher the set value, the sharper the steering of the machine.

If the machine steers too much when holding the lane, the steering response can be adjusted.

To do this:

„ In CCI.Command, open the menu Settings, "AutoGuidance".

„ Adjust the steering response .

Æ The higher the set value, the sharper the steering of the machine.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 197

12 Terminal

12.1

Display design

12 Terminal

WARNING

Risk of injury to persons and damage to machines if error messages are ignored

If error messages are ignored without the fault being rectified injuries may occur to persons and/or severe damage to the machine.

„ Rectify fault if error message is shown.

„ If the fault cannot be rectified, contact KRONE service partner.

INFO

The working screens and menus in the following chapters show all possible machine versions. Therefore, the working screen and the menus on the terminal of your machine may differ.

12.1

Display design

1

198

2

EQG002-015

Pos.

1

2

Designation

Display

"On/Off" key

Explanation

Touch display and input interface on the terminal.

Switches the display on/off.

As the terminal is switched on and off via the ignition, do not press the "On/Off" key until the terminal does not respond when the ignition is switched on/off.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

12.2

Description display

Terminal 12

Description display 12.2

12.3

EQG002-014

The display is used for displaying and entering data. It provides information about the current operating status of the machine. Settings can be made and different functions can be run.

To provide menu guidance and entry of values/data, the terminal is equipped with a touchcapable display. Touching the display enables you to call up and change values.

NOTICE

Operate the display only with your finger tips to avoid damaging the surface. Never use a pen, pencil or other pointed objects.

„ To run a specific function, press the appropriate key on the display.

„ To change a value quicker, press the respective key for more than 2 seconds.

„ To scroll in selection windows, drag a finger over the display.

Navigation module

EQ002-035

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 199

12 Terminal

12.3

Navigation module

The function keys (1–6) of the navigation module provide direct access to the most important keys on the display.

The navigation scroll wheel (7) can be used to select the keys on the terminal, make settings on the machine and start and stop functions.

Description of the keys

Pos.

1

Icon Designation

"Step back" key

Explanation

Goes back one input step.

2

3

4

5

6

7

"Step forwards" key Goes forwards one input step.

"Home" key

"Main menu" key

"F2" key

"F1" key

Switches to the working screen

"Road mode" or "Field mode".

Opens the main menu.

Not assigned.

Not assigned.

Navigation scroll wheel Navigates on the display.

"Navigation scroll wheel" function

200

BXG000-055

Besides inputting data through the touch display, the navigation scroll wheel can also be used to navigate on the terminal and change numerical values.

To do this, the "navigation scroll wheel" can be pressed, rotated and slid to the side.

Navigating on the terminal

• Turning: Changes the selection of keys on the terminal in the direction of rotation.

The selected key has a yellow border.

• Pushing: Changes the selection of keys on the terminal in the sliding direction.

The selected key has a yellow border.

• Pressing: Actuates the selected key.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

12.4

Terminal 12

Possible terminals 12.4

Changing an adjustable numerical value

„ To navigate to the required adjustable value, rotate or slide the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).

Æ The selected key has a yellow border.

„ To switch the adjustable value to input mode, press the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).

Æ The key has an orange background.

„ To change the value, rotate the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).

„ To save the adjusted value, press the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).

Possible terminals

I II

12.5

EQG003-140

An 8" terminal (I) or a 12" terminal (II) can be installed in the machine.

The following description is explained in the example of the 12" terminal (II), but applies to both terminals. However, menus or displays may be arranged differently on the 8" terminal (I).

Input window

If a parameter with a numerical value is selected in a menu, an input window opens. The input window can be used to enter and then to release a new setpoint value for the parameter via a keypad.

EQG000-008

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 201

12 Terminal

12.5

Input window

Operate input window

4

5

6

7

8

9

2

3

EQG002-061

Pos.

1

Icon

-

Designation

Cancel

Save

Value

Delete last digit

Explanation

Cancels the entry and closes the input window without saving the entry.

Saves the entered value and closes the input window.

Indicates the currently saved or newly entered value, in this example the value 50%.

Deletes the last digit of the value.

Delete value Deletes the input value.

Standard value (example) Sets the value to the preset standard value (in this example the value

50).

Point Inputs a decimal point.

Keys "0" to "9"

Plus/minus

Input the numerical values 0 to 9.

Switches the algebraic sign of the value.

202

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

12.6

Pos.

10

Icon

11

12

13

Designation

-100 (example)

-10 (example)

+10 (example)

+100 (example)

Terminal 12

Selection window 12.6

Explanation

• Each time the key is pressed, the current value is increased or reduced by the indicated value.

• If the key is pressed and held down, the value changes continuously by the indicated value.

14

15

Minimum/maximum value Indicates the minimum and maximum value of the parameter.

Parameter designation Indicates the parameter designation, in this example "sensitivity".

If a value is input which is less than the minimum value, the value cannot be saved and the minimum value (14) is shown in red.

If a value is input which is greater than the maximum value, the value cannot be saved and the maximum value (14) is shown in red.

„ Input the required value via the keys (7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13).

ð The value appears in the "Value" display range (3).

„ To save the entered value, press .

Selection window

If there are several selection options for an input field, a corresponding selection window opens.

2

3

EQG002-060

Pos.

1

Icon

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Designation

Cancel

Save

Up

Explanation

Cancels the entry and closes the selection window without saving the entry.

Saves the entered value and closes the selection window.

Moves the slide controller upwards.

203

12 Terminal

12.6

Selection window

Pos.

4

Icon

5

6

Designation

Down

Possible selection

Current selection

Explanation

Moves the slide controller downwards.

Can be selected.

Indicates the selection made or the saved setting.

„ To choose the required setting, press

ð The chosen selection is highlighted with

.

.

„ To save the chosen selection, press .

204

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

13

Terminal machine functions 13

Terminal machine functions

WARNING

Risk of injury to persons and damage to machines if error messages are ignored

If error messages are ignored without the fault being rectified injuries may occur to persons and/or severe damage to the machine.

„ Rectify fault if error message is shown.

„ If the fault cannot be rectified, contact KRONE service partner.

1

2 3

1

2 3

6 4

6

5 5

EQG002-011

After switching on the ignition the working screen "Road mode" or the working screen "Field mode" is opened in the main window, depending on the position of the Main Mode Switch.

• The working screen "Road mode" shows the most-important engine and driving data.

• The working screen "Field mode" shows information about the field mode. Several settings for the field mode can be made when in the working screen.

The working screen is divided up into the following display ranges:

2

3

4

5

6

Pos.

1

Designation

Status line

Malfunction warning panel

Title bar

Direct input field mode

Information section

Engine and driving data

Explanation

Shows the current states of the machine, see

Page 206

.

Indicates error states of malfunctions.

Is only visible when malfunctions occur,

see

Page 209

.

Keys for counter menu, error menu and main

menu, see Page 211 .

Keys for direct input of the most important settings in field mode (on "Field mode" working

screen only), see Page 224 .

Freely assignable keys, see Page 225 .

Indicates current fuel levels, engine and traction

drive data, see Page 225

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 205

13 Terminal machine functions

13.1

Status line

13.1

Status line

1

2

3

4

5

6 7

206

EQ003-389

1

2

3

4

Customer counter

Side mounted mower left

Front mounted mower

Right side mounted mower

5

6

7

Assignment of control lever keys M1,

M2, M3 and M4

Automatic steering system

SectionControl

The keys in the status line display the current status of the corresponding parts via colours and icons.

Customer counter (1)

Icon Explanation

Customer counter is inactive.

Customer counter is active.

Area counter is active.

If the key is pressed, the menu "Customer counter" appears.

Left side mounted mower (2)

Icon Explanation

Side mounted mower in transport position and locked in place

Side mounted mower in transport position and not locked in place

Side mounted mower between transport and headland position

Side mounted mower in headland position

Side mounted mower below headland position (mowing unit load relief not active)

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Icon

Terminal machine functions 13

Status line 13.1

Explanation

Side mounted mower in working position (mowing unit load relief active)

Error condition

Position of side mounted mower not available

When the key is pressed, the mower functions menu "Side mounted mowers" is opened.

Front mounted mower (3)

Icon Explanation

Front mounted mower in headland position

Front mounted mower below headland position (mowing unit load relief not active)

Front mounted mower in working position (mowing unit load relief active)

Warning state, faulty on one side

Error condition, faulty on two sides

Position of front mounted mower not available

When a key is pressed, the mower functions menu "Front mounted mower" is opened.

Right side mounted mower (4)

Icon Explanation

Side mounted mower in transport position and locked in place

Side mounted mower in transport position and not locked in place

Side mounted mower between transport and headland position

Side mounted mower in headland position

Side mounted mower below headland position (mowing unit load relief not active)

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 207

13 Terminal machine functions

13.1

Status line

Icon Explanation

Side mounted mower in working position (mowing unit load relief active)

Error condition

Position of side mounted mower not available

When a key is pressed, the mower functions menu "Side mounted mowers" is opened.

Assignment of control lever keys M1, M2, M3 and M4 (5)

The 4 control lever keys can be assigned with all the functions (the table shows an assignment using the M1 key):

Icon Explanation

Key assignment M1 is inactive.

Call up saved cutting height 1.

Call up saved cutting height 2.

Call up open/close right swath hood (for version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood").

Call up open/close left swath hood (for version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood").

Call up saved mowing unit load relief 1.

Call up saved mowing unit load relief 2.

Call up mirror front mowing unit side shift (for version with "Hydraulic front mowing unit side shift").

INFO: When the automatic side shift is active, only the manual shift is mirrored.

Call up mirroring of front mounted mower side shift centre position (for version with "Hydraulic front mounted mower side shift").

INFO: When the automatic side shift is active, only the manual side shift is reset.

Reverse front mowing unit side shift effective direction at steering angle

(for version with "Hydraulic front mowing unit side shift").

Activate Section Control (for the "Section Control" version).

When a key is pressed, the cabin "Control lever" menu is opened.

208

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

13.2

Automatic steering system (6)

Terminal machine functions 13

Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel 13.2

For the "Automatic steering system" version

Icon Explanation

ISOBUS automatic steering system is inactive.

ISOBUS automatic steering system is ready.

The automatic steering system is ready when the associated release switches have been actuated.

ISOBUS automatic steering system is active.

The automatic steering system is ready when the associated release switches and the "Automatic steering system" key have been actuated.

When a key is pressed, the driving functions menu "Automatic steering system" is opened.

Section Control (7)

For the "SectionControl" version

Icon

+

Explanation

SectionControl is inactive.

SectionControl is ready.

SectionControl is active.

When a key is pressed, the "ISOBUS" machine menu opens.

Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel

EQG002-021

The following warnings and faults may appear in the “Malfunction warning panel” display range:

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 209

13 Terminal machine functions

13.2

Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel

Icon Designation

"Exhaust aftertreatment system" warning lamp

Explanation

Shows the status of the exhaust aftertreatment system.

Yellow "Engine" warning lamp The engine electronics have detected a fault with the engine.

Red "Engine" warning lamp The engine electronics have detected a serious fault with the engine.

„ Immediately stop the engine and eliminate the fault.

"Limited operation" warning lamp If the control electronics establish a fault with the traction drive, the speed of the machine is limited to 0 to 20 km/h depending on the severity of the fault.

"Frost protection mode" indicator lamp

WARNING! In addition, the traction control system, cruise control and anti-lock braking system functions are deactivated. Eliminate the error immediately. Restricted operation is used only for recovery of the machine.

Frost protection mode is activated when the ambient temperature and the engine coolant temperature fall below a defined limit. In frost protection mode, the engine speed is limited. A progress bar below the indicator lamp shows for how long the frost protection will continue to be active.

13.2.1

Warning lamps – urea tank filling level

The combinations of warning lamp status displays listed in the table indicate the drop in the filling level in the urea tank as a percentage.

Status of the warning lamps Explanation

10 % ≥ urea tank filling level > 5 %

• 1. Warning on off

5 % ≥ urea tank filling level > 2.5 %

• The available torque is reduced to 80% of the maximum torque.

on flashing

2.5 % ≥ urea tank filling level > 2 %

• The available torque is reduced from

80% to 20% of the maximum torque.

flashing flashing

Urea tank filling level = 2 %

• The available torque is reduced to 20 % of the maximum torque.

flashing on

„ To reach full engine performance and driving speed again, fill an adequate amount of urea in the specified quantity into the urea tank.

210

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

13.2.2

Terminal machine functions 13

Keys in the title bar 13.3

Warning lamps – urea quality, errors or manipulation on the exhaust aftertreatment system

The combinations of warning lamp status displays listed in the table indicate errors or manipulation on the exhaust aftertreatment system as well as unacceptable urea quality.

Status of the warning lamps on on flashing flashing off flashing flashing on

Explanation

Up to 60 min engine running time after a fault or manipulation to the exhaust aftertreatment system or impermissible urea quality has been detected.

• 1. Warning

From 60 min – 170 min engine running time after the cause has been detected.

• The available torque is reduced to 80% of the maximum torque.

From 170 min – 200 min engine running time after the cause has been detected.

• The available torque is reduced from

80% to 20% of the maximum torque.

From 200 min engine running time after the cause has been detected.

• The available torque is reduced to 20 % of the maximum torque.

To reach full engine performance and driving speed again:

„ Add an adequate amount of urea of the specified quality to the urea tank.

„ Search for and remedy the error on the exhaust aftertreatment system, get in touch with your KRONE service partner.

13.3

Keys in the title bar

EQG002-022

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 211

13 Terminal machine functions

13.3

Keys in the title bar

Icon Designation

"Counter" menu

"Error" menu

Main menu

13.3.1

“Counters” menu

Explanation

Opens the "Counter" menu.

Opens the "Error" menu.

Opens the main menu.

EQG002-083

Current machine data can be retrieved via sub-menus in the “Counters” menu.

ü The working screen is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the “Counters” menu with its sub-menus.

“Customer Counter” menu

212

EQG002-055

Customer records can be created in the “Customer Counter” menu.

ü The “Counters” menu is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The list with the created customers is displayed.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Creating customer data record

Terminal machine functions 13

Keys in the title bar 13.3

EQG002-056

„ To create a customer data record, press .

ð The alphanumeric input field "Last name" opens.

„ Enter or change the data of the customer in the alphanumeric input field.

Operation alphanumeric input field

„ To change from capital letters to lower case letters and vice versa, press

„ Press to change from alphabetical to numerical keyboard.

„ To change from numerical to alphabetical keyboard, press .

„ Press to enter special sign.

„ To save the customer record, press .

„ To cancel the entry and keep the old setting, press .

.

EQG003-027

„ To enter more customer data, press .

ð The menu with the input fields for the customer record is displayed.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 213

13 Terminal machine functions

13.3

Keys in the title bar

EQG003-029

„ To enter the customer data, press the appropriate key.

„ Enter the data via the alphanumeric input field.

EQG003-028

Æ The created customer data records are indicated in a list on the customer counter.

„ To create another customer data record, press .

„ To select a customer data record, press .

„ To select the surface counter for a customer, press .

214

EQG003-032

Æ The display shows the "Surfaces" overview for the particular customer.

Æ One "Surface 01" is automatically created for each new customer.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Terminal machine functions 13

Keys in the title bar 13.3

Renaming surface

„ To open the “Details surface” window, press .

EQG003-020

„ To rename a surface, press the corresponding key; in this example, press

.

Æ The alphanumeric input field opens.

„ Rename the surface in the alphanumeric input field,

see Page 213

.

„ To delete the surface, press .

Creating a surface

EQG003-021

„ To create a surface for the customer, press .

Æ The alphanumeric input field opens.

„ Enter the name for the new surface in the alphanumeric input field,

see Page 213 .

Æ The created surfaces are displayed in a table in the "Surfaces" window.

If several surfaces are created for a customer, a line with the total values for the created surfaces of the customer appears at the end of the table.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 215

13 Terminal machine functions

13.3

Keys in the title bar

Deleting a surface

EQG002-074

„ To delete one or more surfaces, press .

Æ A selection view opens.

„ Select the surface or the surfaces that are to be deleted in the square at the end of the line.

„ To delete the selected surfaces, press .

216

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Starting and stopping surface counter

Terminal machine functions 13

Keys in the title bar 13.3

EQG003-022

„ To start the counter for each surface, press in the "Surfaces" window or

in the "Surface details" window.

Æ The counter starts and records the surface data until the counter is stopped again.

EQG002-059

Æ The currently recorded surface is shown in the "Customer counter" window and the

"Surfaces" window in the "Active customer counter" area The icon for the surface and for the customer is highlighted in green

„ To stop the counter, press

"Surface details" screen.

in the "Surfaces" window or in the

INFO

If the key is pressed for a surface, although the customer counter has been started for another surface, a direct change is made to the surfaces being recorded. In other words, the counter of the previously recorded surface is stopped and - at the same time

- the counter for the other surface is started.

Viewing current surface data

The “Details surface” window displays the current surface data.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 217

13 Terminal machine functions

13.3

Keys in the title bar

EQG003-020

"Day counter" menu

EQG003-024

ü The "Counter" menu is open.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ Three day counters are shown that permanently record the current work and consumption data of the machine for the three currently running working periods. Date and time show when the day counters were last reset.

„ Press to complete the work periods and to reset the day counter.

in the corresponding line.

„ To select the values for a day counter, press

Æ The "Day counter details" window opens.

218

EQG003-023

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Terminal machine functions 13

Keys in the title bar 13.3

The "Day counter details" window shows the following current data for the selected work period:

• Operating hours of the diesel engine

• Operating hours of mowers

• Operating hours mowers swathing

• Operating hours mowers partial wide spreading

• Operating hours mowers wide spreading

• Fuel consumption

• Fuel consumption per area

• Odometer (road, field, total)

• Area counter

• Area swathing

• Area partial wide spreading

• Area wide spreading

The work periods can be reset individually so that each counter starts counting the data again from 0.

„ Press to complete the work period and to reset the day counter.

INFO

Fuel consumption measurement is not calibrated and can therefore not be used for billing purposes.

“Total Counter” menu

EQG002-012

ü The “Counters” menu is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The current work and consumption data of the machine is displayed.

The following current data is displayed:

• Operating hours of the diesel engine

• Operating hours of the mowers

• Area counter

• Fuel consumption

• Odometer (road, field, total distance)

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 219

13 Terminal machine functions

13.3

Keys in the title bar

INFO

Fuel consumption measurement is not calibrated and can therefore not be used for billing purposes.

13.3.2

“Error” menu

EQG002-024

ü The working screen is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the “Errors” menu with its sub-menus.

“Active Errors” menu

220

EQG003-025

ü The “Errors” menu is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the “Active Errors” menu with the active errors on the machine with error number and error designation.

„ To call up information on an error, press next to the error message.

Æ The window for the error description is shown.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Terminal machine functions 13

Keys in the title bar 13.3

EQG003-026

1 Selected error number

2 Brief description of the error

„ To close the error description, press .

3 Description of the error

4 "Close" key

"Error history" menu

The error history can be cleared by a KRONE service technician only.

EQG003-090

ü The "Error" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Error history" menu with error messages that have occurred since the error history was last cleared.

„ To call up information on an error, press next to the error message.

Æ The window for the error description is shown.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 221

13 Terminal machine functions

13.3

Keys in the title bar

EQG003-026

1 Selected error number

2 Brief description of the error

„ To close the error description, press .

3 Description of the error

4 "Close" key

"Control units overview" menu

The "Control units overview" menu displays the control units of the machine on a diagram.

222

EQG002-048

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Control units overview" menu.

„ To open the overview of the control units for the machine bus, press

The respective brief descriptions are on the squares for the control units.

The status of the individual control units is indicated by the colour of the squares.

Icon Explanation

CAN activity present, no errors.

.

CAN activity present, with one or more errors.

No CAN activity present, error cannot be determined.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Terminal machine functions 13

Keys in the title bar 13.3

EQG002-041

„ To open the overview of the control units for the engine bus, press .

EQG002-042

„ To open the overview of the control units of the AUX bus, press

„ To open the overview of the control units of the ISOBUS, press .

.

EQ002-528

„ To call up information about a control unit, press the key on the respective control unit.

Æ The associated information field is displayed.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 223

13 Terminal machine functions

13.4

Direct input “Field mode”

13.3.3

Main menu

13.4

EQG002-013

ü The working screen has been selected.

„ To open the main menu, press .

For menu structure and to navigate in the menus,

see Page 231 .

Direct input “Field mode”

224

EQG002-018

The "Direct input field mode" can be used to make settings directly from the "Field mode" working screen without having to open the submenu.

To change the specified setting values, press or .

Pressing reduces the set value:

• By a specified value each time the key is pressed.

• If the key is pressed and held down, the value is gradually reduced.

• If the key is held down for longer, the value is reduced more quickly.

Pressing increases the set value:

• By a specified value each time the key is pressed.

• If the key is pressed and held down, the value is gradually increased.

• If the key is held down for longer, the value is increased more quickly.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Terminal machine functions 13

Information area 13.5

13.5

Information area

13.6

EQG000-007

The keys in the information section can be freely assigned via a selection box.

Assigning keys

ü The working screen has been selected.

„ Press the key to be assigned.

ð The selection box opens up.

„ Select the required assignment.

„ To save the assignment, press .

„ To cancel the entry, press .

When the selection is saved, the existing assignment is overwritten.

Engine and driving data display range

The "Engine and driving data" display range shows the machine's current fuel levels, engine and driving data.

1 4

5

6

7

9

1

8 4

7

6

2

3

2

EQG002-016

3

Pos.

1

Designation

Display coolant temperature

Display fuel level

Display urea level

2

3

Explanation

Indicates the current coolant temperature in °C

(digital and analogue).

Indicates the current fuel level as a % (digital and analogue).

Indicates the current urea level as a % (digital and analogue).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 225

13 Terminal machine functions

13.6

Engine and driving data display range

Pos.

4

5

6

7

8

9

Designation

Display speed in digital format

Explanation

Indicates the current speed in digital format in km/ h or mph.

Display speed in analogue format Indicates the current speed in analogue format in km/h or mph (in "Road mode" working screen only).

Display engine speed in digital format

Display engine speed in analogue format

Display engine load in digital format

Switchover rear-view camera

Displays the current engine speed in digital format in rpm (min era.

⁻ ¹).

Displays the current engine speed in analogue format in rpm (min ⁻ ¹).

Indicates the current engine load as % in digital format (in "Field mode" working screen only).

Shows the display range for the rear-view cam-

Warning lamps for engine and fuel levels

Warning lamp for coolant temperature (1)

Icon Explanation

Coolant temperature OK.

Coolant temperature is in critical range.

Warning lamp for fuel level (2)

Icon Explanation

Fuel tank filling level greater than 10 %.

Fuel tank filling level less than 10 %.

Warning lamp for urea filling level (3)

Icon Explanation

Urea tank filling level greater than 20 %.

Display is lit: Urea tank filling level less than 20 %.

Display flashes: The engine performance is reduced.

If the filling level has dropped below 20 %, the warning lamps on the malfunction warning panel warn of a reduction in the maximum driving speed and obtainable torque.

• To reach full engine performance and driving speed again, pour an adequate amount of

urea, in the specified quality, into the urea tank, see Page 286 .

226

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Display camera images on the terminal (9)

Terminal machine functions 13

Engine and driving data display range 13.6

1

2

EQG002-084

The picture of the rear-view camera can be displayed on the terminal.

„ Press to display the camera image on the terminal.

Æ The terminal shows the camera image.

Select the camera (1)

Icon Explanation

The image of the rear-view camera is selected.

The image of the rear-view camera is displayed.

Display on the terminal (2)

Icon Explanation

The mirroring of the camera image is selected.

The camera image is displayed as a mirror image

The display range for the camera image is increased.

The display range for the camera image is reduced.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 227

13 Terminal machine functions

13.7

Traction drive indicator lights

The camera image can be zoomed in on the terminal.

„ To increase the display range for the camera image, press .

„ To reduce the display range for the camera image, press .

13.7

EQG002-086

„ To hide the camera image, press .

Traction drive indicator lights

The indicator lamps in the main display area for the traction drive provide information about the current engine and drive settings.

1

2

3

4

5 6

EQG002-017

Display for acceleration behavior (1)

Indicates the current value for the acceleration behavior.

228

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Terminal machine functions 13

Traction drive indicator lights 13.7

Icon

1

2

3

4

Explanation

Low acceleration

Medium acceleration

High acceleration

Maximum acceleration

Indicator lamp for direction of travel and parking brake (2)

Indicates the direction of travel and the status of the parking brake.

Icon Explanation

Direction of travel forwards

Neutral mode (idle)

Direction of travel backwards

Parking brake is applied

Indicator lamp for PowerSplit (3)

Indicates the status of the Power Mode.

Icon Explanation

Manual "Eco-Power mode"

The diesel engine works in energy saving mode.

Manual "M-Power mode"

The diesel engine works in maximum power mode.

Automatic switchover between "Eco-Power mode" and "M-Power mode".

Indicator lamp for traction control system (TC) (4)

Displays the status of the traction control system (TC).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 229

13 Terminal machine functions

13.7

Traction drive indicator lights

Icon Designation

Traction control system

(TC) inactive

Explanation

Traction control system

(TC) stage I active

Traction control system

(TC) stage I regulates actively

Traction control system

(TC) stage II active

Traction control system

(TC) stage II regulates actively

The drive torque on the wheels is controlled.

Traction control system (TC) stage I allows only low slip (spinning wheels).

Connected traction control system (TC) stage I preserves the sward.

The drive torque on the wheels is controlled.

Traction control system (TC) stage II allows high slip (spinning wheels).

Traction control system (TC) stage II ensures that sufficient traction is provided even under difficult conditions.

Display for cruise control (5)

Indicates the status of the cruise control and the stored speed when operating with the cruise control.

Icon Designation

Cruise control is inactive

Explanation

The stored speed when the cruise control is operated is 12 km/h.

12.0 km/h

12.0 km/h

Cruise control active is active

Traction drive is at the power limit

The traction drive is at the power limit. The machine cannot be accelerated as long as this icon is shown. The icon can also show when the cruise control system is inactive.

Load limit control active

CONSTANT

POWER

CONSTANT

POWER

Load limit control is active and the traction drive is at the power limit

The traction drive is at the power limit. The machine cannot be accelerated as long as this icon is shown.

Indicator lamp for machine height (6)

Icon Explanation

The machine height is in road position.

The machine height is in field position.

The machine height is either between road and field position, below the road position or above the field position.

230

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

14

14.1

Terminal – Menus 14

Menu structure 14.1

Terminal – Menus

WARNING

Risk of injury to persons and damage to machines if error messages are ignored

If error messages are ignored without the fault being rectified injuries may occur to persons and/or severe damage to the machine.

„ Rectify fault if error message is shown.

„ If the fault cannot be rectified, contact KRONE service partner.

Menu structure

The menu structure is divided into the following menus depending on the machine configuration.

Menu Sub-menu Explanation

Machine

Electronics

E-Solutions

Activated add-ons

History

Telemetry

Telemetry

In the menu the same data, which is displayed on the terminal in the machine, can be displayed to a KRONE customer service employee on the screen at his place of work. The KRONE SmartConnect control unit establishes the connection to the

KRONE customer service via the mobile network and transmits the data.

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Settings

Control unit versions

Software

The current software versions of the control units are indicated in the menu.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 231

14 Terminal – Menus

14.1

Menu structure

Menu Sub-menu

232

Menu Sub-menu

Explanation

Hardware

The hardware versions of the control units are indicated in the menu.

ISOBUS

Settings

Tanks

Engine oil level

The engine oil level is displayed in the menu,

see Page 281

.

Hydraulic oil tank

The menu shows the hydraulic oil level and the refilling quantity.

INFO:

The hydraulic oil level and the refilling quantity are only shown correctly when the

machine is in the transport position, see

Page 166

.

The camera system

Settings

Explanation

Cabin

Terminal

Settings

The current settings of the terminal for language, day/ night design, units of measurement, date and time are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

Information

The software version of the terminal is displayed in the menu.

Armrest

Diagnostics

see Page 240

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Menu Sub-menu

Terminal – Menus 14

Menu structure 14.1

Explanation

Key test

A test of the keys of the keypad, of the Main Mode

Switch and of the navigation module can be performed

in the menu, see Page 241 .

Control lever

Settings

The M1, M2, M3 and M4 memory keys on the control lever can be assigned with functions in the menu.

Key test

In the menu a test of the keys of the control lever can be

performed, see Page 241 .

Interior lighting

Settings

The intensity of the interior lighting of control elements and control lever can be set in the menu.

Printer

Settings

The printer type can be set in the menu.

Wiper

Settings

Lighting

Settings

In the menu the time period for activation of the "Coming Home" and "Leaving Home" functions and for lighting when refuelling can be set.

„ For the description of the Coming Home function, the

Leaving Home function and lighting when refuelling,

see Page 92 .

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Key test

A test of the keys on the light control unit can be per-

formed in the menu, see Page 241 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 233

14 Terminal – Menus

14.1

Menu structure

Menu Sub-menu

Menu Sub-menu

Explanation

Central lubrication

Settings

The lubricant quantity for a lubrication cycle of the central lubrication unit can be adjusted in the menu.

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Maintenance

The menu displays the maintenance status of central lubrication.

Explanation

Mowing functions

Front mounted mowers

Settings

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Calibration

The upper end position and the working position of the front mounted mower is determined in the menu.

see Page 383

Coupling

Connecting the front mounted mower,

see Page 135

Disconnecting the front mounted mower,

see Page 139

Side mounted mowers

Settings

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Calibration

The upper end positions and the working positions of the side mounted mowers are calibrated in the menu .

see Page 383

Mower side guard

234

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Menu Sub-menu

Terminal – Menus 14

Menu structure 14.1

Explanation

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Swath hood

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Mower drive

Settings

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Side shift front mounted mower

Settings

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Manual operation

see Page 243

Cutting height

Overview

The cutting height can be adjusted to different ground conditions. In the menu two cutting heights for the mowers can be changed and saved,

see Page 244

.

Settings

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Calibration

see Page 380

Fine calibration

see Page 382

Mower load relief

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 235

14 Terminal – Menus

14.1

Menu structure

Menu Sub-menu

Menu Sub-menu

Explanation

Relief

The mower load relief adjusts the ground pressure of the cutter bar to the local conditions. In order to protect the sward the load on the cutter bar must be relieved so that it does not jump when mowing, yet does not leave any skid marks on the ground.

This menu displays the current mower relief and it is

possible to save 2 settings for the mower relief, see

Page 245 .

Settings

The current and saved settings for mower relief are displayed in this menu and can be changed here.

Calibration

The mower relief of the mowers is calibrated in the

menu, see Page 378 .

Headland

Settings

This menu displays the settings of headland management, of the side mounted mowers and the front mounted mower.

Mower profile

Settings

The overcut of the mowing track can be set in this menu.

Explanation

Engine

Diesel engine

Settings

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Maintenance

The "Diesel engine maintenance" menu displays the remaining operating hours of the diesel engine until the next maintenance date. The display counts down the operating hours of the diesel engine until the next maintenance date of the diesel engine.

236

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Menu Sub-menu

Menu Sub-menu

Terminal – Menus 14

Menu structure 14.1

Explanation

Hydraulics

Working hydraulics

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Explanation

Drive functions

The components of the running gear can be set in the menu.

Automatic steering system

Settings

The settings for automatic steering system parameters are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Traction drive

Calibration

In the menu the brake pedal is checked for plausibility,

see Page 379

.

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Axles

Settings

This menu displays the position of the axles when the mower is activated and set.

Diagnostics

see Page 240

Maintenance

The "Axle maintenance" menu is used to select which piston can be actuated using the keys on the keypad.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 237

14 Terminal – Menus

14.2

Bringing up menu level

Menu Sub-menu

14.2

Bringing up menu level

Explanation

Machine settings

In the menu the mower versions and settings for the mowing track are displayed and can be changed.

User level

The currently registered user category is shown in the menu.

INFO:

The setting can only be changed by the service technician.

238

EQ002-052

Depending on how the machine is equipped, the main menu is divided into the following menus:

Icon Designation

"Machine" menu

"Cabin" menu

"Central lubrication" menu

"Mowing functions" menu

"Engine" menu

"Hydraulics" menu

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Terminal – Menus 14

Navigating in menus 14.3

Icon Designation

"Drive Functions" menu

"Machine settings" menu

"User level" menu

14.3

INFO

Touching the coloured parts of the machine illustration in the display directly opens the corresponding menus.

„ To bring up the menu level from the working screen, press .

Navigating in menus

The functions of the terminal are divided into menus. Navigate through the menu structure by using the keys in the individual menus.

„ To open the main menu from the working screen, press .

„ To open a menu from the main menu, press the key of the corresponding menu.

„ To open sub-menus from a menu, press the key of the corresponding sub-menu.

„ To change from one sub-menu to another one, press the key of sub-menu in the footer.

„ To leave the current menu, press .

„ To open the main menu from a menu, press selected.

repeatedly until the main menu is

„ To go one step forwards again after a step back, press .

„ To open the working screen from the main menu or a menu, press .

14.3.1

Changing/saving parameter

„ To change a parameter, press the corresponding parameter key.

Æ A value input field or a selection box opens depending on the setting menu.

„ If a value input field opens, change the value of the parameter.

„ If a selection box opens, change the selection of the parameter.

„ To save the setting, press .

„ To cancel the entry and keep the old setting, press

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

.

239

14 Terminal – Menus

14.4

“Diagnostics” menu explanation

14.4

“Diagnostics” menu explanation

INFO

The purpose of this chapter is to explain in general terms how to handle the diagnostics masks. The diagnostics masks which can be selected in the individual menus are no longer listed in detail.

The sensors/actuators and the readable process values of the menu component are listed in the

"Diagnostics" menus.

The applied voltages/currents can be read off for these components/values.

240

EQG002-050

1 Icon for the component type/process value

2 Number of the sensor/actuator

4 Status of the sensor/actuator

3 Designation of the sensor/actuator

5 Key for opening the sensor graphic display

6 Graphic display of the applied and permitted currents of the selected sensor/ actuator

„ To open the graphic display of a sensor or actuator, press .

INFO

This screen is needed in case of a contact with customer service as the service technician can conclude errors on the forage harvester from the values in this screen.

Component type/process value

Icon Explanation

Sensor

Actuator

Process value

Sensor/actuator status displays

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Icon

Terminal – Menus 14

Menu "key test" explanation 14.5

Explanation

Sensor/actuator active

Sensor/actuator inactive

Sensor attenuated

Sensor unattenuated

OK

Not OK

Momentary switch pressed, switch closed

Momentary switch not pressed, switch not closed

Cable break

Short circuit

Cable break/short circuit

Other error

Status not available

14.5

Menu "key test" explanation

INFO

The purpose of this chapter is to explain in general terms how to handle the "key test" menus.

The key tests which can be selected in the individual menus are no longer listed in detail.

Key tests are available for the following control elements:

Control element

KP1

KP2

MMS

Explanation

Key test left half of the keypad

Key test right half of the keypad

Key test Main Mode Switch

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 241

14 Terminal – Menus

14.5

Menu "key test" explanation

Control element

NM

Light control unit

Control lever

Explanation

Key test navigation module

Key test light control unit

Key test control lever

INFO

To ensure that the "key test" menus are available in the terminal, the Main Mode Switch must be in the neutral mode position and the ignition key in the II position. Only the key test of the

Main Mode Switch is available in the terminal without this measure.

ü The corresponding "key test" menu is open.

„ To select an operating element, which is to be tested, press the key for the corresponding operating element

ð The operating element is displayed on the terminal.

„ Press the key, which is to be tested, and check the background colour of the key on the terminal.

The colours of the keys on the terminal indicate whether there is an error between the operating element and the control unit.

Icon Explanation

Key not pressed.

Key pressed.

Error recognized.

242

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

15

Settings 15

Setting in the terminal 15.1

Settings

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

15.1

15.1.1

Setting in the terminal

Manual settings

In the menu mowing functions "Manual operation" manual settings can be made to the mowers.

EQ002-224

ü The menu mowing functions "Manual operation" has been opened.

• The left side mounted mower is manually operated in the display range (1).

• The front mounted mower is manually operated in the display range (2).

• The right side mounted mower is manually operated in the display range (3).

„ To increase the cutting height, press .

„ To reduce the cutting height, press .

„ To release the ratchet, press .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 243

15 Settings

15.1

Setting in the terminal

„ To lock the ratchet, press .

„ To release the pendulum stop, press .

„ To lock the pendulum stop, press .

15.1.2

Setting cutting height

Cutting height

8–11 cm

4-6 cm approx. 3 cm conditions of usage

High cut

Forage crop, dry or moist soil

Forage crop, dry or normal soil

Low cut

Sward damage can occur

The cutting height can be adjusted to the different ground conditions. In the Mowing functions menu "Cutting height overview" two cutting heights for each of the mowers can be changed and saved. The cutting height is set via the angle.

Save cutting height 1 and cutting height 2

ü The menu Mowing functions "Cutting height overview" has been opened.

1

2

3

EQ002-087

244

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Settings 15

Setting in the terminal 15.1

The current cutting height for all mowers is shown in the display range (3).

„ To change the values for each mowing unit, press change the values for each mowing unit.

. Then use or to

„ To change the values for all mowing units proportionally, press

to change the values for all mowing units.

. Then use or

„ To change the values for cutting height 1, press .

Æ The values are accepted then in the display range (1).

„ To change the values for cutting height 2, press .

Æ The values are accepted then in the display range (2).

„ To activate the values in display ranges (1) or (2) press, .

INFO

In order to obtain an optimum crop flow the cutterbar should always be inclined slightly forwards. If, however, a higher cut is required:

„ For version with "High-cut skids"

: Mount high-cut skids, front mounted mower, see

Page 249 , side mounted mowers,

see Page 259 .

15.1.3

Setting the mower relief

The mower load relief adjusts the ground pressure of the cutter bar to the local conditions. In order to protect the sward the load on the cutter bar must be relieved so that it does not jump when mowing, yet does not leave any skid marks on the ground.

INFO

A mower relief setting of at least 85% is recommended. Wear is reduced by setting a higher relief.

The "Mower load relief, relief" menu displays the current mower load relief and it is possible to store 2 settings for the mower load relief.

ü The "Mowing functions" menu has been opened.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 245

15 Settings

15.1

Setting in the terminal

Saving mower relief 1 and mower relief 2

EQ002-088

• The first value of the mower relief is displayed and saved in display range (1).

• The second value of the mower relief is displayed and saved in display range (2).

• The current mower relief of all mowers is displayed and saved in display range (3).

„ To change the values for each mowing unit, press change the values for each mowing unit.

. Then use or to

„ To change the values for all mowing units proportionally, press

to change the values for all mowing units.

. Then use

„ To save the values for mower relief 1, press .

Æ The values are accepted then in the display range (1).

„ Press to save the values for mower relief 2.

Æ The values are accepted then in the display range (2).

„ To save the values in the display ranges (1) or (2), press .

or

246

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

15.2

15.2.1

Settings 15

Settings on front mounted mower 15.2

Settings on front mounted mower

Setting the side guards on the front mounted mower

BMG000-029

The protective equipment can be adapted to harvesting conditions by adjusting the guards. In order to avoid that crop stalks bend because the guards are too low, set the guards higher. To avoid that stones are slung away when the crops are low, set the guards lower.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Fold up the side guards (1),

see Page 190

.

„ Loosen the screws (4).

„ Use the console (3) to adjust the height of the side guard (1).

„ Tighten the screws (4).

Readjusting the front guard support

2

1

3

BMG000-035

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 247

15 Settings

15.2

Settings on front mounted mower

After the side guards have been adjusted, the two front guard supports must be readjusted. To do this:

„ Loosen the screws (3) on both front guard supports (2).

„ Adjust the two front guard supports (2) with the oblong holes (1) so that the front guard is supported.

„ Tighten the screws (3) on both front guard supports.

15.2.2

Set conditioner speed

248

BM000-199

Two conditioner speeds can be set on the belt drive of the front mounted mower. This affects the conditioning effect and the power requirement.

Maximum rotational speed: 1000 rpm (inner belt pulleys (1): large belt pulley on top, small belt pulley on bottom)

Minimum rotational speed: 700 rpm (outer belt pulleys (2): small belt pulley on top, large belt pulley on bottom)

ü The front mounted mower is in working position,

see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The conditioner drive guard has been disassembled,

see Page 310

.

„ To set the conditioner speed to 700 rpm, tension the kraftband (5) on the two outer pulleys

(2). To do this:

„

Release the tension on the belt drive on the front mounted mower, see Page 313 .

„ Position the kraftband (5) on the two outer pulleys (2).

„

Tension the belt drive on the front mounted mower, see Page 313 .

„ To set the conditioner speed of the front mounted mower to 1000 rpm, tension the kraftband

(5) on the two inner pulleys (1). To do this:

„

Release the tension on the belt drive on the front mounted mower, see Page 313 .

„ Position the kraftband (5) on the two inner pulleys (2).

„

Tension the belt drive on the front mounted mower, see Page 313 .

„

Mount the guard for the conditioner drive, see Page 310 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

15.2.3

Setting the degree of conditioning

Settings 15

Settings on front mounted mower 15.2

15.2.4

KMG000-066

The degree of conditioning can be changed by adjusting the conditioning sheet using the lever

(1).

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Adjust the lever (1).

Æ In direction " + ": The distance between the tines and the conditioning sheet is reduced. The degree of conditioning is increased.

Æ In direction " ": The distance between the tines and the conditioning sheet is increased. The degree of conditioning is reduced.

Increasing cutting height at front mounted mower with high-cut skids

For version with “high-cut skids”

15.2.5

KMG000-025

The cutting height can be increased by means of high cut skids. Mount high cut skids according to figure under the cutting discs or under the mower drum.

ü The front mounted mower is raised,

see Page 97

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The front mounted mower has been securely supported,

see Page 31 .

„ Insert the high-cut skid (2) into the sliding skid (1) and screw it in place.

Setting wide spreading

Removing the swath flap sets the crop down more widely.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 249

15 Settings

15.2

Settings on front mounted mower

15.2.6

BM000-218

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

Removing and mounting swath flaps right/left

Removing swath flaps

„ Pull the spring cotter pin (5) and remove the bolt (1).

„ Unscrew the ring screw (3).

„ Remove the swath flap (4) and store it with the mounting parts in a secure place for later assembly.

Mounting swath flaps

„ Mount the swath flap (4) with the bolt (1), the spring cotter pin (5) and the ring screw (3) on the hood (2).

Setting swath width

250

1

BMG000-032

ü The front mounted mower is in working position,

see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Unscrew the ring screw (1) on the right-hand and left-hand side of the machine.

„ To set the swath width, move the ring screw (1) in the oblong hole. Set the swath width in a way that ensures the tyres of the machine do not drive over the swath.

„ Tighten the ring screw (1) by hand.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

15.2.7

Checking deflector sheets

Settings 15

Settings on front mounted mower 15.2

15.2.8

BM000-219

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü

The swath flaps right/left are dismounted, see Page 250

„ In case of uneven swathing, check that the deflector sheets (1) are not deformed and align them, if necessary.

Setting the lifting height at the front mounted mower

To change the lifting height, the top link (3) can be attached in two positions on the front mowing unit.

BM000-141

The lower position (I) of the top link is the standard setting.

The upper position (II) of the top link increases the ground clearance of the raised front mowing unit. This setting can be used for running over extremely heavy swaths.

Changing the position of the top link

ü

The front mounted mower is placed on the ground and securely supported, see Page 31

or with "Parking support" version : The machine is placed on the parking support,

see

Page 193

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 31

.

„ Remove the linch pin (1).

„ Remove the bolt (2).

„ To depressurise the top link (3), follow the instructions at the terminal for depressurisation in the "Decouple front mounted mower" menu,

see Page 139

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 251

15 Settings

15.3

Settings on the side mounted mowers

„ Position the top link and secure it with a bolt (2) and linch pin (1).

„ Set the parameter KMC-60 "Top link position" in the terminal in the mowing functions menu

"Cutting height settings".

„ Calibrate the mower load relief,

see Page 378

.

15.3

Settings on the side mounted mowers

15.3.1

Setting the side guards on the side mounted mowers

2

8

1

3

7

6

4 5

KMG000-078

The protective equipment can be adapted to harvesting conditions by adjusting the guards. In order to avoid that crop stalks bend because the guards are too low, set the guards higher. To avoid that stones are slung away when the crops are low, set the guards lower.

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

Setting the side guard (1)

„ Press down the ratchet using a screwdriver (8) and fold up the side guard (1).

„ Loosen the screws (4).

„ Set the height of the side guard (1) by means of the console (5).

„ Tighten the screws (4).

252

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Settings 15

Settings on the side mounted mowers 15.3

Setting the side guard (2)

„ Fold up the front guard (3),

see Page 192

.

„ Loosen the screws (6).

„ Set the height of the side guard (2) by means of the console (7).

„ Tighten the screws (6).

„ Set both side guards equally.

Readjusting the front guard support

2

1

15.3.2

3

BMG000-035

After the side guards have been adjusted, the front guard support must be readjusted. To do this:

„ Loosen the screws (3) on the front guard support (2).

„ Adjust the front guard support (2) with the oblong holes (1) so that the front guard is supported.

„ Tighten the screws (3).

Checking/setting locking of side guards

1 3

2

KMG000-042

The locking (2) prevents during use that the side guard (1) is folded up and foreign bodies are slung away. Therefore make sure every time before using the machine that the side guard (1) of the machine is folded down and secured by the locking (2).

Check the lock

„

Bring the machine into working position, see Page 186 .

ð If the side guard folds down, the side guard has been correctly adjusted.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 253

15 Settings

15.3

Settings on the side mounted mowers

ð If the side guard does not fold down, the locking must be adjusted.

„ Move the machine to the transport position.

ð If the side guard folds down, the side guard is correctly adjusted.

ð If the side guard does not fold down, the lock must be adjusted.

Adjusting the locking

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Loosen the screw connection (3).

„ Readjust the locking (2) in the oblong hole.

„ Tighten the screw connection (3).

„ Check the locking (2).

15.3.3

Setting the conditioner speed

KMG000-040

Two conditioner speeds can be set on the main gearbox. These influence the effect of the conditioner and the power requirement.

Minimum rotational speed ( ): 700 rpm

15.3.4

254

Maximum rotational speed ( ): 1000 rpm

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 97 .

„ Unscrew the wing screw (1) from the actuating lever (2).

„ Turn the actuating lever (2) 180 degrees.

INFO: To turn the actuating lever more easily, turn the mower drum manually.

„ Secure the actuating lever (2) with the wing screw (1).

The arrow (3) points in the direction of travel and indicates the rotational speed that is set.

Setting the auger speed

With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

The auger speed can be set by replacing the pulleys and adjusting the conditioner speed at the

main gearbox, see Page 254 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Settings 15

Settings on the side mounted mowers 15.3

The following options are available for setting the auger speed:

NOTICE

Machine damage due to an excessively high auger speed

An excessively high auger speed can result in imbalance and thus damage the machine.

„ Never set the conditioner speed to 1000 rpm if the large pulley is mounted at the conditioner and the small pulley is mounted at the auger conveyor.

Auger speed low high high

Conditioner speed main gearbox

700 rpm

700 rpm

1000 rpm

Pulley at conditioner Pulley at auger conveyor small pulley large pulley large pulley small pulley small pulley large pulley

Replacing pulleys

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The guard of the auger drive has been removed,

see Page 311

.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 272 .

BM000-275

„ To dismount the support (1), unscrew the two screws (2) and the discs.

„ To dismount the support (3), unscrew the two screws (4) and the discs.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 255

15 Settings

15.3

Settings on the side mounted mowers

Dismounting belt pulleys

1

2

3

4

BM000-273

„

Relieve the kraftband (1) of the auger drive, see Page 316 .

„ Remove the kraftband (1).

„ NOTE! Damage to the sensor due to carelessness when working on the pulley! When mounting and dismounting the pulleys, ensure that the sensor behind the pulley is not damaged.

Carry out the following steps for both belt pulleys:

„ Unscrew the hexagon head screw (2), the detent edged washer (3) and the washer (4).

1

2 3

4

BM000-481

„ Unscrew the threaded pins (4).

„ Oil one of the threaded pins (4) and screw into the forcing borehole (3) until the Taperlock clamping bushing is detached from the belt pulley and the belt pulley moves freely on the shaft.

„ Remove the belt pulley (1) with the Taperlock clamping bushing (2) from the shaft.

256

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Settings 15

Settings on the side mounted mowers 15.3

Mounting the belt pulleys

1

2

3

5

6

7

4

BM000-482

Pos.

(A)

(B)

(C)

1

1

Quantity

1

Designation Material surface

Zn8

Dacromet

ZN8 A

Strength class

8.8

Hexagon head screw M10 x 25

Detent edged washer SKM 10

Disc 14 x 58

Carry out the following steps for both belt pulleys:

„ Clean and grease the borehole of the belt pulley (1).

„ Clean and grease all blank surfaces such as borehole and cone surface of the Taperlock clamping bushing.

„ Clean and grease the shaft.

„ Insert the fit-in key (3) into the groove of the shaft.

„ Insert the Taperlock clamping bushing (2) into the borehole of the belt pulley (1).

„ Position the Taperlock clamping bushing (2) so that the half blind holes of the Taperlock clamping bushing and the half threaded holes of the belt pulley are adjoined.

„ Oil both threaded pins (4) and mount loosely.

„ Push the belt pulley (1), depending on the required speed, onto the respective shaft.

„ Position the belt pulleys (1) so that the belt pulleys are aligned with each other.

„ Tighten the threaded pins (4) to a tightening torque of M

A

=48 Nm.

„ Check the alignment of both belt pulleys by placing a straight bar centrally on the left and right belt pulley.

„ If the belt pulleys are not in alignment, loosen the threaded pins (4) again, adjust the position of the belt pulleys and tighten the threaded pins (4) to a tightening torque of

M

A

=48 Nm.

„ Mount the hexagon head screw (5) (A) with the detent edged washer (6) (B) and the washer (7) (C).

„ Position the kraftband on the belt pulleys.

„ Check whether the tension roll is positioned centrally on the kraftband.

ð The tension roll is not positioned centrally on the kraftband.

„ Use washers to compensate the position of the tension roll.

ð The tension roll is positioned centrally on the kraftband.

„

Tension the belt tension of the auger drive, see Page 316 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 257

15 Settings

15.3

Settings on the side mounted mowers

15.3.5

BM000-275

„ Mount the support (1) using the previously dismounted screws (2) and discs.

„ Mount the support (3) using the previously dismounted screws (4) and discs.

„

Mount the guard of the auger conveyor drive, see Page 311

.

Adjusting the scraper sheet

For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

The scraper sheet (1) on the auger tray (right and left) is used to strip off the crop stalks in order to prevent crop blockages in the area of the auger conveyor.

2

X 1

1

2

3

BM000-122

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 97 .

ü The swath hoods are open,

see Page 99

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 272 .

To achieve optimum working results, a dimension of X= 0-2 mm between auger conveyor (2) and scraper sheet (1) must be maintained.

„ Wear suitable protective gloves,

see Page 22 .

„ Loosen the screws (3).

„ Move the scraper sheet (1) in the oblong holes until the dimension between the scraper sheet (1) and the auger conveyor (2) is X= 0‑2 mm .

„ Tighten the screws (3).

258

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

15.3.6

Settings 15

Settings on the side mounted mowers 15.3

WARNING! Risk of injury due to manual rotation of the auger conveyor. Even a slow manual rotation of the auger conveyor can shear off limbs! Never rotate the auger conveyor manually! Move the auger conveyor only with a slow manual rotation of the mower drum. Ensure that limbs are away from the danger point as long as the auger conveyor is rotating.

„ Manually rotate the mower drum to advance the auger conveyor (2) by one revolution.

„ Ensure that the distance X= 0 ... 2 mm between the scraper sheet (1) and the auger conveyor (2) is reached.

Setting the degree of conditioning

15.3.7

KMG000-066

The degree of conditioning can be changed by adjusting the conditioning sheet using the lever

(1).

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Adjust the lever (1).

Æ In direction " + ": The distance between the tines and the conditioning sheet is reduced. The degree of conditioning is increased.

Æ In direction " ": The distance between the tines and the conditioning sheet is increased. The degree of conditioning is reduced.

Increasing the cutting height at the side mounted mowers by means of high-cut skids

For version with “high-cut skids”

INFO

By converting the side mounted mowers to other skids (high-cut skids, combi skids), the machine is more than 3 m wide. Based on national regulations, machines, which are wider than 3 m, require special approval in some countries to be driven on the roads. Such an approval may have to be obtained.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 259

15 Settings

15.3

Settings on the side mounted mowers

15.3.8

KMG000-025

The cutting height can be increased by means of high cut skids. Mount high cut skids according to figure under the cutting discs or under the mower drum.

ü

The mowers are in the headland position, see Page 97

.

ü The mowers are safely supported,

see Page 31

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Insert the high-cut skid (2) into the sliding skid (1) and screw it in place.

Setting wide spreading

I

3

1

5 2

2 3

KMG000-100

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Loosen the ring screws (1) but do not unscrew them.

„ Swivel the swath flaps (2) all the way outwards (I).

„ Tighten the ring screws (1).

For version with "Deflector sheets"

Depending on the operating conditions, the deflector sheets (3) may have to be readjusted to provide for equal distribution across the entire area.

„ Loosen the palm knobs (5).

„ Shift deflector sheets (3) to the desired position.

„ Tighten the palm knobs (5) manually.

„ Ensure that the palm knobs are tightened as tight as possible. Otherwise they may be lost due to vibrations.

260

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

15.3.9

Setting wide spreading sheet

Settings 15

Settings on the side mounted mowers 15.3

KM000-028

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Loosen the palm knobs (1) on right and left sides of machine.

„ Move the wide spreading sheet (2) to the desired position.

For swathing, set the wide spreading sheet all the way down.

For wide spreading, adjust the wide spreading sheet to the amount of forage.

„ Tighten the palm knobs (1) manually.

„ Ensure that the palm knobs are tightened as tight as possible. Otherwise they may be lost due to vibrations.

15.3.10

Impact damage protection system

WARNING

Risk of accident due to changed driving behaviour

If the value for the spring on the impact damage protection system is changed, the trigger moment of the impact damage protection system also changes. As a result, the impact damage protection system may trigger in the transport position in case of abrupt loads and the driving behaviour may change. This can lead to accidents.

„ Never change the value for the spring on the impact damage protection system.

The side mounted mowers are equipped with a so-called impact damage protection system in order to prevent damage when driving into obstacles. After the impact damage protection system has been triggered, the side mounted mower swivels back. Reversing the side mounted mower causes the impact damage protection system to engage again.

The trigger moment has been set at the factory.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 261

15 Settings

15.3

Settings on the side mounted mowers

1

X

BM000-335

Setting dimension for the spring (1) on the impact damage protection system:

X = 90 mm

15.3.11

Dismounting the bottom flap

For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

To avoid blockages in the feed channel in stony soil, the ground flaps (1) can be removed.

262

BM000-226

Disassembly

ü The side mounted mowers are in transport position,

see Page 97

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Loosen the screw connections (2).

„ Open the ground flap (1) and detach it upwards.

Store the disassembled ground flaps in a safe place for subsequent assembly.

Assembly

ü The side mounted mowers are in transport position,

see Page 97

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Attach the ground flap (1).

„ Close the ground flap and tighten the screw connections (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

16

Maintenance - General Information 16

Maintenance - General Information

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

WARNING

Risk of injury during trial run of the machine

If a trial run is conducted after repairs, maintenance, cleaning work or technical adjustments, the machine could respond unpredictably. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

ü The machine is in working position.

„ Make certain there are no persons in the danger zone when the engine and mower drive start.

„ Start the trial run of the machine from the driver’s seat only.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to incorrectly performed or unfinished maintenance work

If maintenance work is not carried out by qualified personnel, the machine could be damaged.

A qualified service centre has the required technical knowledge, qualifications and tools to perform the required work on the machine in a proper manner. This applies in particular to safety-relevant work.

„ Always have the following work performed by a qualified specialist workshop:

- Safety-relevant work

- Service and maintenance work

-Repair work

- Modifications as well as installations and conversions

- Working on electronic parts

„ This chapter does not list all the necessary maintenance work of the engine. It is necessary to observe the maintenance instructions of engine manufacturer. The maintenance instructions are available at each qualified specialist workshop having access to the Workshop Information System (WIS) or after having participated in motor training at KRONE premises.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 263

16 Maintenance - General Information

16.1

Maintenance table

16.1

Maintenance table

16.1.1

Maintenance – Before the season

Hydraulic system

Check hydraulic tank oil level

Check hydraulic hoses

see Page 349

see Page 352

Gearbox oil level check

Input gearbox on front mounted mower

Main gearbox on front mounted mower

Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right

Cutterbar

Transfer gearbox

Wheel hub gearbox front/rear

see Page 362

see Page 363

see Page 364

see Page 328

see Page 360

see Page 365

Engine

If engine openings were covered, remove the covers

Change engine oil

Check coolant level

Check the coolant hoses for leaks

Clean/replace air filter

Check entire engine piping for condition, attachment, leak tightness, soiling and damage and repair if required.

Take measures to start up and start the engine following shutdown of the engine.

Mowing units

Change/replace blades

Check/replace cutting discs/mower drums

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

see Page 290 see Page 290

see Page 294

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

see Page 295

Check/replace retaining bolts

Check guard cloths

Tighten screws / nuts

Vent friction clutch

Air conditioning/heating

Change receiver-dryer unit

see Page 324

To be performed by an authorised technician only, see manual for service technicians.

Check retaining bolts and, if required, have them replaced by authorised specialists, see manual for service technicians.

see Page 332

see Page 272

see Page 333

To be performed by an authorised technician only

264

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - General Information 16

Maintenance table 16.1

Electrical system

Clean battery

see Page 354

Check the charge state of the batteries and recharge, if required.

see Page 355

Check the electrical connection cables and, if necessary, have them repaired or changed by a KRONE service partner

Wheels / tyres

Visually inspect tyres for cuts and breaks

Check tyre pressure

see Page 306 see Page 306

Fire extinguisher

Maintain fire extinguisher

see Page 308

General maintenance work

Ensure that all bolts and cotter pins are mounted

Check all screws/nuts to make certain they are tight and retighten them, if necessary

Tighten the screw connections on the central support/chassis

Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart

Check the lighting

see Page 307

see Page 341

16.1.2

Maintenance – After the season

General maintenance work

Clean the machine

Park the machine in a weatherproof and dry location which is not in close proximity to corrosive substances

Set the tyre pressure to the maximum permitted value

Protect the tyres against external influences such as oil, grease or direct sunlight

see Page 275

see Page 306

Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart. Then leave the machine running until a grease circle has formed on the outside of the bearing positions. Do not wipe off this grease as it offers additional protection against moisture.

see Page 338

Grease the threads of the setting screws

Release the springs

Lubricate the bolts on the locks on the left/ right side mounted mowers.

Grease the uncoated piston rods of all hydraulic cylinders and insert as far as possible

see Page 167 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 265

16 Maintenance - General Information

16.1

Maintenance table

General maintenance work

Lightly coat with oil all those lever joints and bearing positions which cannot be lubricated

Touch up damaged paint and preserve uncoated areas with rust protection agent

Check that all moveable components move freely. If required, dismount, clean, grease and remount.

Lubricating universal shafts

see Page 338

Take measures to shutdown the diesel engine.

see Page 295

Rear axle for front wheel drive

Check hub bearings for wear and play To be performed by an authorised technician only, see manual for service technicians.

16.1.3

Maintenance - once after 1 hour

Wheels / tyres

Retighten wheel nuts on the front/rear wheels

see Page 307

16.1.4

Maintenance – 6 times after every 10 hours

Tyres

Tighten the wheel nuts on front wheels/rear wheels

see Page 307

16.1.5

Maintenance - Once after 50 hours

Oil change in gearbox

Input gearbox on front mounted mower

Main gearbox on front mounted mower

Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right

Wheel hub gearbox front/rear

Transfer gearbox

Engine

Check that the tightening torque of the catalytic converter profile clamps is correct.

General maintenance work

Re-adjust the transport lock

see Page 362

see Page 363

see Page 364

see Page 365

see Page 360

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

see Page 308

16.1.6

Maintenance – Once after 500 hours

Engine

Check the intake and exhaust gas system for condition, attachment and leaks.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

266

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - General Information 16

Maintenance table 16.1

Electrical system

Check the batteries and cable connections.

Check the state of the sensors, actuators, cable holders and plugs.

Oil change in gearbox

Wheel hub gearbox front/rear

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

see Page 365

16.1.7

Maintenance – Once after 1,000 km

Rear axle for front wheel drive

Check hub bearings for wear and play To be performed by an authorised technician only, see manual for service technicians.

16.1.8

Maintenance – at the beginning of the cold season

Cooling system (engine)

Check corrosion and frost protection concentration in the coolant

see Page 289

16.1.9

Maintenance - Every 10 hours, but at least once a day

Engine

Clean engine compartment

Visual inspection of the entire engine piping for condition, attachment, leak tightness, soiling and damage.

Check engine oil level

Check coolant level

Check the water separator on the fuel prefilter and drain water if required.

Check urea fill level

Check fuel level

see Page 279

see Page 291

see Page 280

see Page 290

see Page 283

see Page 225 ,

see Page 286

see Page 225 ,

see Page 284

Gearbox oil level check

Input gearbox on front mounted mower

Main gearbox on front mounted mower

Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right

Cutterbar

see Page 362

see Page 363

see Page 364

see Page 328

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 267

16 Maintenance - General Information

16.1

Maintenance table

Mowing units

Change/replace blades

Check/replace cutting discs/mower drums

Check/replace retaining bolts

Check guard cloths

Tighten screws / nuts

Cabin

Clean fresh air filter

Top up windshield washer system

Check indicator lamps

Check lighting function

Check lighting function

Air conditioning/heating

Clean capacitor

Central lubrication

Check filling level of reservoir

General maintenance work

Clean the entire machine

Check the fire extinguishers

Tyres

Visually check tyres for cuts and breaks

Rear axle for front wheel drive

Check hub covers for damage and that they are secure

see Page 324

To be performed by an authorised technician only, see manual for service technicians.

Check retaining bolts and, if required, have them replaced by authorised specialists, see manual for service technicians.

see Page 332

see Page 272

see Page 301

see Page 297

see Page 170

see Page 88 see Page 88

see Page 302

see Page 346

see Page 275

see Page 308

see Page 306

see Page 304

16.1.10

Maintenance - Every 50 hours

Wheels / tyres

Retighten wheel nuts on the front/rear wheels

see Page 307

Check tyre pressure

see Page 306

Engine

Drain water and sediments in the fuel tank.

Cleaning air filter

Clean dust discharge valve of air filter

see Page 282

see Page 294

see Page 295

268

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - General Information 16

Maintenance table 16.1

16.1.11

Maintenance - every 100 hours

Cabin

Clean circulation filter

see Page 301

Air conditioning/heating

Check refrigerant condition and filling quantity

(dryer)

see Page 300

General maintenance work

Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart

see Page 338

Universal shafts

Lubricate universal shafts

see Page 338

16.1.12

Maintenance - every 250 hours

Oil change in gearbox

Input gearbox on front mounted mower

Main gearbox on front mounted mower

Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right

see Page 362

see Page 363

see Page 364

Drive belt

Check/adjust drive belt conditioner drive front mounted mower

For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood" Checking/setting drive belt auger drive

see Page 304 see Page 304

,

,

see Page 313

see Page 315

Check drive belt front mower

Check drive belt side mounted mowers right/ left

see Page 304 see Page 304

Check/adjust cooler sieve belt

see Page 304 ,

see Page 306

Check/adjust drive belt fan drive and exhaust

see Page 304 ,

see Page 305

Retighten screws

Check screws of the steering cylinder

Check screws of the axial track rods.

Air conditioning/heating

Check collector

Fire extinguisher

Maintain fire extinguisher

Universal shafts

Lubricate universal shafts

see Page 303

see Page 299

see Page 308

see Page 338

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 269

16 Maintenance - General Information

16.1

Maintenance table

16.1.13

Maintenance - Every 500 hours

Hydraulic system

Change hydraulic oil in the hydraulic oil tank

see Page 349

Change return suction filter

see Page 351

Change high-pressure filter working hydraulics

see Page 352

Engine

Check engine oil level

Check belt drive and change it if required

Check entire engine piping for condition, attachment, leak tightness, soiling and damage and repair if required.

Drain condensation water from the water separator of the fuel prefilter.

Change fuel prefilter with water separator.

Check that the tightening torque of the catalytic converter profile clamps is correct.

Check coolant level

Clean dust discharge valve of air filter

see Page 280

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

see Page 283

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

see Page 290

see Page 295

Electrical system

Check the state of the control unit bearing.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

Drive belt

Check the belt tension of all drive belts.

Cabin

Replace the fresh air filter.

Replace circulation filter.

Check the functions of the driver's seat.

see Page 304

see Page 301 see Page 301

see Page 122

,

see Page 312

General maintenance work

Check the fire extinguishers

Electrical system

Clean battery

Rear axle for front wheel drive

Check hub bearings for wear and play

see Page 308

see Page 354

To be performed by an authorised technician only, see manual for service technicians.

270

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - General Information 16

Maintenance table 16.1

16.1.14

Maintenance - every 1,000 hours but at least at the end of the season

Oil change in gearbox

Input gearbox on front mounted mower

Main gearbox on front mounted mower

Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right

Transfer gearbox

Cutterbar

Wheel hub gearbox front/rear

see Page 362

see Page 363

see Page 364

see Page 360

see Page 328

see Page 365

Changing the filter transfer gearbox

Intermediate gear

Lubricate the intermediate gear

see Page 361

see Page 340

Engine

Check all lines, hoses and electric cables for chafe marks

Check belt drive and change it if required

Check that engine mount and diesel engine brackets are tight.

Check entire engine piping for condition, attachment, leak tightness, soiling and damage and repair if required.

Replace the fuel fine filter.

Replace the fuel prefilter.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

see Page 294

Cleaning air filter

Electrical system

Check the batteries and cable connections.

Check the state of the sensors, actuators, cable holders and plugs.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

16.1.15

Maintenance – Every 1,000 hours, but at least before the season

Engine

Change engine oil

Change the engine oil filter

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 271

16 Maintenance - General Information

16.2

Tightening torques

16.1.16

Maintenance – Every 2,000 hours

Engine

Replace the oil separator filter element

Check/adjust valve play

Check corrosion and frost protection concentration in the coolant.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

16.1.17

Maintenance – Every 2 years

Engine

Change coolant To be performed by an authorised technician only, see manual for service technicians.

16.1.18

Maintenance - as required

Electrical system

Clean battery

see Page 354

Engine

Change air filter main element (according to maintenance display / annually).

Change air filter safety element (with every

3rd change of the main element / annually).

Vent the fuel system (do not detach the injection lines)

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

16.2

Tightening torques

Deviating tightening torques

All screw connections must in general be tightened with the listed tightening torques following.

Deviations from the tables are marked accordingly.

Metric thread screws with control thread

INFO

The table does not apply to countersunk screws with hexagon socket in case the countersunk screw is tightened via hexagon socket.

272

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - General Information 16

Tightening torques 16.2

M16

M20

M22

M24

M27

M30

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

M14

DV000-001

X Thread size

X Strength class

5.6

8.8

Tightening torque (Nm)

3.0

5.9

10

29

42

25

49

85

135

210

425

571

730

1,100

1,450

1 Strength class on screw head

10.9

310

610

832

1,050

1,550

2,100

4.4

8.7

15

36

72

125

200

12.9

365

710

972

1,220

1,800

2,450

5.1

10

18

43

84

145

235

Metric thread screws with fine thread

DV000-001

X Thread size

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

1 Strength class on screw head

273

16 Maintenance - General Information

16.2

Tightening torques

X

M12 x 1.5

M14 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

M18 x 1.5

M20 x 1.5

M24 x 2

M27 x 2

M30 x 1.5

Strength class

5.6

8.8

Tightening torque (Nm)

88

145

222

368

465

787

1,148

800

10.9

130

213

327

525

662

1,121

1,635

2,100

Metric thread screws with countersunk head and hexagon socket

INFO

The table applies only to countersunk screws with hexagon socket and metric thread tightened via hexagon socket.

12.9

152

249

382

614

775

1,312

1,914

2,650

274

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

M14

M16

M20

DV000-000

X Thread size

X Strength class

5.6

8.8

Tightening torque (Nm)

2.5

4.7

8

23

34

20

39

68

108

168

340

1 Strength class on screw head

10.9

3.5

7

12

29

58

100

160

248

488

12.9

4.1

8

15

35

67

116

188

292

568

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

16.3

Maintenance - General Information 16

Cleaning the machine 16.3

Locking screws on the gearboxes

INFO

The tightening torques only apply to assembly of locking screws, viewing glasses, ventilation and breather filters and bleed valves in gearboxes with cast housings or aluminium or steel housings. The term “locking screw” includes the drain plug, the inspection screw as well as the ventilation and breather filters.

This table applies only to locking screws with external hexagon in connection with copper seal ring and for bleed valves made of brass with shaped seal ring.

Thread

M10x1

M12x1.5

G1/4“

M14x1.5

M16x1.5

45

M18x1.5

50

M20x1.5

Locking screw and sight glass with copper ring 1

Bleed valve made of brass

Ventilation/breather filter made of steel

Steel and cast Aluminium

Ventilation/breather filter made of brass

Steel and cast

Maximum tightening torque (Nm) (±10%)

Aluminium

8

14

14

40

45

16

24

30

32

24

30

G1/2“

M22x1.5

M24x1.5

G3/4“

M33x2

G1“

M42x1.5

G1 1/4“

32

35

60

60

80

80

100

100

1  Always replace copper rings.

Cleaning the machine

WARNING

Eye damage caused by flying dirt particles!

When cleaning the machine with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, the dirt particles are slung away at high speed. The dirt particles may hit the eyes and hurt them.

„ Keep persons away from working range.

„ When performing cleaning work with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, wear suitable working clothes (for example eye protection).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 275

16 Maintenance - General Information

16.3

Cleaning the machine

NOTICE

Machine damaged by water from a high-pressure cleaner

Bearings and electric or electronic components can be damaged if you aim the water jet of a high-pressure cleaner directly at them during cleaning.

„ Never direct the water jet of a high-pressure cleaner at bearings, electric/electronic components or safety labels.

„ Replace missing, damaged and unrecognisable safety labels.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ After each use, remove husk and dust from the machine.

Under very dry working conditions, repeat the cleaning several times a day.

„ For cleaning the engine compartment,

see Page 279

.

„ For cleaning the batteries,

see Page 354

.

„ For cleaning the cooler and the cooler compartment;

see Page 302

.

Cleaning the belt drive of the auger conveyor

For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

Depending on the operating conditions, the belt drives of the augers must be cleaned at regular intervals to remove dirt and crop deposits.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Remove the guard of the auger drive,

see Page 311

.

„ Remove dirt and crop deposits.

„

Mount the guard of the auger conveyor drive, see Page 311

.

Cleaning the auger conveyor

For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

1

1

276

2

BMG000-070

Contamination on the auger conveyor (1) can impair swathing, and must be removed. Use the following procedure to clean the auger conveyor (1):

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Wear suitable protective gloves,

see Page 22 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - General Information 16

Cleaning the machine 16.3

WARNING! Risk of injury due to manual rotation of the auger conveyor. Even a slow manual rotation of the auger conveyor can shear off limbs! Never rotate the auger conveyor manually! Move the auger conveyor only with a slow manual rotation of the mower drum. Ensure that limbs are away from the danger point as long as the auger conveyor is rotating.

„ Manually rotate the mower drum (2) slowly to advance the auger conveyor (1).

„ Clean the auger conveyor (1).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 277

17 Maintenance - Engine

17 Maintenance - Engine

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

WARNING

Danger to health from dust from the damaged catalytic converter of the exhaust aftertreatment system

If the catalytic converter of the exhaust aftertreatment system is damaged, there is a risk to health from inhaling the emerging dust or insulation material.

„ If the catalytic converter of the exhaust aftertreatment system is damaged, ensure that nobody inhales dusts from inside the catalytic converter or insulation.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to incorrectly performed or unfinished maintenance work

If maintenance work is not carried out by qualified personnel, the machine could be damaged.

A qualified service centre has the required technical knowledge, qualifications and tools to perform the required work on the machine in a proper manner. This applies in particular to safety-relevant work.

„ Always have the following work performed by a qualified specialist workshop:

- Safety-relevant work

- Service and maintenance work

-Repair work

- Modifications as well as installations and conversions

- Working on electronic parts

„ This chapter does not list all the necessary maintenance work of the engine. It is necessary to observe the maintenance instructions of engine manufacturer. The maintenance instructions are available at each qualified specialist workshop having access to the Workshop Information System (WIS) or after having participated in motor training at KRONE premises.

278

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

17.1

17.2

Maintenance - Engine 17

Engine overview 17.1

Engine overview

1

2 3

4

5

8

6

7

9

BMG000-050

1 Oil filter

2 Exhaust gas turbocharger

3 Oil sump

4 Catalytic converter

5 Engine control

6

7

8

9

Refrigerant compressor

Alternator

Oil filler neck

Oil dipstick

Dirt deposits in engine compartment

WARNING

Risk of fire due to dirt deposits in the engine compartment

A mixture of dust, oil and plant residue inside the engine compartment is a source of fire and presents an increased fire hazard.

„ Always keep the engine compartment clean.

17.2.1

Cleaning engine compartment with compressed air

WARNING

Eye damage caused by flying dirt particles!

When cleaning the machine with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, the dirt particles are slung away at high speed. The dirt particles may hit the eyes and hurt them.

„ Keep persons away from working range.

„ When performing cleaning work with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, wear suitable working clothes (for example eye protection).

„ If necessary, blow away the dirt and contamination and wipe off oil deposits.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 279

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.3

Engine oil level

17.3

Engine oil level

NOTICE

Engine damage due to excessively low or high oil level

If the oil level is too low, the amount of oil in the engine is too low, the lubrication points in the engine are not adequately supplied and there is a risk of engine damage. If the oil level is too high, the engine or the exhaust gas aftertreatment system may be damaged.

„ Check oil level according to the engine maintenance table,

see Page 264

.

„ Check oil level only when machine is in a horizontal position.

„ Do not start the engine if the oil level is below the bottom mark (min. mark) of the oil dipstick.

„ Drain or extract oil which has been topped up too much.

17.3.1

Checking engine oil level

Checking engine oil level with oil dipstick

1

280 max.

min.

BXG000-029

The oil dipstick is on the left-hand side of the machine.

ü The left side mounted mower is folded out.,

see Page 97

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The main frame of the machine is aligned horizontally.

ü The diesel engine is at a standstill for at least 8 hours.

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Thoroughly clean the area around the oil dipstick (1).

„ Pull out the oil dipstick (1), wipe it off with a clean cloth and reinsert it up to the stop.

„ Pull out the oil dipstick (1) and identify the engine oil level.

ð When the engine oil level is between "min" and "max", the oil level is correct.

„ Reinsert the oil dipstick (1).

ð If the engine oil level is above the "max" marking:

„ Contact your KRONE service partner.

ð If the engine oil level is below the "min" marking:

„

Top up the engine oil, see Page 281 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - Engine 17

Engine oil level 17.3

Checking engine oil level on the terminal

The engine oil level can also be checked on the terminal as an alternative to using the dipstick.

17.3.2

BM000-505

ü The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The ignition key is in position "II".

ü The diesel engine is at a standstill for at least 8 hours.

„ Open the menu Machine "Engine oil level tanks".

„ Read off the engine oil level using the bars.

ð If a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 9 green bars are visible, the engine oil level is correct.

ð If only green bars are visible:

„

Using the oil dipstick, ensure that the engine oil level is not above the "max" mark, see

Page 280 . Otherwise consult your KRONE service partner.

ð If only grey bars are visible:

„

Top up the engine oil, see Page 281 .

Topping up engine oil

1

BMG000-052

The oil filling pipe is on the left-hand side of the machine.

ü The left side mounted mower is folded out.,

see Page 97

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The main frame of the machine is aligned horizontally.

ü The diesel engine has cooled off to the ambient temperature.

max.

min.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 281

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.4

Cleaning fuel tank

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Clean the area around the cover (1).

„ Unscrew the cover (1).

„ NOTE! Use only engine oils that have been approved by the engine manufacturer,

see

Page 75 .

„ Fill in engine oil through the oil filler neck up to the "max." mark on the oil dipstick.

„ Clean, put on and tighten the cover (1).

„ Start the diesel engine, run it at idle speed and check the oil pressure.

„ Switch off the diesel engine.

„

Check the engine oil level after approx. 2-3 minutes, see Page 280 .

17.4

Cleaning fuel tank

Draining water and sediments

282

BMG000-027

ü If possible, empty the fuel tank as far as possible when driving.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 31

.

„ Provide a sufficiently dimensioned container for the fuel.

The drain nozzle sits at the front right below the machine in the direction of travel.

„ Unscrew the cap on the drain nozzle (1).

„ Take the hose provided out of the rear storage compartment and screw it on the drain nozzle (1).

ð Accumulated water, sediment and fuel flow out of the fuel tank.

„ Remove the hose and close the drain nozzle (1) with the cap.

„

Refuel the machine, see Page 284

.

„

If necessary, bleed the fuel system, see Page 288 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - Engine 17

Fuel prefilter/water separator 17.5

17.5

Fuel prefilter/water separator

1

4

2

3

BXG000-030

The fuel prefilter is located on the left side of the machine behind the maintenance flap.

Drain condensation water from the water separator of the fuel prefilter

ü The left side mounted mower is folded out.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The maintenance flap is open.

ü A sufficiently large collecting vessel is on hand.

„ Check whether condensation water has collected in the sight glass of the water separator (2).

ð No condensation water has collected:

„ No further measures are necessary.

ð Condensation water has collected:

„ Place the collecting vessel under the drain hose of the water separator (2).

„ Loosen the bleed screw (1) two counterclockwise turns.

„ To open the stop cock (4), press the handle (3) while simultaneously turning it 90° counterclockwise.

Æ The collected condensation water runs out of the water separator.

„ To close the stop cock (4), turn the handle (3) 90° clockwise. The handle (3) engages independently.

„ Tighten the bleed screw (1) to a tightening torque of 6 Nm.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 283

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.6

Refuelling

17.6

Refuelling

NOTICE

Machine damage due to use of unauthorised or contaminated fuel.

If refuelling with unauthorised or contaminated fuel or with fuel which has a high sulphur content, the engine and the exhaust gas after-treatment system will be damaged.

„ Refuel only with standard, sulphur-free diesel fuel, according to EN 590.

„ Do not refuel with contaminated fuel.

„ Observe the operating instructions of engine manufacturer, chapter “Refuelling”.

„ Do not use the following fuels:

- Fuels containing more than 0.005% (50ppm) sulphur

- Marine diesel fuel

- Aviation turbine fuel

- Heating oil

- Fatty acid methyl ester FAME (bio-diesel fuels)

NOTICE

Machine damage by water in the fuel

If the machine is parked with tank unfilled, condensation water may form and when it is cold, freezing could result.

„ Refuel daily at the end of operation.

1 2

3

1

4

BMG000-009

284

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

17.7

Maintenance - Engine 17

Urea filter 17.7

Filling quantity: see Page 75 .

„ Follow the instructions in the following enclosed document: Engine operating instructions, chapter Lubricants and consumables.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ If necessary, use the platform (4) on the front mounted mower to reach the filler neck (3).

„ Open the flap (1).

„ Clean the area around the filler neck (3).

„ Unscrew the tank cap (2).

„ Fill the fuel tank with fuel.

„ Close the tank cap (2) tightly.

„ Close the flap (1).

Urea filter

CAUTION

Risk of injury from escaping ammonia vapours!

If the urea tank cap is opened at high temperatures, ammonia vapours may escape. Ammonia vapours have a pungent smell and irritate in particular:

- Skin

- Mucous membranes

- Eyes.

This can lead to burning of the eyes, nose and throat as well as irritation of the throat and tearing eyes.

„ Do not inhale ammonia vapours.

CAUTION

Risk of injury from contact with urea solution

The urea solution must not come in contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

„ If urea solution comes into contact with the eyes or skin, immediately rinse off with plenty of clear water.

„ If urea solution is swallowed, rinse out the mouth immediately with plenty of clear water and drink a lot of water.

„ If urea solution soils clothing, immediately change clothing.

„ If allergic reactions occur, consult a doctor immediately.

„ Keep children away from the urea solution.

The exhaust aftertreatment system is equipped with a maintenance-free filter.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 285

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.8

Topping up urea solution

17.8

BM000-201

The urea filter (1) is integrated in a fixed position in the extraction module (2).

Topping up urea solution

CAUTION

Risk of injury from contact with urea solution

The urea solution must not come in contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

„ If urea solution comes into contact with the eyes or skin, immediately rinse off with plenty of clear water.

„ If urea solution is swallowed, rinse out the mouth immediately with plenty of clear water and drink a lot of water.

„ If urea solution soils clothing, immediately change clothing.

„ If allergic reactions occur, consult a doctor immediately.

„ Keep children away from the urea solution.

CAUTION

Risk of injury from escaping ammonia vapours!

If the urea tank cap is opened at high temperatures, ammonia vapours may escape. Ammonia vapours have a pungent smell and irritate in particular:

- Skin

- Mucous membranes

- Eyes.

This can lead to burning of the eyes, nose and throat as well as irritation of the throat and tearing eyes.

„ Do not inhale ammonia vapours.

286

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - Engine 17

Topping up urea solution 17.8

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to incorrect handling of the urea solution

The machine or the exhaust aftertreatment system may be damaged due to incorrect handling of the urea solution.

„ Use only urea solution according to DIN 70070 / ISO 22241.

„ To prevent damage to the urea tank at very low temperatures, do not overfill the urea tank.

„ To avoid damage to the exhaust aftertreatment system due to contamination, use only clean auxiliaries for filling and close the tank tightly.

„ To avoid damage to the exhaust aftertreatment system, do not mix the urea solution with additives or dilute with tap water.

NOTICE

Damage to the urea sensor caused by ammonia fumes

If the urea tank is not mostly filled and if urea is stored at too high a temperature, ammonia fumes are produced which can damage the urea sensor.

„ Fill the urea tank completely with urea after each utilization of the machine.

„ Observe the instructions of the urea manufacturer to store urea. These specifications also apply to the urea in the urea tank.

1

2

3

1

4

BMG000-008

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 287

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.9

Vent fuel filter

Filling quantity: see Page 75

„ Follow the instructions in the following enclosed document: Engine operating instructions, chapter Lubricants and consumables.

„ If necessary, use the platform (4) on the front mounted mower to reach the filler neck (3).

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Open the flap (1).

„ Clean the area around the filler neck (3).

„ Unscrew the tank cap (2).

„ Fill the urea tank with urea solution until the pump nozzle is switched off.

„ Close the tank cap (2) tightly.

„ Close the flap (1).

17.9

Vent fuel filter

288

BXG000-031

It may be necessary to vent the fuel filter

• after the filter element on the fuel prefilter was changed

• after prolonged machine standstill

• after filling the previously drained fuel system

• after initial operation

The vent the fuel filter:

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Follow the instructions in the following, supplied document: Engine operating instructions, section "Venting the fuel system".

„ Turn the red locking (2) of the pump 90° counterclockwise.

„ Activate the pump by making pumping movements with the knob (1) until the fuel system is completely vented.

„ To end the venting process and start the diesel engine, turn the lock (2) of the pump 90° clockwise.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - Engine 17

Engine coolant 17.10

INFO

The low-pressure circuit of the diesel engine is vented by permanently installed throttle bores, no additional measures are necessary.

„ Start the diesel engine.

ð If the engine fails to start after 20 seconds.

„ Take a 1-minute break.

ð If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts:

„ Repeat the venting procedure.

17.10

Engine coolant

NOTICE

Damage to the cooling system by using incorrect coolant

If a mixture of coolant containing silicate and a silicate-free coolant is used, this may cause damage to the cooling system of the diesel engine.

„ Never use a mixture of coolant containing silicate and a silicate-free coolant as an engine coolant.

The engine cooling system has been filled with coolant at the factory that ensures frost protection, corrosion protection and further protective effects.

The engine coolant is a mixture of water, anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent.

The engine coolant has the following properties:

• Heat transfer

• Corrosion protection

• Cavitation protection (protection against pitting)

• Frost protection

• Increasing the boiling point

Irrespective of the time of year, the engine coolant must remain in the engine cooling system, even in countries with high outdoor temperatures.

When you change the engine coolant, ensure that

• only clean auxiliaries are used for filling.

• the coolant meets at least the following specification: LH-01-COL3A.

The engine manufacturer recommends the use of Liebherr-Antifreeze OS Concentrate

(concentrate) or Liebherr-Antifreeze OS Mix (ready-made mixture consisting of 50 % water and 50 % anticorrosion agent).

• the water used complies with the 2006 World Health Organization (WHO) Drinking Water

Guideline.

• the engine coolant contains 50% by volume anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent.

This corresponds to a frost protection down to -37° C.

• the percentage of anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent in the engine coolant does not exceed 55% by volume. This corresponds to a frost protection down to -45° C. Higher values would deteriorate frost protection and heat transfer.

• the engine coolant is not mixed with a different anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent.

• a low coolant level is not topped up only with water, but also with the correct percentage of an approved anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 289

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.11 Checking the engine coolant level

17.11

Checking the engine coolant level

WARNING

Risk of fire from frost protection agent

If frost protection agent comes into contact with hot components in the warm engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injuries.

„ Leave the engine to cool down before filling with anti-freeze.

„ Keep anti-freeze away from the filler neck.

„ Before starting the engine, thoroughly clean components contaminated with frost protection agent.

WARNING

Danger of injury due to scalding

The engine cooling system is under pressure, especially when the engine is warm. If the cover is opened when the engine is warm, hot coolant may spray out. There is risk of injury.

„ Leave the engine to cool down before opening the cover.

„ When opening the cover, wear suitable gloves and goggles.

„ To relieve the pressure, open the cover by a half turn.

290

BXG000-032

The coolant compensation tank (1) for the engine coolant is located above the cooling system in the rear of the machine and is accessible from outside.

„ Check the coolant level in the coolant compensation tank (1) at the sight glass (2).

ð The coolant level must be in the middle of the sight glass (2); top up coolant if necessary.

Top up the engine coolant

Filling quantity: see Page 75

Follow the instructions in the following supplied document: operating instructions Engine, chapter Consumables "Coolant".

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - Engine 17

Checking engine piping 17.12

„Shut down and safeguard the machine,

see Page 31 .

„ Rotate the cover (3) on the filler neck of the coolant compensation tank (1) to the first notch, and allow the residual pressure to decay slowly.

„ Open the cover (3) completely and remove it.

„ Fill coolant up to the middle of the sight glass (2).

„ Put on and close the cover (3) at the filler neck of the coolant compensation tank.

17.12

Checking engine piping

17.12.1

Checking pipework in the air conditioning and heating system

BM000-168

„ Check all lines, hoses and collars for leaks and condition and, if required, have them replaced by authorised technicians.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 291

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.12 Checking engine piping

17.12.2

Check pipework of the engine cooling system and the charge air

BMG000-048

„ Check all lines, hoses and collars for leaks and condition and, if required, have them replaced by authorised technicians.

17.12.3

Checking pipework of the air intake

292

BM000-164

„ Check all lines, hoses and collars for leaks and condition and, if required, have them replaced by authorised technicians.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

17.12.4

Checking fuel lines

Maintenance - Engine 17

Checking engine piping 17.12

BM000-165

„ Check all lines, hoses and collars for leaks and condition and, if required, have them replaced by authorised technicians.

17.12.5

Check pipework of the exhaust aftertreatment system

BM000-167

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 293

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.13 Cleaning air filter

BM000-166

„ Check all lines, hoses and collars for leaks and condition and, if required, have them replaced by authorised technicians.

17.13

Cleaning air filter

NOTICE

Engine damage caused by dirty or damaged air filter or safety cartridge

If the machine is operated with a soiled or damaged air filter or safety cartridge, the diesel engine may be damaged.

„ Clean or replace the air filter and the safety cartridge according to the maintenance table,

see Page 264

.

„ Immediately replace a damaged air filter or a damaged safety cartridge.

„ Do not clean and reuse the safety cartridge but always replace it by a new one.

1

2 3

4

5

BMG000-010

294

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - Engine 17

Shutting down the diesel engine 17.14

Interval for testing and changing:

see Page 264

.

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31 .

„ Release the clamps (2) and remove the cover (1).

„ By gently turning the filter element (3), carefully pull it out of the filter housing (4).

„ Clean the interior area and the sealing surfaces of the filter housing (4).

„ Blow out the filter element (3) with compressed air (max. 5 bar) from the inside to the outside.

If the filter element is excessively soiled or damaged, replace the filter element. If the installation date of the filter element is 4 years old, replace the filter element.

„ Install the cleaned or a new filter element (3).

„ Attach the lid (1) so that the dust discharge valve (5) is pointed downwards.

„ Secure the cover (1) with the clamps (2).

Cleaning dust discharge valve

BM000-170

ü The left side mounted mower is folded down.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 31

.

ü The left side hood is open.

„ Remove the rubber grommet of the dust discharge valve (1) and clean it.

„ Clean the connector for the rubber grommet.

„ Slide on the rubber grommet completely.

17.14

Shutting down the diesel engine

Measures for storing the diesel engine when not in use for a period from 30 days to 12 months

„ Fill the fuel tank, and coolant tank up to the maximum permitted filling level. Choose the specification of consumables according to the expected outside temperatures while the machine is in storage.

„ Drain the fuel tank and prefilter.

„ The coolant must contain at least 50% anti-corrosion antifreeze.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 295

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.14 Shutting down the diesel engine

„ Lower the urea tank to the minimum permitted filling level.

„ Clean the outside of the engine.

„ Spray or apply the anti-corrosion agent Rustilo DWX 30 onto unpainted parts and rusty areas on the engine (excluding electrical connections).

Measures for placing the diesel engine in service again after storing when not in use for a period from 30 days to 12 months

„ Before starting up the machine, perform the maintenance interval "Every 10 hours, at least daily".

„ Change the engine oil if it is more than 2 years old.

„ Change the oil filter.

„ Examine the engine for leaks, soiling and damage.

„ Check the coolant level.

„ Drain off the water and any sediments which have accumulated from the fuel tank and check the water separator on the fuel prefilter, drain off water if necessary.

„ Perform a visual inspection to check the starter, alternator and refrigerating compressor.

„ Check the ribbed V-belts on the diesel engine and replace if necessary.

„ Check the diesel engine power supply.

„ Make certain the fuel supply is connected.

„ Fill the urea tank up to the maximum filling quantity.

Restarting the diesel engine after storing it when not in use from 30 days to

12 months

„

Check the oil pressure display immediately after starting, see Page 170 .

„ Check the air filter pressure display.

„ Let the diesel engine run until it reaches operating temperature.

If you want to shut down the diesel engine for a longer period of time, you have to perform certain activities to maintain the engine in the best condition possible.

„ The activities required for shutting down the diesel engine for a period between 3 months and 1 year are specified in the special instructions "SEHS9031, Storage Procedure for

Caterpillar Products" from Caterpillar.

„ The activities required for shutting down the diesel engine for a period between 1 year and up to 2 years are specified in the special instructions "REHS5001, The Long Term Storage and Recovery of Certain Commercial Engines" from Caterpillar.

296

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

18

18.1

Maintenance – Basic Machine 18

Checking/refilling windscreen washer system 18.1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

Checking/refilling windscreen washer system

BMG000-012

The reservoir (2) for the windscreen washer system is behind the fresh water tank (1) in the storage compartment above the right front wheel. The orifice for refilling is on the rear wall of the storage compartment and is closed by a cover sheet (4).

„ Check the level of the windscreen washer system daily.

If the cleaning fluid can be seen in the reservoir, the fluid level is correct.

If no cleaning fluid can be seen in the reservoir, refill:

„ To refill the cleaning fluid, swivel the cover sheet (4) to the side.

„ Open the cover (3) and add cleaning fluid.

„ Close the cover (3).

„ Swivel back the cover sheet (4) and close the orifice.

INFO

„ To achieve a better cleaning effect under extreme crop and road conditions, add windscreen cleaner/anti-freeze.

„ In winter drain the washer system or fill with special anti-freeze.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 297

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.2

Maintaining air conditioning and heating

18.2

Maintaining air conditioning and heating

WARNING

Risk of injury from getting in contact with refrigerant

During repair, service, maintenance and cleaning work on the refrigerant circuit, there can be liquid or gaseous refrigerant emissions that are hazardous to persons and environment.

„ Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Secure the machine against rolling away.

„ Take suitable protective measures (e.g. wear protective goggles and protective gloves).

„ Only authorised specialists are allowed to perform repair, service, maintenance and cleaning work.

„ Always see a doctor if you suffer burns from refrigerant.

„ Ensure sufficient ventilation when working on the cooling system.

„ During refill and repair work, do not allow refrigerants to escape; dispose of them into a recycling container.

„ The spare parts used for the machine must satisfy the technical requirements of the machine manufacturer. For this reason, use only KRONE original spare parts.

„ Be extremely careful when you perform welding work in the vicinity of the air conditioning system.

NOTICE

Environmental damage due to chemicals

The air conditioning is operated with refrigerant R134a (tetrafluorethane). This substance contains no chlorine atoms, and thus is not harmful to the ozone in the atmosphere of the world. Nonetheless, the refrigerant must not be drained; it must be collected at a recycling plant.

„ Collect the refrigerant with a recycling plant.

„ Thus do NOT separate the connecting pipes beforehand.

„ Have all maintenance and repair work on the air conditioning carried out only by your

KRONE dealer with a suitable disposal and recycling equipment.

18.2.1

Components of air conditioning

The air conditioning components and their position in the machine.

298

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance – Basic Machine 18

Maintaining air conditioning and heating 18.2

BM000-271

1 Control panel for automatic climate control

2 Evaporator

3 Expansion valve

4 Capacitor

5 Dryer/receiver

6 Pressure switch

7 Compressor

18.2.2

Carrying out a visual inspection at the receiver/dryer

BMG000-018

The receiver (2) with pressure switch (1) is located on the left behind the tailgate.

As the receiver (2) is pressurised, it is subject to the pressurised container regulations during production and testing. According to this regulation the pressurised tank is classified as test group II in accordance with the permissible overpressure p in bar, the volume l in litres and the pressure product p x l.

According to Section 10 of the Pressurised Vessel Regulations these pressurised containers must be subjected to recurring tests by an expert in accordance with section 32. In this case the recurring tests consist, as a rule, of external inspections of tanks in use. In combination with the inspection the receiver (2) must be visually inspected twice a year. Special attention shall be given to corrosion and mechanical damage. If the container is not in a correct state, it must be

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 299

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.2

Maintaining air conditioning and heating replaced by a qualified service centre for safety reasons to ensure sufficient protection to the user and third parties due to the hazard which may be caused in handling or operating pressurised containers.

INFO

The ambient temperature must exceed the temperature set at the thermostat (generally

+1°Celsius) for the compressor to switch on.

18.2.3

Checking the condition and filling quantity of refrigerant

Regularly check the dryer/receiver unit and replace it when required, but at least once a year.

BX001-239

Check the filling quantity

Interval for checking refrigerant level: see Page 264

The amount of refrigerant is checked on the sight glass (2) via the white float (5).

„ Start the engine.

„ Switch on the air conditioning and set to maximum cooling.

If the white float (5) is at the top, the refrigerant level is correct.

If the white float (5) is at the bottom, the refrigerant must be topped up by a qualified service

centre, filling quantity see Page 77

.

Checking the refrigerant condition

Checking the interval for refrigerant condition:

see Page 264

.

„ Observe the label (4) on the dryer (1).

If the indicator perl (3) is orange, the refrigerant condition is OK.

If the indicator perl (3) has turned colourless, the dryer/receiver unit must be changed by a specialist workshop.

300

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

18.2.4

Replacing/cleaning fresh air filter

Maintenance – Basic Machine 18

Maintaining air conditioning and heating 18.2

18.2.5

BX001-240

INFO

If filters are not properly maintained, the fresh air filter may become very soiled and it can no longer be guaranteed that adequate fresh air will flow into the cab.

A fresh air filter (4) in the form of a wedge filter is located in the upper cab area behind the ventilation grid (2) on the left hand side in direction of travel. The fresh air filter protects the driver in the cab against airborne contamination outside the cab. Always check the fresh air filter before starting to drive the machine.

„ Open the closing device (1) by turning it 90° clockwise and remove the ventilation grid (2).

„ To unlock the filter, reverse the locking lever (3) to the left.

„ Pull out the fresh air filter (4), check for soiling and clean if required.

Clean fresh air filter (4) by shaking it out, never use compressed air to clean it. If heavily soiled, replace the fresh air filter (4).

„ Reinsert the fresh air filter (4).

„ Lock fresh air filter by means of locking lever (3).

„ Insert the ventilation grid (3) and close it via the closing device (1).

Replacing/cleaning circulation filter

BMG000-019

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 301

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.3

Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment

INFO

If the filters are not adequately maintained, the circulation filter may become heavily soiled and cause a reduction in the output of the air conditioning and the heating.

„ To clean the circulation filter, loosen the screws (2) and remove the ventilation grid (1) together with the filter element.

„ Clean filter element with compressed air and replace it, if necessary.

„ Mount the ventilation grid (1) together with the filter element, ensuring that the filter element is correctly inserted.

„ Press in the screws (2).

18.3

Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment

1

2

BM000-115

The rotating screen, the condenser block, the combination cooler (charge air, coolant and oil) and the diesel cooler sit behind the tailgate in the cooler compartment.

„ Open the tailgate (1).

„ Swing down the ladder (2) at the rear.

„ To prevent fire, clean the area around the cooler daily. Wipe off oil residues if necessary.

„ Clean these areas more frequently in a very dusty environment and with very dry crops.

2

3

4

1

302

BXG000-033

Preferably clean the cooler and the capacitor while the engine is cold.

ü The tailgate is open.

„ Open the seal (1) on the rotating screen frame (4) and swing up the rotating screen.

„ Loosen the locking on the capacitor (3) and rotate the capacitor to the side.

„ Clean the cooler (2) and the cooler compartment with compressed air. Ensure that the blades are not damaged.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

18.4

18.4.1

Maintenance – Basic Machine 18

Maintaining chassis 18.4

„ Blow through the condenser block with compressed air from the inside to the outside without damaging the fins.

„ Swivel back the capacitor and secure it.

„ Close the rotating screen frame (4).

„ Close the tailgate.

„ Swing up the ladder at the rear.

Maintaining chassis

Checking attachment of steering cylinder

18.4.2

BMG000-021

Check the screws of the steering cylinder with the following tightening torque:

„ Check the screws (1) of the steering cylinder with a tightening torque of 730 Nm.

Checking fitting of track rod

BMG000-020

Check the screws of the track rod on both sides of the machine with the following tightening torques:

„ Check the screw (1) on the axial ball joint with a tightening torque of 550 Nm.

„ Check the clamping screw (2) of the track rod with a tightening torque of 60 ... 70 Nm.

„ Check the castle nut (3) of the track rod end with a tightening torque of 450 +50 Nm. Check the seat of the cotter pin.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 303

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.5

Maintaining belt drives

18.4.3

Checking the hub cover of the rear axle, with front wheel drive version

18.5

BM000-270

Check the hub covers (1) for damage and tight fit:

„ Replace lost or worn hub covers (1) immediately to prevent dirt entering the interior of the hub and damaging the bearing.

If a hub cover is missing or if a hub cover is dismounted, the seal must be replaced before a new installation.

Check the screws of the hub covers:

„

Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 31 .

„ Make sure the hub covers have been mounted correctly and are in a perfect state.

„ Check the screws of the hub cover for tight fit.

Maintaining belt drives

18.5.1

Checking kraftband

INFO

If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the kraftband and pulley is not guaranteed.

„ Visually check each kraftband of the belt drives inside and outside for wear and damage

(e.g. cracks, rocks) and replace, if necessary.

„ Check each kraftband for soiling (oil, grease) and clean or replace it, if necessary.

18.5.2

Checking pulley

304

BX001-249

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

18.5.3

Maintenance – Basic Machine 18

Maintaining belt drives 18.5

INFO

If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the kraftband and pulley is not guaranteed.

„ Check the edges of the pulley (1) for wear and, if required, have them replaced by your

KRONE service partner.

„ Check the pulley (1) for damage and replace if required.

„ Check the pulley (1) for soiling (oil, grease) and clean if required.

Checking the belt tension

Checking/setting belt tension of fan drive and exhaust fan

6

1 2 3

4

5

BM000-138

„ Swing up the left side hood.

„ Check whether the pretension angle is 20°.

ð If the arrow (6) points to 20° on the pretensioning scale (1) the belt tension is set correctly.

ð If the arrow (6) does not point to 20° on the pretensioning scale (1) the belt tension must be set.

„ To set the belt tension, undo the retaining screw (3) on the tensioner housing (2) and undo the nuts (4) on the quick clamp device (5).

„ To rotate the tensioner housing (2) turn the quick clamp device (5) until the arrow (6) displays a pretension angle of 20° on the twist scale (1).

„ Tighten the retaining screw (3) and the nuts (4).

„ Close the left side hood.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 305

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.6

Maintaining tyres and wheels

Checking/setting belt tension of rotating screen drive

1

2

3

4

BM000-140

„ Swivel open the tailgate.

„ Check whether the pretension angle is 20°.

ð If the arrow points to (2) 20° on the twist scale (1), the belt tension is set correctly.

ð If the arrow (2) does not point to 20° on the twist scale (1), the belt tension must be set.

„ Undo the screw slightly (4) to set the belt tension.

„ Use a key (WAF 55) to turn the tensioner housing (3) anti-clockwise until the arrow (2) displays a pretension angle of 20° on the scale of the twist angle (1).

„ Tighten the screw (4).

„ Close the tailgate.

Maintaining tyres and wheels 18.6

18.6.1

Checking/maintaining tyres

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

Inspect the tyres visually

„ Visually inspect tyres for cuts or breaks.

Æ If there are cuts or breaks in the tyres, have the tyres repaired or replaced by a KRONE service partner.

Maintenance intervals for visual inspection of the tyres,

see Page 264

.

Checking/adapting the tyre pressure

„

Check the tyre pressure, see Page 78 .

Æ If the tyre pressure is too high, deflate air.

Æ If the tyre pressure is too low, increase the tyre pressure.

Check the maintenance intervals for tyre pressure, see Page 264 .

306

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

18.6.2

Retighten wheel nuts

Maintenance – Basic Machine 18

Tighten the screw connections on the central support/chassis 18.7

18.7

BM000-125

Front axle Rear axle

„ Retighten the nuts for attaching the wheels in the illustrated sequence.

„ Retighten the nuts on the front and rear axle to 630 Nm.

Intervals at which the nuts on the wheels must be tightened,

see Page 264 .

Tighten the screw connections on the central support/chassis

1

2

2

1

BM000-336

„ Carry out the steps on the right-hand and left-hand side of the machine:

„ Tighten the screw connections (M 20 x 1.5) (2).

„ Tighten the screw connections (M16) (1).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 307

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.8

Re-adjust the transport lock

18.8

Re-adjust the transport lock

1

18.9

2 3

1

BM000-349

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„

For the maintenance interval, see Page 264 .

„ The following steps have to be carried out on the left- and right-hand side of the machine:

„ Loosen the 6 screws at the transport lock (1).

„ Hand-tighten the screws (2, 3).

„ Centrally align the transport lock (1).

„ Fold up the side mounted mowers in transport position,

see Page 97

.

„ Fold in the side mounted mower in working position,

see Page 97

.

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Press the aligned transport lock (1) down as far as it will go. Be sure to avoid lateral shifting of the transport lock (1).

„ Tighten the 6 screws at the transport lock (1).

Checking the fire extinguisher

308

BPG000-034

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Ensure that the fire extinguisher (1) is mounted on the machine.

„ Ensure that access to and view of the fire extinguisher (1) are not obstructed.

„ Ensure that the fire extinguisher (1) is filled by weighing the fire extinguisher (1).

„ Ensure that the seal on the extinguishing head and the security seal are neither defective nor missing.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance – Basic Machine 18

Checking the fire extinguisher 18.9

„ Ensure that the operating instructions on the type plate of the fire extinguisher (1) are legible and face outwards.

„ Check the fire extinguisher for visible material damage, corrosion, leakage, a clogged hose and/or nozzle.

„ Ensure that the pressure gauge pointer indicates the green area.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 309

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.1

Dismounting/mounting the conditioner drive guard

19 Maintenance – mowing units

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

WARNING

Risk of injury from improper service and maintenance work on safety-relevant machine parts!

Improper service and maintenance work on safety-relevant machine parts, such as cutting discs and mower drums, and the machine components connected to them can cause dangerous imbalances or breakage during operation. As a result, persons can be seriously injured or killed.

„ Always replace damaged safety-relevant components, such as cutting discs and mower drums, and the machine components connected to them.

„ Observe the wear limits and check or replace the components.

„ Never modify any build-up welds.

„ Replace damaged components only with genuine KRONE spare parts.

19.1

Dismounting/mounting the conditioner drive guard

310

KM000-387

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

Dismounting

„ Release the locking screw (2) and remove the guard (1).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

19.2

Maintenance – mowing units

Dismounting/mounting the guard for the front mounted mower input gearbox

19

19.2

Mounting

„ Mount the guard (1) and lock the locking screw (2).

Dismounting/mounting the guard for the front mounted mower input gearbox

2

1

19.3

2

BMG000-031

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

Dismounting

„ Remove the hexagon head screws (2).

„ Remove the guard (1) and store it in a secure place.

Mounting

„ Put on the guard (1) in place and secure with the hexagon head screws (2).

Dismounting/mounting the guard of the auger drive

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The side guard is folded up and secured,

see Page 252

.

1

2

BMG000-055

Removing

„ Remove the hexagon head screws (2).

„ Remove the guard (1) and store it in a secure place.

Mounting

„ Put on the guard (1) in place and secure with the hexagon head screws (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 311

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.4

Maintaining belt drives

19.4

Maintaining belt drives

INFO

If crops are thick, belt pulleys with 4 grooves can be mounted on the front mounted mower if required.

19.4.1

Checking kraftband

INFO

If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the kraftband and pulley is not guaranteed.

„ Visually check each kraftband of the belt drives inside and outside for wear and damage

(e.g. cracks, rocks) and replace, if necessary.

„ Check each kraftband for soiling (oil, grease) and clean or replace it, if necessary.

19.4.2

Checking pulley

BX001-249

INFO

If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the kraftband and pulley is not guaranteed.

„ Check the edges of the pulley (1) for wear and, if required, have them replaced by your

KRONE service partner.

„ Check the pulley (1) for damage and replace if required.

„ Check the pulley (1) for soiling (oil, grease) and clean if required.

312

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

19.4.3

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Maintaining belt drives 19.4

Checking/adjusting the belt tension of the front mounted mower conditioner drive

19.4.4

KM000-383

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü

The guard for the conditioner drive is dismounted, see Page 310 .

ü

The belt drive is tensioned, see Page 313 .

„ Check whether the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2).

If the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2), the belt tension is correct.

If the display (1) does not end flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2), the belt tension must be adjusted.

„ Detension the belt drive,

see Page 313

.

„ Loosen the nut (4).

When the display is above the compression spring:

„ Unscrew the sleeve (3) further (turn counterclockwise).

When the display is under the compression spring:

„ Screw the sleeve (3) in further (turn clockwise).

„ Tighten the nut (4).

„ Tension the belt drive,

see Page 313

.

„ Repeat the process until the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2) with the belt drive tensioned.

„ Mount the guard (5) for the conditioner drive,

see Page 310

.

Tensioning/detensioning the conditioner drive belt tension front mounted mower

ü

The guard for the conditioner drive is dismounted, see Page 310 .

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„

Remove the blade key from the rear storage compartment, see Page 66 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 313

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.4

Maintaining belt drives

Detensioning the belt drive

BM000-259

„ Remove the linch pin (1).

WARNING! Risk of injury! The blade key (3) is under spring tension during the detensioning process. If the blade key is released too early, it will spring back. Do not release the blade key during detensioning.

„ To detension the belt drive, insert the blade key (3) in the tensioning device (2) and press down.

Tensioning the belt drive

BM000-260

WARNING! Risk of injury! The blade key (1) is under spring tension during the tensioning process. If the blade key is released too early, it will spring back. Do not release the blade key during tensioning.

„ Slide the blade key (1) into the tensioning device (3).

„ To tension the belt drive, press the blade key upwards until the tensioning device engages.

„ To secure the tensioning device, mount the linch pin (2).

314

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

19.4.5

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Maintaining belt drives 19.4

Checking/setting belt tension of auger drive

3

4

2

1

BMG000-039

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The guard of the auger drive has been removed,

see Page 311

.

ü

The belt drive has been tensioned, see Page 315 .

„ Check whether the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2).

If the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2), the belt tension is correct.

If the display (1) does not end flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2), the belt tension must be adjusted.

„

Relieve the belt drive, see Page 315 .

„ Loosen the nut (4).

Display above the compression spring

„ Unscrew the sleeve (3) further (turn anti-clockwise).

Display under the compression spring

„ Screw the sleeve (3) in further (turn clockwise).

„ Tighten the nut (4).

„ Tension the belt drive,

see Page 315

.

„ Repeat the process until the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2) with the belt drive tensioned.

„

Attach the guard of the auger conveyor drive, see Page 311 .

19.4.6

Relieving/tensioning belt drive of auger drive

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The guard of the auger drive has been removed,

see Page 311

.

„

Remove the blade key from the rear storage compartment, see Page 66 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 315

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.4

Maintaining belt drives

2

3

1

BMG000-061

Relieving the belt drive

„ Pull out the linch pin (1).

WARNING! Risk of injury! While relieving the belt drive, the blade wrench (2) is under spring tension. The blade wrench (2) recoils if it is released too early. Do not release the blade wrench (2) during the relieving process.

„ To relieve the belt drive tension, insert the blade wrench (2) into the tensioning device (3) and pull it from the rear.

Tensioning the belt drive

WARNING! Risk of injury! While tensioning the belt drive, the blade wrench (2) is under spring tension. The blade wrench (2) recoils if it is released too early. Do not release the blade wrench (2) during the tensioning process.

„ Slide the blade wrench (2) into the tensioning device (3).

„ To tension the belt drive, push the blade wrench (2) forward until the tensioning device (3) locks into place.

„ To secure the tensioning device (3), insert the linch pin (1) into the borehole.

„ Check belt tension,

see Page 315

.

„

Mount the guard of the auger conveyor drive, see Page 311

.

19.4.7

Changing kraftband “belt drive side mounted mowers”

Changing the kraftband is described based on the example of the "Right side mounted mower belt drive". The kraftband of the "Left side mounted mower belt drive" is changed in a similar manner.

ü All mowing units are in working position,

see Page 97

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 31

.

„ The side hood is open.

316

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Maintaining belt drives 19.4

BM000-272

„ Loosen the safety chain (2).

„ Unscrew the screws (1) and put the universal shaft (3) aside.

BM000-173

„ Dismount the oil pan guard (2).

„ Remove the guard sheet (3).

„ Dismount the belt guard (4).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 317

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.4

Maintaining belt drives

318

BM000-174

„ Unscrew the upper screws (4) of the belt guard (3).

„ Unscrew the screws (1) and remove the belt guard (2) together with the belt guard (3).

„ Dismount the belt guard (5).

„ Remove the bolt (7) and protect the hydraulic cylinder (6) against falling down.

„ To dismount the reel (10), raise the rocker arm (9).

„ Remove the kraftband (11) from the lower belt pulley (12) and set it on the upper belt pulley (12).

„ Raise the rocker arm (9) until it is no longer positioned in front of the upper belt pulley (8).

Secure the rocker arm (9) in this position to protect it against falling down.

„ Remove the kraftband (11) from the upper belt pulley (8), turn it and remove it down and to the rear between the belt pulley (8) and the main frame.

„ Replace the kraftband (11) with a new one. Note the running direction.

„ To lower the rocker arm (9) release the retainer.

„ Place the kraftband (11) on the belt pulley (12).

„ Raise the rocker arm (9) and mount the reel (10).

„ To mount the bolt (7), loosen the hydraulic cylinder retainer (6) and lower it until the hole pattern of the hydraulic cylinder (6) and the rocker arm (9) coincide.

„ Mount the belt guard (5).

„ Insert the belt guard (2) together with the belt guard (3) and mount with the screws (1).

„ Fit the upper screws (4) of the belt guard (3).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Maintaining belt drives 19.4

BM000-173

„ Mount the belt guard (4).

„ Attach the guard sheet (3).

„ Mount the oil pan guard (2).

BM000-272

„ Insert the universal shaft and fit the screws (1) medium tight using screw glue; tightening torque=72 Nm.

„ Mount the safety chain (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 319

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.4

Maintaining belt drives

19.4.8

Change kraftband "belt drive of front mounted mower"

320

BM000-175

ü All mowing units are in working position,

see Page 97

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 31

.

ü The side hood on the right is open.

„ Dismount the universal shaft (11).

„ Dismount the belt guard (2).

„ To dismount the belt guard (9) together with the belt guard (10), unscrew the screws (8 and

12).

„ Dismount the hose clamp (4).

„ To dismount the belt guard (3) together with the support, unscrew the screws (5).

„ Remove the bolt (6) and protect the hydraulic cylinder (7) against falling down.

„ Evenly remove the kraftband (1) from the two pulleys.

„ Replace the kraftband (1) with a new one. Note the running direction.

„ To mount the bolt (6), loosen the hydraulic cylinder retainer (7) and lower it until the hole pattern of the hydraulic cylinder (7) and the rocker arm coincide.

„ Insert the belt guard (3) together with the support and mount with the screws (5).

„ Mount the hose clamp (4).

„ Insert the belt guard (9) together with the belt guard (10) and mount with the screws (8 and

12).

„ Mount the belt guard (2).

„ Slide on the universal shaft (11) and fit the clamping screw; tightening torque=80 Nm.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

19.5

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Checking the tines on the tine conditioner 19.5

Checking the tines on the tine conditioner

NOTICE

Loss of tines

Bent and broken tines will cause an imbalance. Therefore the machine may be damaged.

„ Check the tine conditioner for bent and damaged tines each time before it is used.

„ Replace bent or damaged tines before starting work.

„ To prevent a loss of tines, check the bearing journals of the tine bearings and replace them in time.

KMG000-017

Broken tines must be replaced in pairs on opposite sides.

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Straighten bent and damaged tines (1); replace and mount them if necessary.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 321

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.6

Cutterbar

19.6

Cutterbar

19.6.1

Rotary hub

Series:

2

RE

4

B

RE RE LE RE LE RE LE

1 3 a

LE b

RE RE LE RE LE RE LE LE RE RE LE RE LE RE LE LE

BMG000-026

322

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Cutterbar 19.6

For version with "Direction of rotation "A"":

2

RE

4

A

RE RE RE RE LE LE LE

1 3 a

LE b

RE RE RE RE LE LE LE LE RE RE RE RE LE LE LE LE

BM000-473

Abbreviations used in this figure:

A = Direction of rotation “A” to the centre

B = Direction of rotation “B” in pairs

RE = eccentric bearing housing (clockwise), without distinctive groove

LE = eccentric bearing housing (rotating anticlockwise), with distinctive groove

For protection against overload of mowers, the rotary hubs (1) are secured with nuts (2) and shear pins (3).

When driving onto obstacles (e.g. stones), the both shear pins in the rotary hub will shear off.

The rotary hub incl. nut turns upward on the pinion shaft.

• The cutting discs or drums which move the crop to the left (LH) in the direction of travel have left-handed thread.

• The cutting discs or drums which transport the crop to the right (RH) in the direction of travel have right-handed thread.

To distinguish between right-hand (clockwise) rotation (RH) and left-hand (anti-clockwise) rotation (LH), the nuts (2) and the pinion shafts (4) for the left-hand rotation (LH) have a distinctive groove (a, b).

• The nuts (2) with left-handed thread (LH) have distinctive grooves (a) on the bevel.

• The pinion shafts (4) with left-handed thread (LH) have a distinctive groove (b) on the face.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 323

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.6

Cutterbar

19.6.2

Check/change blades

WARNING

Missing, damaged or incorrectly mounted blades and blade supports

If blades are missing, damaged or incorrectly mounted, dangerous unbalanced rotation may be caused and parts may fly around. People may be seriously injured or killed as a result.

„ Check the blades at least once a day and the retaining bolts every time after changing the blades or after contact with foreign objects.

„ Immediately replace missing, damaged or incorrectly mounted blades and blade supports.

„ To avoid imbalance, always replace missing and damaged blades in kits and never mount unevenly worn blades on a cutting disc/mower drum.

Version with blade screw connection Version with blade quick fastener

KM000-039 / KM000-040

„ Whenever a blade is changed or following contact with foreign objects, check retaining bolts and, if required, have them replaced by authorized specialists.

19.6.2.1

Checking the blade for wear

WARNING

Risk of injury due to low material thickness on the blades

If the material thickness on the blades is too low, the blades may loosen due to high rotating speed. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Replace the blades at the latest when the wear limit is reached.

ð The wear limit is reached when the borehole of the blade touches the marking (1) on the blade or the dimension X is equal to or less than 13 mm .

324

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Cutterbar 19.6

KM000-038

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„

Fold up the front guard, see Page 192 .

WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! Wear suitable protective gloves.

„ Clean the area around the blades, cutting discs and mower drums.

„ Check wear limit.

ð If the dimension is X>13 mm , the wear limit is not reached.

ð If the dimension X is ≤13 mm or the borehole touches the marking (1), the blade must be replaced.

„

Fold down the front guard, see Page 192 .

19.6.2.2

Changing blades for the “blade screw connection” version

KM000-044

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„

Fold up the front guard, see Page 192 .

WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! Wear suitable protective gloves.

„ Clean the area around the blades, cutting discs and mower drums.

„ Remove the damaged or worn blade.

„ Check the fastening parts of the blade. Also replace worn or damaged fastening parts.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 325

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.6

Cutterbar

INFO: The blades for anti-clockwise and clockwise rotating cutting discs/mower drums differ.

When installing the blades, ensure that the direction of rotation is correct. The arrow on the blade must match the direction of rotation of the corresponding cutting disc/mower drum.

„ Insert the new blade (5) between the wear skid (2) and the cutting disc (1).

„ Insert the retaining bolt (3) from below through the wear skid (2), the blade (5) and the cutting disc (1).

INFO: Only use the locknut (4) once.

„ Screw the locknut (4) from above onto the retaining bolt (3) and tighten it; tightening torque

see Page 272

.

„ Repeat the process for all blades.

„

Fold down the front guard, see Page 192 .

19.6.2.3

Changing blades for the “blade quick fastener” version

1

2 3

4

4

5

2

3

KM000-045

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„

Fold up the front guard, see Page 192 .

WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! Wear suitable protective gloves.

„ Clean the area around the blades, cutting discs and mower drums.

„ To remove the blade (2), insert the blade wrench (1) between the cutting disc (4) and the blade carrier (3) as far as it will go, press it down with one hand and hold it.

„ Check the fastening parts of the blade (2). Also replace worn or damaged fastening parts.

INFO: The blades for anti-clockwise and clockwise rotating cutting discs/mower drums differ.

When installing the blades, ensure that the direction of rotation is correct. The arrow on the blade must match the direction of rotation of the corresponding cutting disc/mower drum.

„ To insert the new blade (2), insert the blade key (1) between the cutting disc (4) and the blade carrier (3) as far as it will go, press it down with one hand and hold it.

„ Guide the blade (2) onto the retaining bolt (5) and release the blade key (1) in a controlled manner with your hand.

„ Repeat the process for all blades.

„

Fold down the front guard, see Page 192 .

INFO

Alternatively, the blades can be changed with the QuickChange tool.

326

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

19.6.3

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Cutterbar 19.6

Checking/replacing linings on cutterbar

NOTICE

Impact stops are checked irregularly

The impact stops are subject to natural wear and must be inspected daily for wear and replaced if required. If there is no inspection, the machine may be damaged.

„ Adjust the welding current and the welding material to the cutterbar material and to the impact stop. If required, carry out a test weld.

KM000-081

„ Open the welding seams of the old lining.

„ Remove lining.

„ Deburr the contact areas.

KM000-080

„ Fit the new lining (3).

„ Weld short I seams on the upper side of the cutterbar in the sections (1) (each should be approx. 30 mm). INFORMATION: The edges (2) must not be welded.

„ On the bottom of the cutterbar, weld the lining (3) to the cutterbar along the whole length in section (5). INFORMATION: The edges (4) must not be welded.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 327

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.6

Cutterbar

19.6.4

Oil level inspection and oil change on the cutter bar

Front mounted mower cutterbar

Checking oil level

Before checking the oil level on the cutterbar, level the cutterbar using a spirit level.

KM000-284

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

Aligning the cutterbar in transverse direction (direction of travel)

„ Position the spirit level (1) transversely on the cutterbar.

„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1) and readjust, if necessary, via cutting height

setting, see Page 244

.

Aligning the cutterbar in longitudinal direction

„ Position the spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.

„ Use the spirit level (1) to align the cutterbar, if necessary use wedges to align it horizontally.

328

KM000-036

„ Release the locking screw of the inspection hole (1).

ð The oil level must reach up to the inspection hole (1).

If the oil reaches the inspection hole (1):

„

Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1), see Page 275

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Cutterbar 19.6

If the oil does not reach the inspection hole (1):

„ Top up new oil via the inspection hole (1) up to the inspection hole (1).

„

Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1), see Page 275

.

Change oil

BMG000-037

ü The front mounted mower is raised.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ To be able to lower the cutterbar on the side of the drain plug (2), place a square piece of timber underneath the cutterbar on the opposite side.

„

Set the Main Mode Switch to the "Maintenance mode" position, see Page 101

.

„ Lower the front mounted mower until the cutterbar rests on the square piece of timber and is lower in the direction of the drain plug (2).

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Unscrew the drain plug (2) and drain the oil.

„ Mount the drain plug (2).

„ Raise the front mounted mower again.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

KM000-284

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 329

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.6

Cutterbar

Aligning the cutterbar in transverse direction (direction of travel)

„ Position the spirit level (1) transversely on the cutterbar.

„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1) and readjust, if necessary, via cutting height

setting, see Page 244

.

Aligning the cutterbar in longitudinal direction

„ Position the spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.

„ Use the spirit level (1) to align the cutterbar, if necessary use wedges to align it horizontally.

KM000-036

„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the inspection hole (1).

„

Screw in the locking screw of the inspection hole (1), see Page 275 .

Cutterbar side mounted mowers

Checking oil level

Before checking the oil level on the cutterbar, level the cutterbar using a spirit level.

330

KM000-284

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

Aligning the cutterbar in transverse direction (direction of travel)

„ Position the spirit level (1) transversely on the cutterbar.

„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1) and readjust, if necessary, via cutting height

setting, see Page 244

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Cutterbar 19.6

Aligning the cutterbar in longitudinal direction

„ Position the spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.

„ Use the spirit level (1) to align the cutterbar, if necessary use wedges to align it horizontally.

KM000-036

„ Release the locking screw of the inspection hole (1).

ð The oil level must reach up to the inspection hole (1).

If the oil reaches the inspection hole (1):

„

Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1), see Page 275

.

If the oil does not reach the inspection hole (1):

„ Top up new oil via the inspection hole (1) up to the inspection hole (1).

„

Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1), see Page 275

.

Change oil

BMG000-038

ü The side mounted mowers are in transport position,

see Page 97

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Unscrew the drain plug (1) and drain the oil.

„

Mount the drain plug (1), tightening torque see Page 275

.

„ Move the side mounted mowers into the working position.

Before checking the oil level on the cutterbar, level the cutterbar using a spirit level.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 331

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.7

Check guard cloths

KM000-284

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

Aligning the cutterbar in transverse direction (direction of travel)

„ Position the spirit level (1) transversely on the cutterbar.

„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1) and readjust, if necessary, via cutting height

setting, see Page 244

.

Aligning the cutterbar in longitudinal direction

„ Position the spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.

„ Use the spirit level (1) to align the cutterbar, if necessary use wedges to align it horizontally.

19.7

KM000-036

„ Remove the locking screw from the inspection hole (1).

„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the inspection hole (1).

„ Screw in the locking screw of the inspection hole (1).

Check guard cloths

ü All mowing units are in working position,

see Page 97

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

332

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Vent friction clutch 19.8

19.8

1

BMG000-045

„ Carry out a visual inspection of the guard cloth (1) to ensure that there are no cracks and damage.

Æ The machine can be used when there are no cracks or damages.

Æ Replace guard cloths in case of cracks or damage.

Vent friction clutch

NOTICE

Interventions in the friction clutch will lead to a loss of guarantee!

Interventions in the friction clutch change the slip torque. Therefore the machine may be damaged considerably.

„ Never intervene in the overload protection.

„ Only use KRONE original spare parts.

The friction clutch protects the machine from damage. It is designed with a permanently adjusted turning torque M

R

. The torque is stamped on the housing of the friction clutch.

Before initial start-up and once a year before the season, the friction clutch must be bled. This will detach adhesions from the friction lining. Therefore functionality will be maintained and the service life increased.

ü All mowing units are in working position,

see Page 97

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The universal shafts on the mowers have been dismounted, front mounted mower,

see

Page 140

, side mounted mowers, see Page 147

.

„ Follow the operating instructions of the universal shaft manufacturer.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 333

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.8

Vent friction clutch

Walterscheid series K90

1

2

1

4

5

1 3

4

BM000-347

Vent friction clutch

„ Loosen the 6 nuts (1) crosswise and disassemble.

„ Undo the 6 screws (4) until the screw ends are flush with the shaft flange (3).

„ Undo the coupling hub (5).

Restarting the friction clutch

„ Tighten the 6 screws (4) with a tightening torque of M

A

=20 Nm.

„ Mount the 6 nuts (1) to a tightening torque of M

A

=49 Nm.

To place the machine in service again, switch on the PTO shaft. When the friction clutch has been bled, the mowing discs/mower drums must not also rotate, should this be the case, the friction clutch is stuck or rusty and must be taken apart (remove any friction lining from the plates, if necessary smooth the friction linings with sandpaper). Then re-attach the universal shaft and bleed the friction clutch again.

334

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

19.9

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Raising mowers 19.9

Raising mowers

WARNING

Risk of injury due to raised machine

There is a risk to individuals from the machine falling and parts which are swinging in an uncontrolled manner.

„ Use only permitted hoists and slings with a sufficient load-bearing capacity.

„ Note the information on the anchor points provided.

„ Make sure the lifting means are properly secured.

„ Never stay under the suspended machine.

„

If work has to be performed under the machine, securely support the machine, see

Page 31 .

Lifting points on the mowers

Front mounted mowers:

1

1

1

BMG000-060

ü The front mowing unit has been uncoupled,

see Page 139

.

„ Use a hoist with a permitted load-carrying capacity of at least 3000 kg.

„ To raise the front mowing unit, use the lifting points (1).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 335

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.9

Raising mowers

Side mounted mowers:

With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

1

2

1

BMG000-059

ü The side mounted mowers have been dismounted,

see Page 144

.

„ Use a hoist with a permitted load-carrying capacity of at least 3000 kg.

„ To be able to attach a hoist to the lifting points (1), mount 1 ring nut (M16 Zn8) with

2 discs (17 x 40 x 6 Zn8) and 1 hexagon head screw (M16 x 90 Zn8).

„ To raise the side mounted mower, use the lifting points (1, 2).

336

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

With version "Standard swathing"

1

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Raising mowers 19.9

2

2

BMG000-058

The side mounted mowers have been dismounted, see Page 144 .

„ Use a hoist with a permitted load-carrying capacity of at least 3,000 kg.

„ To be able to attach a hoist to the lifting point (1), take a ring screw out of the rear storage compartment,

see Page 66

.

„ Mount the ring screw (M16 x 27 Zn8).

„ To raise the side mounted mower, use the lifting points (1, 2).

„ Dismount the ring screw and place it in the rear storage compartment.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 337

20 Maintenance - Lubrication

20.1

Lubricating universal shafts

20 Maintenance - Lubrication

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

NOTICE

Environmental damage caused by consumables

If consumables are not stored and disposed of properly, they may escape into the environment. As a result, the environment will be damaged, even by small quantities.

„ Store the consumables in suitable containers according to the statutory provisions.

„ Dispose of used consumables according to statutory provisions.

NOTICE

Damage to bearing points

When using lubricating greases not approved and when mixing different lubricating greases, the lubricated parts may be damaged.

„ Only use approved lubricating greases,

see Page 77

.

„ Do not use graphite-containing lubricating greases.

„ Do not mix different lubricating greases.

20.1

Lubricating universal shafts

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 185

.

ü

The cutting height at the mowers is set to 0°, see Page 244 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

338

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - Lubrication 20

Lubricating universal shafts 20.1

BM000-149

1 Universal shaft drive

Right side mounted mower with freewheel*

2 Universal shaft drive

Left side mounted mowing unit with freewheel*

3 Universal shaft drive front output**

4

5

6

* Version W

Lubrication intervals version P

**

Universal shaft drive front mounted mower **

Universal shaft cutterbar drive*

Universal shaft drive conditioner drive with freewheel*

Version P

BM000-151

Lubrication intervals version W

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 339

20 Maintenance - Lubrication

20.2

Lubricate the intermediate gear

100h 100h 100h 250h 100h

100h

100h 100h

20.2

250h 250h

250h

BM000-150

„ Follow the operating instructions for the universal shaft manufacturer.

„ Lubricate all joints, guard bearings and section tubes at the specified lubrication intervals using multi-purpose grease.

Additionally for universal shafts with freewheel:

„ Lubricate the freewheel (1) via the grease nipple at the specified lubrication interval using multi-purpose grease.

1

Lubricate the intermediate gear

„

Lubrication interval, see Page 264 .

340

BM000-197

ü The side mounted mowers are in working position.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The swath cloth under the machine has been removed.

ü For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood": The deflector curtain between the cross conveyor and machine frame has been removed from the machine frame.

„ Remove the dirt in the area around the locking screws (1).

„ Unscrew the 2 locking screws (1).

„ Carefully remove threadlocker residue from the threads of the open boreholes to prevent residue from getting inside.

„ Screw 2 conical grease nipples M8 x 1 into the open boreholes.

„ NOTE! Damage to the intermediate gear due to use of incorrect lubricating grease!

Use only Mobilgrease XHP 222 lubricating grease.

„ Lubricate each conical grease nipple with 65 g lubricating grease.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

20.3

Maintenance - Lubrication 20

Lubrication chart - machine 20.3

„ WARNING! Risk of injury due to activated drives. Ensure that no one remains in the danger zone of the machine.

„ Leave the mower drives running for 15 min.

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31 .

„ Remove leaked lubricating grease.

„ Unscrew the 2 conical grease nipples.

„ Mount the previously dismounted locking screws using a threadlocker (e.g. Loctite medium strength).

„ For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood": Mount the deflector curtain between the cross conveyor and machine frame.

Lubrication chart - machine

The information on maintenance intervals is based on average load of the machine. In case of an increased load and under extreme working conditions, the time periods must be reduced.

The types of lubrication are marked by means of icons in the lubrication chart, refer to table.

Type of lubrication

Grease

Lubricant

Multi-purpose grease

Comment

„ Apply two strokes of lubricating grease from the grease gun per grease nipple.

„ Remove excess lubricating grease at the grease nipple.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 341

20 Maintenance - Lubrication

20.3

Lubrication chart - machine

7

8

6

5

4

3

2

1

9

BMG000-036

342

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

4)

7) every 100 operating hours

1) 2)

Maintenance - Lubrication 20

Lubrication chart - machine 20.3

3)

5)

8)

6)

9)

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 343

21 Maintenance – Central Lubrication System

21.1

Lubricants

21 Maintenance – Central Lubrication System

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to the use of incorrect and contaminated lubricants

Unauthorised or contaminated lubricants in the central lubrication unit will cause malfunctions in the central lubrication unit and damage the bearing positions.

„ When working on the central lubrication unit, use clean and suitable tools.

„ Use authorised lubricants only.

„ Ensure that dirt or dirty lubricant cannot get into the central lubrication unit.

21.1

Lubricants

Standard commercial greases, recommended by vehicle manufacturer or grease manufacturer, with adequate suction and flow characteristics at –25 °C (max. flow pressure 700 mbars) are used as lubricants. They must not have a tendency to bleed. This can produce depositions in the lines during extended operation.

MoS2 greases (up to 5% molybdenum disulphide) can be conveyed with progressive pumps and distributor blocks.

Approved lubricating grease:

• KRONE lubricating grease, mat. no. 270275690 (400-g container), and

• KRONE lubricating grease, mat. no. 270275680 (50-kg container).

Lubricating greases with the following characteristics are also approved:

• Grease up to NLGI class 2 with EP additives must be adjusted to the outside temperatures.

Thickener: Lithium Complex

• Basic oil viscosity at 40°C: 85-180 mm 2 /s

Mixing lubricating greases with different thickeners is not permitted.

Contact your dealer of lubricant supplier.

344

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

21.2

Filling the lubricant tank

Maintenance – Central Lubrication System 21

Filling the lubricant tank 21.2

BMG000-022

The lubricant tank can be filled via the conical grease nipple (1) or via the connector (2).

There are two different ways to top up the container by means of a standard grease gun:

• directly via conical grease nipple (1)

• via a filler neck screwed in instead of the conical grease nipple

Topping up lubricant tank via a filler neck

BX001-386

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Dismount the conical grease nipple (3) on the lubricant tank and mount the filler neck

27 001 594 * (4).

„ Mount the coupling sleeve 27 001 595 * (2) on the filling pump (1).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 345

21 Maintenance – Central Lubrication System

21.3

Check filling level

Topping up lubricant tank using a filling cylinder

21.3

21.4

BMG000-023

„ Dismount the double nipple (1) on the reducer (2).

„ Mount the connecting piece 27 001 998 * (3) with seal ring.

„ To fill, remove the protective caps on the connecting piece (3) and on the filling cylinder

940 393 * (4).

Check filling level

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to lack of lubrication

If the machine is not adequately lubricated, the affected components will be damaged.

„ Ensure that the lubricant tank of central lubrication system is always adequately full.

„ Visually check the filling level by the transparent lubricant tank.

The following error message appears in the terminal when the lubricant tank is empty:

„ “Lubrication tank of central lubrication” empty

To ensure that the machine can be lubricated sufficiently again:

„ Stop the machine and refill the lubricant tank.

Starting intermediate lubrication

346

BMG000-014

The lubrication interval is preset ex works. The factory setting is 30 min for the interval duration and 27 for the number of clock cycles per lubrication interval (corresponds to a grease quantity of 25 ml).

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance – Central Lubrication System 21

Starting intermediate lubrication 21.4

To start intermediate lubrication manually:

„ Open the "Central Lubrication" "Maintenance" menu on the terminal and press the "Start intermediate lubrication" key.

The central lubrication system performs intermediate lubrication.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 347

22 Maintenance - Hydraulic System

22.1

Pressure limiting valves

22 Maintenance - Hydraulic System

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

WARNING

Hydraulic hoses are subject to ageing

Hydraulic hoses may wear depending on pressure, heat load and the effect of UV rays.

People can be seriously injured or killed by damaged hydraulic hoses.

The date of manufacture appears on the hydraulic hoses. This way the age can be ascertained quickly.

Replacement of the hydraulic hoses is recommended after a lifetime of six years.

„ Use original spare parts when replacing hoses.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to soiling of the hydraulic system

If foreign objects or liquids get into the hydraulic system, the hydraulic system may be severely damaged.

„ Clean hydraulic connections and components before removal.

„ Seal open hydraulic connections with protective caps.

„ Ensure that foreign objects or liquids do not get into the hydraulic system.

NOTICE

Storing and disposing of oils and used oil filters

If oil and used oil filters are not stored and disposed of properly, the environment may be damaged.

„ Store or dispose of used oil and oil filters according to statutory provisions.

22.1

Pressure limiting valves

The control blocks are fitted with pressure limiting valves. These valves have been preset in the factory and must not be changed.

348

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

22.2

22.3

Maintenance - Hydraulic System 22

Hydraulic oil 22.2

NOTICE

The pressure limiting valves on the machine have been preset in the factory. Work on the pressure limiting valves may be performed by KRONE customer service only.

Hydraulic oil

NOTICE

Damage to the hydraulic system caused by non approved hydraulic oils

If non-approved hydraulic oils or a mixture of different oils are used, the hydraulic system may be damaged.

„ Never mix different types of oil.

„ Never use engine oil.

„ Use approved hydraulic oils only.

Filling quantities and types of oil, see Page 75

.

Maintaining hydraulic oil tank

BM000-137

Checking hydraulic oil tank level

The oil level in the hydraulic oil tank (1) is queried electrically and displayed on the terminal.

There is also a sight glass (2) on the hydraulic oil tank (1).

INFO

To display the hydraulic oil level at the terminal, the machine must be in the transport position .

For the hydraulic oil level to be displayed correctly in the sight glass, the machine must be in the working position .

If the machine is in the working position, the sight glass displays the maximum filling level.

If the machine is in the transport position, the sight glass displays the minimum filling level.

Oil level check via sight glass:

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 349

22 Maintenance - Hydraulic System

22.3

Maintaining hydraulic oil tank

The hydraulic oil must be topped up to the maximum level in the sight glass (2).

„ Top up hydraulic oil if necessary,

see Page 350

.

Topping up hydraulic oil

350

BM000-229

The oil filler neck is located under the cover sheet (1) on the top of the machine behind the cabin.

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Unscrew the screws (2) from the cover sheet (1) and take off the cover sheet.

„ Dismount the cover (3) from the oil filler neck.

„ Top up hydraulic oil and mount the cover (3).

„ Mount the cover sheet (1) using the screws (2).

Changing oil in the hydraulic oil tank

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

BM000-230

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - Hydraulic System 22

Maintaining hydraulic oil tank 22.3

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Dismount the screws on the right side guard (1) and remove the guard.

„ Provide a collecting vessel (approx. 60 litres).

„ Clean thoroughly around the oil drain sleeve (2).

„

Remove the drain hose from the rear storage compartment, see Page 66 and place one end

in the collecting vessel. Mount the other end of the drain hose on the oil drain sleeve (2). As a result, the oil drain valve is automatically opened and the hydraulic oil flows into the collecting vessel.

„ Dismount the drain hose and place it in the rear storage compartment.

„ Top up the hydraulic oil up to the middle of the sight glass,

see Page 350 . Amount and

specification,

see Page 75

.

„ Run the diesel engine at a low idle speed for approx. 10 seconds.

„ Turn off the diesel engine.

„ Check the hydraulic oil tank level, top up the hydraulic oil if required.

„ Repeat the process until the oil level no longer drops.

„ Mount the right side guard (1).

Changing the return suction filter of the hydraulic oil tank

BM000-232

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Unscrew the screws (2) from the cover sheet (1) and take off the cover sheet.

„ To bleed pressure from the hydraulic oil tank, open the oil filling pipe (3) of the hydraulic oil tank.

„ Unscrew the cover (4).

„ Gently turn the filter element, pull it out and drain the hydraulic oil.

„ Clean the housing and cover.

„ Wet the sealing surfaces and O-ring seals of the new filter element with oil and insert by gently turning it.

„ Install a new O-ring on the cover.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 351

22 Maintenance - Hydraulic System

22.4

Changing high-pressure filter

„ Attach the cover (4) and screw it tight (20 Nm)

„ Start the diesel engine and run at idle speed.

„ Check the return suction filter for leaks.

22.4

Changing high-pressure filter

22.5

BM000-231

ü

The machine is in the working position, see Page 97 .

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Unscrew the screws on the left side guard (1) and remove the guard.

„ Dismount and clean the filter housing (2).

„ By gently moving the filter element back and forth, remove it downwards from the retainer piece and replace it with a new filter element.

„ Check the O-ring on the filter housing for damage and replace if necessary.

„ Moisten the thread and the sealing surfaces with hydraulic oil.

„ Attach the filter housing (2) and tighten it as far as it will go. Then turn back one quarter of a revolution.

„ Start the diesel engine and check the screw connections of the high-pressure filter for leaks.

Checking hydraulic hoses

Hydraulic hoses are subject to natural aging. This limits their service life. The recommended service life is 6 years, including a maximum storage time of 2 years. The date of manufacture is printed on the hydraulic hoses. When checking hydraulic hoses, the state-specific conditions

(e.g., BGVU) must be observed.

Performing a visual inspection

„ Visually inspect all hydraulic hoses for damage and leaks and have them replaced by an authorised specialist if necessary.

352

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

23

Maintenance – Electrics 23

Maintenance – Electrics

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

WARNING

Danger to life due to exploding battery gas

Highly explosive battery gas may escape from the battery

„ Keep ignition sources and naked flames away from the battery.

„ Note the correct polarity when disconnecting and connecting the battery.

NOTICE

Damage to the electrical system due to incorrect polarity of the battery

Non-observance of the correct polarity between the battery and alternator may severely damage the electrical system.

„ First connect the positive pole of the battery.

„ Then connect the negative terminal of the battery.

INFO

An overview of all control units, circuit boards and fuses can be found in the circuit diagram, which is part of the other applicable documents that was delivered with the machine.

NOTICE

Damage to electronic components due to voltage peaks

If the supply voltage is interrupted while the machine is running, voltage peaks may occur.

This can cause electronic components to be damaged.

„ Switch off the diesel engine.

„ Interrupt the circuit with the main battery switch,

see Page 179

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 353

23 Maintenance – Electrics

23.1

Batteries

23.1

Batteries

WARNING

Risk of injury due to a short circuit of the battery poles

When working on the batteries, carelessness may result in a short circuit of the battery poles.

A high current flows that may result in an electric shock, burns or explosion of the batteries.

As a result, people may be seriously injured.

„ When working on the batteries, make sure the positive pole does not come into contact with the negative pole or the frame.

„ Guard the battery poles with insulating caps against contact.

BMG000-013

1 Battery compartment

2 Battery (12 V)

3 Battery (12 V)

The batteries (2) and (3) are located behind the cover of the battery compartment (1) in the storage compartment under the left platform.

23.1.1

Cleaning and maintaining batteries

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ To keep the battery surface clean and dry, clean the batteries with a damp or anti-static cloth only.

„ Protect the battery terminals and connecting terminals from corrosion by applying terminal grease to the battery terminals and connecting terminals.

„ Use a brush to remove any oxidation from the pole terminal.

„ When batteries are removed and placed in storage, regularly check the charge state or use a charge maintenance device. If the open-circuit voltage is below 12.3 V, recharge the battery.

„ Keep removed batteries cool, dry and charged.

354

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance – Electrics 23

Batteries 23.1

23.1.2

Charging batteries

23.1.3

BMG000-015

The voltage of the machine's wiring system is 24 V. Two 12 V batteries are connected in series and supply the vehicle electronics with 24 V.

To charge and maintain the charge, the batteries must be connected to a battery charger.

The voltage of the battery charger must correspond to the voltage of the wiring system (24 V).

The vehicle electronics will be damaged if a battery charger with a higher or lower voltage is used.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Open the storage compartment under the left platform.

„ Take off the cover cap (1).

„ First connect the positive cable of the charger to the external start point (3) under the battery compartment.

„ Then connect the negative cable of the charger to the short circuit to ground (2) under the battery compartment.

„ Switch on the battery charger

„ When the batteries have been charged, switch off the battery charger.

„ Disconnect the negative cable of the battery charger from the ground connection (2).

„ Disconnect the positive cable of the battery charger from the external start connection (3).

„ Attach the cover cap (1).

„ Close the battery compartment.

Replacing batteries

Disconnecting the batteries

BMG000-016

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 355

23 Maintenance – Electrics

23.1

Batteries

ü

The machine is shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The battery compartment is open.

„ Remove the insulating caps (1) by loosening the cable ties.

„ Dismount the pole terminal (XC1/-) of the negative cable (2) from the negative pole of battery C1 (5).

„ Dismount the pole terminal (XC2/+.1) of the positive cable (3) from the positive pole of battery C2 (6).

„ Dismount the pole terminal (XC2/-) of the cable (4) from the negative pole of battery C2 (6).

„ Dismount the pole terminal (XC1/+) of the cable (4) from the positive pole of battery C1 (5).

Removing batteries

BMG000-017

Each battery weighs approx. 37 kg.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The batteries have been disconnected,

see Page 355

.

„ Unscrew the screw (1) and put the retaining sheet (2) aside.

„ Dismount the side cover from the battery compartment (5).

„ Unscrew the nut (6) to remove the screw (7) with the lashing strap over the batteries.

„ Remove battery C1 (3) and battery C2 (4) from the battery compartment.

356

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance – Electrics 23

Batteries 23.1

Installing batteries

BMG000-017

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Insert battery C1 (3) and battery C2 (4) into the battery compartment.

„ Insert the retaining sheet (2) and mount the screw (1).

„ Tension the lashing strap over the batteries (4, 5).

„ Mount the screw (7) on the lashing strap with the nut (6).

„ Mount the side cover of the battery compartment (5).

„ Connect the batteries,

see Page 357

.

Connecting a battery

BMG000-016

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

„ Mount the pole terminal (XC1/+) of the cable (4) on the positive pole of battery C1 (5)

(tightening torque = 6 ±1 Nm).

„ Mount the pole terminal (XC2/-) of the cable (4) on the negative pole of battery C2 (6)

(tightening torque = 6 ±1 Nm).

„ Mount the pole terminal (XC2/+.1) of the positive cable (3) on the positive pole of battery C2 (6) (tightening torque = 6 ±1 Nm).

„ Mount the pole terminal (XC1/-) of the negative cable (2) on the negative pole of battery C1 (5) (tightening torque = 6 ±1 Nm).

„ Attach the insulating caps (1) and fix with cable ties.

„ Close the battery compartment.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 357

23 Maintenance – Electrics

23.2

Maintaining starter

23.2

Maintaining starter

1

BXG000-064

If the starter (1) fails or is not working satisfactorily

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Determine the possible cause of the fault.

„ Attempt to eliminate the possible cause according to the following list.

Malfunction: The starter fails or is not working satisfactorily.

Possible cause

The connection cable to the starter is loose

Remedy

„ Tighten the cable connections (2) to a tightening torque of

24 ±4 Nm and the cable connection (3) to a tightening torque of 4 +0.6/-0.3 Nm.

„ Clean the cable connections on the starter and engine.

The cable connections are corroded.

The magnetic switch of the starter is defective

„ Have the starter checked by a qualified service centre.

If the damage cannot be repaired based on the suggestions, contact your KRONE dealer.

358

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

24

24.1

Maintenance - Gearbox 24

Overview of gearboxes 24.1

Maintenance - Gearbox

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

Overview of gearboxes

1 2

3

4

6 5

4 7

6

BXG000-036

1 Input gearbox on front mounted mower 5

2 Main gearbox on front mounted mower 6

3 Transfer gearbox

4 Rear wheel hub gearbox (option)

7

Main gearbox left side mounted mower

Front wheel hub gearbox

Main gearbox right side mounted mower

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 359

24 Maintenance - Gearbox

24.2

Maintaining transfer gearbox

24.2

Maintaining transfer gearbox

1

BM000-135

Checking gearbox oil level

ü The main frame of the machine has been aligned horizontally.

ü 5 to 10 minutes have elapsed after the engine was switched off.

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

The oil level must reach the middle of the sight glass (1).

If the oil does not reach the middle of the sight glass (1):

„

Top up gear oil, see Page 360 .

Topping up gear oil

1

360

BMG000-053

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Use a hexagon wrench to remove the locking screw from the oil filling hole (1).

„ Top up the gear oil up to the middle of the sight glass,

see Page 360 .

„ Screw the locking screw (1) back into the oil filling hole.

„ Run the engine at a low idle speed for a short time and switch off the engine.

„

Check the gear oil level after approx. 5 to 10 minutes, see Page 360 .

Change gear oil

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Maintenance - Gearbox 24

Maintaining transfer gearbox 24.2

1

BM000-247

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„

Remove the drain hose from the rear storage compartment, see Page 66 and place one end

in the collecting vessel. Mount the other end of the drain hose on the oil drain sleeve (1). As a result, the oil drain valve is automatically opened and the gear oil flows into the collecting vessel.

„ Dismount the drain hose and place it in the rear storage compartment.

„ Fill up with fresh gear oil,

see Page 360 .

Changing the filter

1 2

3

BM000-344

The filter (1) is located on the right side of the machine in front of the transfer gearbox and can be accessed from below the machine.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

ü The right side hood is open.

ü A suitable container for collecting escaping oil is available.

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Unscrew the filter housing (2).

„ Clean the filter housing (2).

„ Remove the filter element (3).

„ Check the O-ring seals on the filter housing (2) and on the filter seat for damage and replace if required.

„ Connect the new filter element and ensure that the filter element is not soiled.

„ Screw on the filter housing (2) to a tightening torque of 100 Nm.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 361

24 Maintenance - Gearbox

24.3

Maintaining input gearbox of front mounted mower

24.3

Maintaining input gearbox of front mounted mower

362

BMG000-033

INFO

The oil level must be checked and the oil must be changed in working position and with machine in horizontal position.

„ The guard for the input gearbox is removed,

see Page 311

.

Checking the oil level

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Remove the locking screw from the inspection hole (1).

ð If the oil reaches the inspection hole (1):

„ Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1); tightening torque

see Page 275

.

ð If the oil does not reach the inspection hole (1):

„ Remove the locking screw from the filling hole (3).

„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the filling hole (3).

„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw into the filling

hole (3), tightening torque see Page 275 .

Changing the oil

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Unscrew the locking screw (2) from the filling hole (3).

„ Extract the old oil from the gearbox.

„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the filling hole (3).

„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw (2) into the filling

hole (3), tightening torque see Page 275 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

24.4

Maintenance - Gearbox 24

Maintaining main gearbox of front mounted mower 24.4

Maintaining main gearbox of front mounted mower

BMG000-030

INFO

The oil level must be checked and the oil must be changed in working position and with machine in horizontal position.

Checking the oil level

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Remove the locking screw from the inspection hole (1).

ð If the oil reaches the inspection hole (1):

„ Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1); tightening torque

see Page 275

.

ð If the oil does not reach the inspection hole (1):

„ Remove the locking screw from the filling hole (3).

„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the filling hole (3).

„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw into the filling

hole (3), tightening torque see Page 275 .

Changing the oil

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Unscrew the locking screw of the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw of the filling hole (3).

„ Unscrew the drain plug (2) and drain the oil.

„

Mount the drain plug (2), tightening torque see Page 275

.

„ Top up with fresh oil via the filling hole (3) up to the inspection hole (1).

„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw into the filling

hole (3), tightening torque see Page 275 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 363

24 Maintenance - Gearbox

24.5

Maintain main gearbox of side mounted mowers

24.5

Maintain main gearbox of side mounted mowers

364

KMG000-22

INFO

The oil level must be checked and the oil must be changed in working position and with machine in horizontal position.

Checking the oil level

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Remove the locking screw from the inspection hole (1).

ð If the oil reaches the inspection hole (1):

„ Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1); tightening torque

see Page 275

.

ð If the oil does not reach the inspection hole (1):

„ Remove the locking screw from the filling hole (3).

„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the filling hole (3).

„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw into the filling

hole (3), tightening torque see Page 275 .

Changing the oil

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Unscrew the locking screw of the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw of the filling hole (3).

„ Unscrew the drain plug (2) and drain the oil.

„

Mount the drain plug (2), tightening torque see Page 275

.

„ Top up with fresh oil via the filling hole (3) up to the inspection hole (1).

„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw into the filling

hole (3), tightening torque see Page 275 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

24.6

Maintenance - Gearbox 24

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox 24.6

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox

NOTICE

Damage to the wheel hub gearboxes caused by use of incorrect gearbox oil

When incorrect gearbox oil is used, the wheel hub gearboxes could be damaged during operation.

„ Only use SHELL SPIRAX S4 CX 50 gearbox oil to refill or change the gearbox oil in the wheel hub gearboxes.

„ If this gearbox oil is not available, contact your KRONE service partner.

24.6.1

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox front/right

BM000-227 / BM000-228

I Front wheel hub gearbox II Wheel hub gearbox rear (optional)

Checking oil level

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Position the wheel until the filling hole (1) is in the top position.

„ Thoroughly clean the area around the locking screw of the filling hole (1) and the locking screw of the inspection hole (2).

WARNING! Risk of scalding by hot gear oil escaping under pressure. Wear personal protective equipment such as gloves and safety glasses and carefully loosen the locking screw of the filling hole.

„ To reduce the pressure, carefully remove the locking screw from the filling hole (1) from a lateral position.

ð The pressure in the wheel hub gearbox is reduced.

„ Screw the locking screw into the filling hole (1).

„ Place the wheel so that the drain plug (3) is in the lowest position.

„ Remove the locking screw from the inspection hole (2).

„ Check whether the oil level reaches up to the inspection hole (2).

If the oil reaches the inspection hole:

„

Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (2), tightening torque see Page 275 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 365

24 Maintenance - Gearbox

24.6

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox

If the oil does not reach the inspection hole:

„ Remove the locking screw from the filling hole (1).

„ Top up new oil via the filling hole (1) up to the inspection hole (2).

„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (2) and the locking screw into the filling

hole (1), tightening torque see Page 275 .

Changing the oil

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter elements safely",

see Page 32

.

„ Position the wheel until the filling hole (1) is in the top position.

„ Thoroughly clean the area around the locking screw of the filling hole (1) and the locking screw of the inspection hole (2).

WARNING! Risk of scalding by hot gear oil escaping under pressure. Wear personal protective equipment such as gloves and safety glasses and carefully loosen the locking screw of the filling hole.

„ To reduce the pressure, carefully remove the locking screw from the filling hole (1) from a lateral position.

ð The pressure in the wheel hub gearbox is reduced.

„ Screw the locking screw into the filling hole (1).

„ Position the wheel until the drain plug (3) is in the lowest position.

„ Thoroughly clean the area around the drain plug (3)

„ Place a suitable container under the drain hole (3).

„ Unscrew the drain plug (3) and drain the oil into the container.

„ Unscrew the locking screw of the inspection hole (2) and the locking screw of the filling hole

(1).

„

Mount the drain plug (3), tightening torque see Page 275

.

„ Top up new oil via filling hole (1) up to the inspection hole (2).

„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (2) and the locking screw into the filling

hole (1), tightening torque see Page 275 .

366

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Disturbances of the electrics/electronics 25.1

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see

Page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

see Page 31 .

25.1

25.1.1

Disturbances of the electrics/electronics

Overview of control units

An overview of the position of the sensors, actuators and control units is provided in the circuit diagram.

BMK Designation

A2 KMC (operating control)

A3 DRC (drive computer)

BMK

A32

A 34

Designation

TRM (terminal)

KSC (KRONE SmartConnect)

25.1.2

Overview of fuses

The fuses of the "distributor block - supply of fuses" are located on the left-hand machine side in the battery compartment below the batteries.

BM000-274

BMK

A19

Designation

Distributor block - supply of fuses

A19.F1

Reserve

A19.F2

Power supply - cabin output

BMK Designation

A19.F3

Power supply - cabin electronics

A19.F4

Battery cut-off relay momentary switch

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 367

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.1

Disturbances of the electrics/electronics

BX000-276

The "central electrical system" circuit board (1) is located in the console in the cabin.

368

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Disturbances of the electrics/electronics 25.1

BM000-268

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 369

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.1

Disturbances of the electrics/electronics

BMK Designation

A1.F1

Diagnostics socket ISOBUS

A1.F5

Built in-socket 3-pole, cooling box socket

A1.F7

Socket ISOBUS In-cab

A1.F13

Automatic climate control, evaporator blower fan/PWM

A1.F14

LMB-ECU2: ignition stage 2

A1.F15

KRONE diagnostics socket: ignition stage 1

A1.F16

Radio, CB radio: ignition stage 1

A1.F17

Driver's seat: ignition stage 1

A1.F19

Cigarette lighter

A1.F23

Diesel engine relay for Smart Components

A1.F25

Terminal: power supply

A1.F26

Voltage converter switch-on signal

BMK Designation

A1.F54

KMC 200: voltage group UB5

A1.F55

KMC 200: voltage group UB6

A1.F58

A1.F59

A1.F67

A1.F68

A1.F69

A1.F70

A1.F71

A1.F79

Voltage converter T1

Voltage converter T2

Urea hose heating 1, 2

Voltage group UB1

Voltage group UB2

Voltage group UB3

SCR heating valve 1, 2

A1.F78

Front function module: voltage group

UB3

Front function module: voltage group

UB4

A1.F80

Radio, CB radio interior lamp door switch

A1.F81

Light control unit: power supply A1.F27

Steering column, radio: background lighting

A1.F28

KMC 200, light control unit: ignition stage 2

A1.F29

Steering column, armrest, function modules, camera system: ignition stage 2

A1.F30

DRC, KRONE SmartConnect: ignition stage 2

A1.F31

Armrest

A1.F87

A1.F88

Front function module: voltage group

UB1

Front function module: voltage group

UB2

A1.F39

A1.F40

A1.F41

A1.F43

A1.F44

A1.F45

A1.F50

A1.F51

A1.F52

Right wiper

Front wiper

Left wiper

CAN module

DRC: continuous voltage

DRC: continuous voltage

KMC 200: voltage group UB1

KMC 200: voltage group UB2

KMC 200: voltage group UB3

A1.F89

Rear function module: voltage group

UB1

A1.F90

Rear function module: voltage group

UB2

A1.F91

Rear function module: voltage group

UB3

A1.F92

Rear function module: voltage group

UB4

A1.F93

Function module: electronics supply

A1.F94

KMC 200: electronics supply

A1.F95

Diagnostic socket: OBD

A1.F96

Steering column, armrest, ladder lighting momentary switch: electronics supply

A1.F97

Ignition lock

A1.F98

DRC, Motor Control Module: electronics supply

A1.F99

Diagnostics socket: ISOBUS,

KRONE

A1.F53

KMC 200: voltage group UB4

370

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

25.1.3

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Disturbances of the electrics/electronics 25.1

Overview sensors

Possible sensors (depending on the machine configuration)

An overview of the position of the sensors, actuators and control units is provided in the circuit diagram.

BMK Designation

B1 Position front mounted mower on left

BMK

B35

Designation

Wheel motor front right

B2 Position front mounted mower on right B36 Wheel motor rear left

B3

B4

B5

B6

Position mower on left

Transport mower left

Position mower on right

Transport mower right

B37

B41

B42

Wheel motor rear right

NOx downstream catalytic converter

NOx upstream catalytic converter

B43 Extraction module urea tank (filling level)

B7

B9

Position rear axle on left

Position front axle

B10 Inclination front mounted mower

B11 Inclination mower on right

B44

B45

B47

B49

Ambient temperature

Coolant filling level

Automatic climate control pressure

Switch central lubrication cycle

B12 Inclination mower on left B51 Exhaust gas temperature upstream of catalytic converter

B53 Air filter contamination B13 Position side shift front mounted mower

B14 Constant pressure B54 Water in fuel

B15 Pressure filter work hydraulics/steering hydraulics

B56 Gearbox oil pressure

B16 Filter pressure control

B17 Brake accumulator pressure

B18 Steering angle rear axle

B19 Parking brake pressure

B20 Steering pressure

B21 Rotational speed front mounted mower

B22 Rotational speed of left mower

B57 Exhaust gas temperature DOC

B58 Camera

B59 Exhaust gas temperature downstream of catalytic converter

B60 Differential pressure sensor SCR filter

B70 Ambient temperature sensor

B71 Blow-out temperature sensor

Oil pressure sensor

B23

B24

B25

B26

B27

Rotational speed auger conveyor on left

Rotational speed of right mower

Rotational speed auger conveyor on right

Rotational speed front cutterbar

Hydraulic oil filling level

M15.

B701

M15.

B702

M15.

B703

M15.

B704

M15.

B707

M15.

B708

Fuel pressure sensor

Charge air pressure sensor

Rail pressure sensor

Charge air temperature sensor

Coolant temperature sensor

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 371

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.1

Disturbances of the electrics/electronics

BMK Designation

B28 Fuel tank filling level

B29 Pressure pump MA

B30 Pressure pump MB

B31 Swivel angle pump

B32 Druck Betriebsbremse

B33 Brake pedal angle

B34 Wheel motor front left

BMK Designation

M15.

B709

Fuel temperature sensor

Crankshaft rotational speed M15.

B711

M15.

B713

M15.

B730

Camshaft rotational speed

Oil temperature

A21.B

1

Air pressure urea

A21.B

2

Urea pressure/temperature

A22.B

1

NH3

25.1.4

Overview of actuators

An overview of the position of the sensors, actuators and control units is provided in the circuit diagram.

BMK Designation

A21.K

1

Urea pump module

BMK

A21.

M1

Designation

Urea pump module

BMK Designation

G1 Alternator

G2 Urea air compressor

BMK Designation

K1

K2

K3

Wheel motor front left

Wheel motor front right

Wheel motor rear left

BMK Designation

M1 Starter

M3 Windscreen water pump

M4

M5

Mirror left

Mirror right on right

BMK

G5

Designation

Central lubrication pump

BMK Designation

K4 Wheel motor rear right

K5

K6

Drive pump forward

Drive pump backward

BMK

M6

M10

M11

M12

Designation

Anti-collision mirror

Left wiper

Right wiper

Automatic climate control compressor

Q3

Q4

Q5

Q6

BMK Designation

Q1 Pressure control valve front mounted mower on left

Q2 Pressure control valve front mounted mower on right

Front mounted mower on left

Front mounted mower on right

BMK

Q24

Q25

Designation

Cutting height on left 2

Cutting height on right 1

Q26 Cutting height right 2

Q27 Swath hood on left

Pressure control valve mower on left Q28 Swath hood on right

Left mower Q29 Side shift front mounted mower 1

372

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

25.2

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit 25.2

BMK Designation

Q7 Pendulum stop mower on left

Q8 Lock mower on left

BMK Designation

Q30 Side shift front mounted mower 1

Q31 Side guard front 1

Q9 Pressure control valve mower on right Q32 Side guard front 2

Q10 Mower right Q33 CR roll distance

Q11 Pendulum stop mower on right

Q12 Lock mower on right

Q34

Q36

CR roll opening

Parking brake

Q13 Drive front mounted mower

Q14 Drive mower on left

Q15 Drive mower on right

Q16 Rear axle

Q17 Front axle

Q18 Pilot valve 1

Q19 Pilot valve 2

Q20 Pressure supply valve

Q21 Cutting height front 1

Q22 Cutting height front 2

Q23 Cutting height on left 1

Q37

Q38

Q39

Q41

Q51

Q52

Q62

Q63

Q64

Q65

Q70

Side shift front mounted mower left

Side shift front mounted mower right

Support cylinder rear axle

Solenoid valve heating

Valve heating urea system 1

Valve heating urea system 2

Steer autopilot on right

Steer autopilot on left

Block autopilot on left

Block autopilot on right

Battery cut-off relay

BMK Designation

M15.

Y703

High-pressure pump volume flow valve

M15.

Y705

Wastegate control valve

M15.

Y707

M15.

Y715

M15.

Y731

High-pressure pump pressure control valve

Exhaust gas flap

Injection nozzle cylinder 1

BMK Designation

M15.

Y732

Injection nozzle cylinder 2

M15.

Y733

Injection nozzle cylinder 3

M15.

Y734

M15.

Y735

M15.

Y736

Injection nozzle cylinder 4

Injection nozzle cylinder 5

Injection nozzle cylinder 6

Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to the use of incorrect and contaminated lubricants

Unauthorised or contaminated lubricants in the central lubrication unit will cause malfunctions in the central lubrication unit and damage the bearing positions.

„ When working on the central lubrication unit, use clean and suitable tools.

„ Use authorised lubricants only.

„ Ensure that dirt or dirty lubricant cannot get into the central lubrication unit.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 373

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.2

Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit

25.2.1

Distributor blocks of central lubrication system

INFO

The distributor blocks have one grease nipple each (red cap) for lubrication with a grease gun if required.

The lubrication point is assigned by the numbers on the lubrication lines to the distributor blocks.

3

2

1

4

5

10 6

9

8

7

BM000-216

Distributor block

1) Main distributor

B1

B3

B4

B5

Lubrication point

A1 Front mounted mower

A2 Rear axle on chassis

A3

A4

A5

Central support

Left mower

Outrigger arm left

Front lifting unit

Rear axle

Mower right

Outrigger arm right

374

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Distributor block

2) Front lifting unit

Distributor block

3) Front mounted mower

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit 25.2

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

Lubrication point

A1 Front axle

A2

A3

Cylinder lift bottom

Cylinder lift top

A4

A5

A6

Cylinder front lift top

Cylinder front lift bottom

Lower link

Front axle

Cylinder lift bottom

Cylinder lift top

Cylinder front lift top

Cylinder front lift bottom

Lower link

Lubrication point

A1 Bearing

A3 Bearing

Distributor block

4) Central support

B2

B3

B4

B5

A6

A7

B1

B6

B7

Lubrication point

A1 Cylinder rod ratchet

A2

A3

A4

A5

Ratchet bearing

Belt tensioner bottom left

Cylinder base ratchet

Lifting cylinder ground

Outrigger bolt rear left

Outrigger bolt front left

Cylinder rod ratchet

Ratchet bearing

Belt tensioner bottom right

Cylinder base ratchet

Lifting cylinder ground

Outrigger bolt rear right

Outrigger bolt front right

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 375

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.2

Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit

Distributor block

5) Outrigger arm side mounted mower right

Lubrication point

A1 Outrigger cylinder

A2

A3

Rod bottom rear

Cutting cylinder base

A4

B2

B3

B4

B5

Cutting cylinder rod

Rod bottom front

Pendulum stop cylinder rod

Pendulum stop cylinder base

Mower bearing

Distributor block

6) Side mounted mower right

Lubrication point

B1 Outer tine rotor

B2 Outer auger conveyor

B3 Inner auger conveyor

376

Distributor block

7) Rear axle

Lubrication point

A1 Cylinder rod running gear

A2

A3

Push rod

Steering knuckle top

A4

B1

B2

Steering knuckle bottom

Cylinder rod running gear

Push rod

B3

B4

B5

Steering knuckle top

Steering knuckle bottom

V-arm

Distributor block Lubrication point

8) Rear axle on chassis A1 Lifting cylinder base right

A2

A3

B1

B2

B3

Axle strut right

V-arm

Lifting cylinder base left

Axle strut left

V-arm

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

External starting of the machine 25.3

Distributor block

9) Outrigger arm

Side mounted mower left

Lubrication point

A1 Outrigger cylinder

A2

A3

Rod bottom rear

Cutting cylinder base

A4

B2

B3

B4

B5

Cutting cylinder rod

Rod bottom front

Pendulum stop cylinder rod

Pendulum stop cylinder base

Mower bearing

Distributor block

10) Side mounted mower left

Lubrication point

A1 Outer tine rotor

A2

A3

Outer auger conveyor

Inner auger conveyor

25.2.2

Searching for the error in the central lubrication system

Jam in the system or at a connected lubrication point

„ Unscrew the outlet screw connections from the main distributor to the subdistributor one after the other. If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when one of the outlet screw connections is loosened, the connected subdistributor is blocked. If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet screw connections, the main distributor is blocked. Clean or replace the main distributor.

„ Reinstall the outlet screw connections.

„ Loosen the outlet screw connections on the blocked subdistributor. If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when unscrewing one of the outlet screw connections, the connected lubrication point is blocked. If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet screw connections, the subdistributor is blocked. Clean or replace the blocked subdistributor.

„ Remove the blockage at the lubrication point.

25.3

External starting of the machine

NOTICE

Damage to the machine by connecting the jump-start battery to the starter

If the jump-start battery for jump-starting the machine is connected to the starter, the starter and the battery will be damaged.

„ Never connect the jump-start battery to the starter.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 377

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.4

Calibrate mower load relief

25.4

378

BM000-016

The power supply of the machine is 24 V. Two 12-volt batteries are connected in series in the battery compartment (4) to supply the vehicle electronics with 24 V.

If necessary the engine can be started with jump leads and an external voltage source (24 V) if required.

The voltage of the external voltage source must correspond to the voltage of the vehicle electronics (24 V).

The vehicle electronics will be damaged if an external voltage source with a higher or lower voltage is used.

Connecting the jump leads

„ The circuit is open (LED on main battery switch is not lit),

see Page 179

.

„ Remove the cover cap (1).

„ First connect the positive cable to the positive pole of the external voltage source, then connect it to the external start connection (3) under the battery compartment (4).

„ Then connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the external voltage source first and then to the ground connection (2) under the battery compartment.

Starting the engine

„

Press the main battery switch to close the circuit, see Page 179 .

Æ The main battery switch LED is lit.

„ Start the engine.

Remove the jump leads after the engine starts

„ Disconnect negative cable from earth connection (2).

„ Disconnect negative cable from negative pole of external voltage source.

„ Disconnect the positive cable from the external start connection (3).

„ Disconnect positive cable from positive pole of external voltage source.

„ Attach the cover cap (1).

Calibrate mower load relief

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine

During the calibration process the machine may move unexpectedly and endanger people.

„ Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone of the machine during the calibration process.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Calibrate traction drive 25.5

Calibrate mower load relief front mounted mower

ü The machine is parked on a stable, horizontal and even surface.

ü The machine height has been moved to the field position.

ü For the "Side shift front mounted mower" version: The front mounted mower is in the central position,

see Page 186

.

ü The mowing functions "Mower load relief calibration front mounted mower" menu has been opened.

„ Press the "Start calibration" key.

„ Lower the front mounted mower to the ground using the control lever,

see Page 97 .

„ Hold down the "Lift front mounted mower" key on the control lever until the message

"Calibration successful" is displayed in the terminal,

see Page 97 .

„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".

Calibrate mower load relief of right side mounted mower

ü The machine is parked on a stable, horizontal and even surface.

ü The machine height has been moved to the field position.

ü The mowing functions menu "Mower load relief right mower" is open.

„ Lower the side mounted mowers to the ground,

see Page 97 .

„ Press the "Start calibration" key.

„

Lower the right side mounted mower using the control lever to the ground, see Page 97 .

„ Hold down the "Right side mounted mower" key until "Calibration successful" is displayed in the terminal,

see Page 97 .

„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".

Calibrate mower load relief of left side mounted mower

ü The machine is parked on a stable, horizontal and even surface.

ü The machine height has been moved to the field position.

ü The mowing functions menu "Mower load relief left mower" is open.

„ Lower the side mounted mowers to the ground,

see Page 97 .

„ Press the "Start calibration" key.

„

Lower the left side mounted mower using the control lever to the ground, see Page 97

.

„ Hold down the "Lift left side mounted mower" key until "Calibration successful" is displayed

in the terminal, see Page 97 .

„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".

Calibrate traction drive 25.5

Check the brake pedal for plausibility

ü The main mode switch is in the "Neutral mode" position.

ü The diesel engine has been started.

ü The travel function menu "Traction drive calibration" is open.

„ To start calibration, press "Start calibration" in the terminal.

„ Fully actuate the brake pedal for several seconds until "Calibration successful" is displayed in the terminal.

„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 379

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.6

Calibrating cutting height

25.6

Calibrating cutting height

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine

During the calibration process the machine may move unexpectedly and endanger people.

„ Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone of the machine during the calibration process.

The horizontal position of the mowers is determined during calibration of the cutting height.

Front mounted mowers

ü The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.

ü The machine height is in field position.

ü The front mowing unit has been lowered onto the ground.

ü

The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position, see Page 101 .

ü The mowing functions "Cutting height calibration front mowing unit" menu has been opened on the terminal.

„ Press on the terminal.

„ Ensure that the position of the top link displayed on the terminal matches the actual position of the top link.

ð The position of the top link displayed on the terminal matches the actual position of the top link.

„ Press "OK" on the terminal.

ð The position of the top link displayed on the terminal does not match the actual position of the top link.

„ Press "Cancel".

„ Set the parameter KMC-60 "Top link position" to the correct position in the Cutting height "Settings" menu.

„ Restarting the calibration.

380

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Calibrating cutting height 25.6

1

BM000-423

„ Position a spirit level (1) transversely on the cutterbar between 2 mowing discs.

„ Align the cutterbar horizontally by adjusting the cutting height on the terminal with

.

„ As soon as the cutterbar has been aligned horizontally, press "OK".

„ To complete calibration, press "OK".

or

Left side mounted mower

ü The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.

ü The machine height is in field position.

ü The left side mounted mower has been lowered onto the ground.

ü The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position.

ü The mowing functions "Cutting height calibration left mower" menu has been opened on the terminal.

„ Press on the terminal.

1

BM000-423

„ Position a spirit level (1) transversely on the cutterbar between 2 mowing discs.

„ Align the cutterbar horizontally by adjusting the cutting height on the terminal with

.

„ As soon as the cutterbar has been aligned horizontally, press "OK".

„ To complete calibration, press "OK".

or

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 381

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.7

Finely calibrating the cutting height

Right side mounted mower

ü The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.

ü The machine height is in field position.

ü The right side mounted mower has been lowered onto the ground.

ü The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position.

ü The mowing functions "Cutting height calibration right mower" menu has been opened on the terminal.

„ Press on the terminal.

1

25.7

BM000-423

„ Position a spirit level (1) transversely on the cutterbar between 2 mowing discs.

„ Align the cutterbar horizontally by adjusting the cutting height on the terminal with

.

„ As soon as the cutterbar has been aligned horizontally, press "OK".

„ To complete calibration, press "OK".

or

Finely calibrating the cutting height

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine

During the calibration process the machine may move unexpectedly and endanger people.

„ Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone of the machine during the calibration process.

The fine calibration optimises the cutting height adjustment of the mowers.

382

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

25.8

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Calibrating end positions of the mowers 25.8

Front mounted mowers

ü The front mowing unit is in headland position.

ü The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position.

ü The mowing functions "Cutting height fine calibration front mowing unit" menu has been opened.

„ Press on the terminal.

Æ Fine calibration is run.

„ To complete calibration, press "OK".

Left side mounted mower

ü The left side mounted mower is in headland position.

ü The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position.

ü The mowing functions "Cutting height fine calibration left mower" menu has been opened.

„ Press on the terminal.

Æ Fine calibration is run.

„ To complete calibration, press "OK".

Right side mounted mower

ü The right side mounted mower is in headland position.

ü The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position.

ü The mowing functions "Cutting height fine calibration right mower" menu has been opened.

„ Press on the terminal.

Æ Fine calibration is run.

„ To complete calibration, press "OK".

Calibrating end positions of the mowers

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine

During the calibration process the machine may move unexpectedly and endanger people.

„ Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone of the machine during the calibration process.

This calibration determines the upper end positions and the working position of the mowers.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 383

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.8

Calibrating end positions of the mowers

Front mounted mowers

ü The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.

ü The machine height is in field position.

ü The mowing functions "Calibration front mowing unit" menu has been called up on the terminal.

„ To start the calibration process, press on the terminal.

„ To lower the front mowing unit into working position, press the front mowing unit is in the lower end position.

on the control lever until

If the lower links of the front mowing unit do not lower evenly, control the lower links separately, to do this:

„ Lower the left lower link by simultaneously pressing the key and the "M1" key.

„ Lower the right lower link by simultaneously pressing the

„ Press "OK”.

„ Raise the left lower link by simultaneously pressing the

key and the "M2" key.

„ To raise the front mowing unit, press in the upper end position.

on the control lever until the front mowing unit is

If the lower links of the front mowing unit do not raise evenly, control the lower links separately, to do this:

key and the "M1" key.

„ Raise the right lower link by simultaneously pressing the

„ Press "OK”.

key and the "M2" key.

Left side mounted mower

ü The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.

ü The machine height is in field position.

ü The mowing functions "Side mounted mowers calibration left mower" menu has been opened.

„ Unlock the pendulum stop.

„ Lower both side mounted mowers onto the ground so that the machine is not at an incline.

„ Set the cutting height of the left side mounted mower to +2 °.

„ Close the swath hoods.

„ Lock the pendulum stop.

„ To start the calibration process, press on the terminal.

384

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Calibrating end positions of the mowers 25.8

„ To lower the left side mounted mower into working position, press until the side mounted mower is in the lower end position.

„ Press "OK”.

„ To raise the left side mounted mower, press mounted mower is in the upper end position.

„ Press "OK”.

on the control lever

on the control lever until the left side

Right side mounted mower

ü The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.

ü The machine height is in field position.

ü The mowing functions "Side mounted mowers calibration right mower" menu has been opened.

„ Unlock the pendulum stop.

„ Lower both side mounted mowers onto the ground so that the machine is not at an incline.

„ Set the cutting height of the right side mounted mower to +2 °.

„ Close the swath hoods.

„ Lock the pendulum stop. To start the calibration process, press on the terminal.

„ To lower the right side mounted mower into working position, press lever until the side mounted mower is in the lower end position.

„ Press "OK”.

on the control

on the control lever until the side „ To raise the right side mounted mower, press mounted mower is in the upper end position.

„ Press "OK”.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 385

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.9

Car jack contact points

25.9

Car jack contact points

WARNING

Risk of injury due to raised machine

There is danger to persons when the machine drops or parts swing without control. Only qualified personnel are allowed to perform this work.

„ Use only permitted hoists and slings with a sufficient load-bearing capacity.

„ Note the information on the suspension points provided.

„ Make sure the lifting means are properly secured.

„ Never stay under the suspended machine.

„

If work has to be performed under the machine, securely support the machine, see

Page 31 .

The car jack contact points may be used for changing wheels only; for reasons of stability, only one car jack contact point may be used.

For jacking up the machine,

see Page 387

.

ü The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.

ü The axles are fully lowered.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 31

.

1

2

386

3

BM000-439

1 Car jack contact point front axle on right

2 Car jack contact point front axle on left

3 Car jack contact point rear axle

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Jacking up the machine 25.10

25.10

Jacking up the machine

WARNING

Danger to life caused by machine movement!

If the machine is not raised by means of a suitable hoist and if it is not securely supported, it may move unintentionally. As a result, persons can be seriously injured or killed.

Only qualified personnel are allowed to perform this work.

„ When selecting the hoist, observe the axle loads on the type plate.

„ Only use jack stands with a permitted load-carrying capacity of at least 15 tonnes.

„ Only use hoists and jack stands with suitable holder and sufficiently dimensioned supporting surface.

„ Ensure sufficiently dimensioned contact surface for hoist and jack stand.

„

Securely support the raised machine, see Page 31 .

Jack up the front wheel

1

2

3

BM000-345

„ Set the main mode switch to the "Maintenance mode" position.

„

Lower the axles completely, see Page 99

.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Depending on which front wheel is to be jacked up, position the hoist (1) on the relevant side and insert it from the front under the front axle (3). In doing so, ensure that the jack stand is positioned at the outer edge of the front axle.

„ Lift the front axle using the hoist (1) until the wheel can rotate freely.

„ Safely support the front axle (3) on the lifted side using a jack stand (2) at the furthest possible outside point.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 387

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.10 Jacking up the machine

Jack up rear axle

1

1

2

3

3

4

BM000-348

„ Set the main mode switch to the "Maintenance mode" position.

„

Lower the axles completely, see Page 99

.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 31

.

„ Lift the machine with a hoist (4) from behind from below the middle of the rear axle (2) until the distance between the rear wheels and the ground is approx. 5 cm.

„ Safely support the machine from the side by placing jack stands (1, 3) under the main frame.

„ Remove the hoist (4).

ð The rear axle lowers slightly.

1

388

BM000-090

2

3

1

4

2

3

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Jacking up the machine 25.10

NOTE! Damage to the machine by lifting the rear axle too high above the V-arm (1). Only lift the rear axle above the V-arm (2) until the pendulum stop (3) is against the stop (2).

„ Lift the rear axle using a hoist (4) from the side (between the mower and rear axle) as far back as possible below the V-arm (1) until the wheels can rotate freely.

1

2

BM000-091

„ Use at least one jack stand (2) below the rear axle (1) to ensure the widest possible safe support.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 389

26 Waste disposal

26 Waste disposal

After the service life of the machine has expired, the individual components of the machine must be disposed of properly. The currently applicable country-specific waste disposal directives and the concerning valid laws must be observed.

Metal parts

• All metal parts must be brought to a metal recycling centre.

• The parts must be freed from operating fluids and lubricants (gearbox oil, oil from hydraulic system, ...) before being scrapped.

• The operating fluids and lubricants must be brought separately to an environmentally friendly disposal point or recycling centre.

Operating fluids and lubricants

• Operating fluids and lubricants (diesel fuel, coolant, gearbox oil, oil from hydraulic system,

…) must be brought to a disposal point for waste oil.

Synthetic materials

• All synthetic materials must be brought to a recycling centre for synthetic materials.

Rubber

• Rubber parts (hoses, tyres, …) must be brought to a rubber recycling centre.

Electronic scrap

• All electronic parts must be brought to a disposal point for electronic scrap.

390

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Index 27

27 Index

Icons

"Control units overview" menu.......................... 222

"Day counter" menu.......................................... 218

"Error history" menu ......................................... 221

"Navigation scroll wheel" function..................... 200

“Active Errors” menu......................................... 220

“Counters” menu .............................................. 212

“Customer Counter” menu................................ 212

“Diagnostics” menu explanation ....................... 240

“Error” menu ..................................................... 220

“Total Counter” menu ....................................... 219

numerical

12 V sockets ..................................................... 110

A

Activating cruise control ................................... 173

Activating horn.................................................... 82

Actuating headlamp flasher ................................ 85

Actuating service brake ...................................... 87

Additional equipment and spare parts ................ 18

Adjustable air nozzles ...................................... 131

Adjusting GPS guidance .................................. 163

Adjusting outside rear-view mirrors .................... 94

Adjusting overlapping and beds ....................... 164

Adjusting the scraper sheet .............................. 258

Adjusting track detection and steering response

......................................................................... 197

Airborne noise emission ..................................... 74

Air-cushioned comfort seat............................... 122

Ambient temperature .......................................... 74

Applicable documents ........................................ 10

Applying parking brake ..................................... 176

Automatic climate control ................................. 103

Automatic steering system ............................... 209

B

Basic safety instructions ..................................... 17

Batteries ........................................................... 354

Behavior in the case of voltage flashover of

overhead lines .................................................... 26

Behaviour after the engine has stalled ............. 170

Behaviour in dangerous situations and in case of

accidents ............................................................ 31

Bringing up menu level ..................................... 238

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 391

27 Index

C

Cabin ................................................................ 121

Calibrate mower load relief............................... 378

Calibrate traction drive ..................................... 379

Calibrating cutting height .................................. 380

Calibrating end positions of the mowers .......... 383

Car jack contact points ..................................... 386

Carrying out a visual inspection at the receiver/

dryer ................................................................. 299

Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter

element changes safely...................................... 32

Central lubrication unit

Fill lubricant tank .................................... 345

Change kraftband "belt drive of front mounted

mower" ............................................................. 320

Changing blades for the “blade quick fastener”

version .............................................................. 326

Changing blades for the “blade screw connection”

version .............................................................. 325

Changing high-pressure filter ........................... 352

Changing kraftband “belt drive side mounted

mowers”............................................................ 316

Changing the oil ....................................... 363, 364

Changing/saving parameter ............................. 239

Charging batteries ............................................ 355

Check before start-up ....................................... 121

Check filling level.............................................. 346

Check guard cloths........................................... 332

Check pipework of the engine cooling system and

the charge air ................................................... 292

Check pipework of the exhaust aftertreatment

system .............................................................. 293

Check/change blades ....................................... 324

Checking attachment of steering cylinder ........ 303

Checking deflector sheets ................................ 251

Checking engine oil level.................................. 280

Checking engine piping .................................... 291

Checking fitting of track rod .............................. 303

Checking fuel lines ........................................... 293

Checking hydraulic hoses ................................ 352

Checking kraftband .................................. 304, 312

Checking lockings of lateral mowers ................ 167

392

Checking pipework in the air conditioning and

heating system ................................................. 291

Checking pipework of the air intake ................. 292

Checking pulley ........................................ 304, 312

Checking side guards of lateral mowers .......... 167

Checking the belt tension ................................. 305

Checking the blade for wear............................. 324

Checking the condition and filling quantity of

refrigerant ......................................................... 300

Checking the engine coolant level.................... 290

Checking the fire extinguisher .......................... 308

Checking the hub cover of the rear axle, with front

wheel drive version........................................... 304

Checking the tines on the tine conditioner ....... 321

Checking/adjusting the belt tension of the front

mounted mower conditioner drive .................... 313

Checking/maintaining tyres .............................. 306

Checking/refilling windscreen washer system .. 297

Checking/replacing linings on cutterbar ........... 327

Checking/setting belt tension of auger drive .... 315

Checking/setting belt tension of fan drive and

exhaust fan ....................................................... 305

Checking/setting belt tension of rotating screen

drive.................................................................. 306

Checking/setting locking of side guards ........... 253

Checklist for initial operation ............................ 112

Chemicals........................................................... 25

Children in danger .............................................. 18

Cigarette lighter 12 V/24 V socket .................... 109

Cleaning air filter .............................................. 294

Cleaning and maintaining batteries .................. 354

Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment......... 302

Cleaning dust discharge valve ......................... 295

Cleaning engine compartment with compressed air

......................................................................... 279

Cleaning fuel tank............................................. 282

Cleaning the machine....................................... 275

Climbing up and down safely ............................. 28

Coming Home function ....................................... 93

Commissioning – mowing operation ................ 135

Components of air conditioning ........................ 298

Connecting a battery ........................................ 357

Connecting the front mounted mower .............. 135

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Index 27

Consumables ............................................... 24, 75

Contact ................................................................. 2

Contact data of your dealer .................................. 2

Contamination of hydraulic system and/or fuel

system ................................................................ 24

Content of the storage compartments on the

machine .............................................................. 66

Control and Display Elements ............................ 79

Control and display elements on the keypad ..... 99

Control and display elements on the steering

column ................................................................ 82

Control of moving machine................................. 19

Control of the machine during operation ............ 19

Conversion table ................................................ 13

Coolant ............................................................... 77

Cooling box (version with "Insulated thermobox")

......................................................................... 133

Creating a surface ............................................ 215

Creating customer data record ......................... 213

Cross references ................................................ 10

Cruise control ................................................... 173

Cutterbar .......................................................... 322

Cutterbar side mounted mowers ...................... 330

D

Damaged compressor unit ................................. 27

Damaged hydraulic hoses .................................. 28

Danger associated with welding work ................ 30

Danger resulting from damage to the machine .. 20

Danger when driving on road and field............... 23

Danger zone between (self-propelled) mower

conditioner and mowers ..................................... 21

Danger zone due to trailing machine parts......... 22

Danger zone ejected objects .............................. 22

Danger zone PTO shaft...................................... 21

Danger zone universal shaft............................... 21

Danger zone when drive is switched on ............. 22

Danger zones ..................................................... 20

Dangers arising from environment ..................... 25

Dangers during road travel ................................. 23

Dangers if the machine is not prepared properly for

road travel .......................................................... 23

Dangers in connection with certain activities:

checking and charging batteries......................... 30

Dangers in connection with certain activities:

climbing up and down......................................... 28

Dangers in connection with certain activities:

Working on the machine..................................... 29

Dangers in connection with certain activities:

working on wheels and tyres .............................. 30

Dangers when operating the machine on slopes 24

Data memory ...................................................... 64

Deactivating cruise control ............................... 174

Decoupling the front mounted mower .............. 139

Deleting a surface ............................................ 216

Description display ........................................... 199

Description of the keys ..................................... 200

Diagnostics sockets.......................................... 111

Dimensions......................................................... 73

Direct input “Field mode” .................................. 224

Directories and references ................................. 10

Dirt deposits in engine compartment ................ 279

Disconnecting the batteries .............................. 355

Dismounting belt pulleys .................................. 256

Dismounting the "swathing" components ......... 151

Dismounting the bottom flap............................. 262

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 393

27 Index

Dismounting the cross conveyor ...................... 158

Dismounting the side mounted mowers ........... 144

Dismounting the universal shaft from the front

mounted mower................................................ 140

Dismounting the universal shaft on the side

mounted mower................................................ 147

Dismounting/mounting the conditioner drive guard

......................................................................... 310

Dismounting/mounting the guard for the front

mounted mower input gearbox ......................... 311

Dismounting/mounting the guard of the auger drive

......................................................................... 311

Display design .................................................. 198

Display for acceleration behavior (1) ................ 228

Display for cruise control (5)............................. 230

Distributor blocks of central lubrication system 374

Disturbances of the electrics/electronics .......... 367

Drain condensation water from the water separator

of the fuel prefilter............................................. 283

Draining water and sediments .......................... 282

Drawer for first-aid kit and operating instructions

......................................................................... 133

Driver's seat...................................................... 122

Driving and Transport ....................................... 166

Driving backward and stopping ........................ 174

Driving forwards and stopping .......................... 172

E

Electrical system ................................................ 74

Engine and driving data display range ............. 225

Engine coolant.................................................. 289

Engine data ........................................................ 73

Engine oil level ................................................. 280

Engine overview ............................................... 279

Ensuring functionality of safety devices ............. 22

Environmental protection and disposal .............. 25

External starting of the machine ....................... 377

F

Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)

......................................................................... 188

Field Mode........................................................ 184

Field mode on slopes ....................................... 185

Figures ............................................................... 11

Filling the lubricant tank.................................... 345

Finely calibrating the cutting height .................. 382

Fire extinguisher ................................................. 63

Fire hazard ......................................................... 25

Fitting wheel chocks ......................................... 178

Fold down the front guard ................................ 192

Folding down side guards into working position

......................................................................... 191

Folding up side guards into transport position.. 191

Folding up the front guard ................................ 192

Folding up/folding down side guards ................ 190

Front guard ....................................................... 192

Front mounted mower cutterbar ....................... 328

Fuel is harmful .................................................... 25

Fuel prefilter/water separator ........................... 283

Fuel/urea ............................................................ 78

Function description of swath width CV ............. 72

Functional description of GNSS receiver ........... 70

Functional description of GPS guidance ............ 71

Functional description of parallel tracking .......... 71

Functional description of self-propelled mower

conditioner .......................................................... 70

G

General aspects ............................................... 132

H

Hot liquids........................................................... 27

Hot surfaces ....................................................... 28

How to use this document .................................. 10

Hydraulic oil ...................................................... 349

394

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Index 27

I

Icons in figures ................................................... 11

Icons in the text .................................................. 11

Ignition lock ...................................................... 102

Impact damage protection system ................... 261

Importance of operating instructions .................. 17

Increasing cutting height at front mounted mower

with high-cut skids ............................................ 249

Increasing the cutting height at the side mounted

mowers by means of high-cut skids ................. 259

Indicator and warning lamps .............................. 86

Indicator lamp for direction of travel and parking

brake (2) ........................................................... 229

Indicator lamp for machine height (6) ............... 230

Indicator lamp for PowerSplit (3) ...................... 229

Indicator lamp for traction control system (TC) (4)

......................................................................... 229

Information area ............................................... 225

Information for enquiries and orders .............. 2, 69

Information labels on the machine ..................... 53

Information on direction ...................................... 11

Information on This Document ........................... 10

Initial operation ................................................. 112

Input window .................................................... 201

Inside rear mirror .............................................. 132

Installing batteries ............................................ 357

Installing the blades.......................................... 119

Instructional seat .............................................. 132

Intended use....................................................... 16

Interior lighting .................................................... 96

J

Jack up rear axle .............................................. 388

Jack up the front wheel .................................... 387

Jacking up the machine.................................... 387

Jobs on the machine .......................................... 19

K

Keep cabin free of chemicals ............................. 25

Keys in the title bar ........................................... 211

L

Labelling ............................................................. 68

Ladder lighting .................................................... 92

Lashing the machine ........................................ 182

Leaving Home function....................................... 92

Life-threatening electric shock from overhead lines

........................................................................... 26

Lifting points on the mowers............................. 335

Light control unit ................................................. 88

Lighting ............................................................... 88

Lighting and labeling ........................................ 122

Lighting for refuelling .......................................... 93

Liquids under high pressure ............................... 27

Location and meaning of the information labels . 54

Locking screws on the gearboxes .................... 275

Lubricants ......................................................... 344

Lubricate the intermediate gear........................ 340

Lubricating grease .............................................. 77

Lubricating universal shafts .............................. 338

Lubrication chart - machine .............................. 341

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 395

27 Index

M

Machine Description ........................................... 65

Machine overview............................................... 65

Main battery switch........................................... 179

Main menu........................................................ 224

Main mode switch............................................. 101

Maintain main gearbox of side mounted mowers

......................................................................... 364

Maintaining air conditioning and heating .......... 298

Maintaining belt drives.............................. 304, 312

Maintaining chassis .......................................... 303

Maintaining hydraulic oil tank ........................... 349

Maintaining input gearbox of front mounted mower

......................................................................... 362

Maintaining main gearbox of front mounted mower

......................................................................... 363

Maintaining starter ............................................ 358

Maintaining the charge ..................................... 355

Maintaining transfer gearbox ............................ 360

Maintaining tyres and wheels ........................... 306

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox........................ 365

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox front/right ....... 365

Maintenance – 6 times after every 10 hours .... 266

Maintenance – After the season....................... 265

Maintenance - as required................................ 272

Maintenance – at the beginning of the cold season

......................................................................... 267

Maintenance – Basic Machine ......................... 297

Maintenance – Before the season.................... 264

Maintenance – Central Lubrication System...... 344

Maintenance – Electrics ................................... 353

Maintenance - Engine ...................................... 278

Maintenance - every 1,000 hours but at least at the

end of the season ............................................. 271

Maintenance – Every 1,000 hours, but at least

before the season............................................. 271

Maintenance - Every 10 hours, but at least once a

day.................................................................... 267

Maintenance - every 100 hours ........................ 269

Maintenance – Every 2 years ........................... 272

Maintenance – Every 2,000 hours.................... 272

Maintenance - every 250 hours ........................ 269

396

Maintenance - Every 50 hours ......................... 268

Maintenance - Every 500 hours ....................... 270

Maintenance - Gearbox .................................... 359

Maintenance - General Information .................. 263

Maintenance - Hydraulic System...................... 348

Maintenance - Lubrication ................................ 338

Maintenance – mowing units ............................ 310

Maintenance - once after 1 hour ...................... 266

Maintenance – Once after 1,000 km ................ 267

Maintenance - Once after 50 hours .................. 266

Maintenance – Once after 500 hours ............... 266

Maintenance and repair work ............................. 29

Maintenance lighting .......................................... 93

Maintenance table ............................................ 264

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy ..................... 367

Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit ....... 373

Malfunctions indicated on display..................... 108

Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning

panel................................................................. 209

Manual settings ................................................ 243

Manually setting the evaporator fan speed ...... 107

Means of representation..................................... 11

Menu "key test" explanation ............................. 241

Menu structure ................................................. 231

Metric thread screws with control thread .......... 272

Metric thread screws with countersunk head and

hexagon socket ................................................ 274

Metric thread screws with fine thread ............... 273

Mounting / dismounting "swath width CV"

components ...................................................... 153

Mounting components "swathing" .................... 148

Mounting fire extinguisher ................................ 113

Mounting guard cloths ...................................... 113

Mounting licence plate...................................... 113

Mounting the anti-twist lock on the lighting module

......................................................................... 120

Mounting the belt pulleys.................................. 257

Mounting the cross conveyor ........................... 155

Mounting the rear weight .................................. 161

Mounting the side mounted mowers ................ 141

Mounting the universal shaft on the front mounted

mower shaft ...................................................... 138

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Index 27

Mounting the universal shaft on the side mounted

mower............................................................... 144

Moving front mounted mower into the central

position ............................................................. 186

Moving support jack into support position ........ 194

Moving support jack into transport position ...... 193

N

Navigating in menus ......................................... 239

Navigation module............................................ 199

Navigation scroll wheel..................................... 200

Noise may damage your health.......................... 27

Notes with information and recommendations ... 13

Notices on driving the machine ........................ 172

O

Observing indicator and warning lamps ........... 170

Oil level inspection and oil change on the cutter

bar .................................................................... 328

Oils ..................................................................... 75

On-board instructors when using the machine for

work (passenger seat) ........................................ 19

Only perform work when the machine is at

standstill ............................................................. 29

Opening doors and windows of cabin ................ 79

Opening right side window ................................. 79

Opening the cabin door ...................................... 80

Operate input window....................................... 202

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for

"ACTIVO" version)............................................ 125

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for

"Standard" version)........................................... 123

Operating driver's seat (for ACTIVO version)... 125

Operating driver's seat (for standard version) .. 123

Operating elements on control lever .................. 97

Operating GPS guidance ................................. 196

Operating mowers ............................................ 186

Operating SectionControl ................................. 195

Operating support jack ..................................... 193

Operation.......................................................... 184

Operation alphanumeric input field................... 213

Operation only after proper commissioning........ 19

Operational safety: Technically sound condition 19

Overload protection on the machine .................. 69

Overview of actuators....................................... 372

Overview of automatic climate control.............. 103

Overview of control units .................................. 367

Overview of fuses ............................................. 367

Overview of gearboxes..................................... 359

Overview of operating elements ......................... 79

Overview sensors ............................................. 371

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 397

27 Index

P

Parking the machine......................................... 180

Parking the machine safely ................................ 24

Passengers ........................................................ 19

Performing a visual inspection ......................... 352

Personal protective equipment ........................... 22

Personnel qualification of the operating personnel

........................................................................... 17

Personnel qualification of the technicians .......... 18

Possible terminals ............................................ 201

PowerSplit ........................................................ 194

Preparing the machine for road travel .............. 166

Preparing the machine for shipment ................ 182

Pressure limiting valves.................................... 348

Q

Quick-stop switch ............................................. 102

R

Raised machine and machine parts ................... 29

Raising mowers ................................................ 335

Re-adjust the transport lock ............................. 308

Reasonably foreseeable misuse ........................ 16

Recommended procedure ................................ 196

Recovering the Machine................................... 180

Refrigerant (air conditioning) .............................. 77

Refuelling ......................................................... 284

Release the parking brake manually ................ 181

Relieving/tensioning belt drive of auger drive... 315

Removing and mounting swath flaps right/left.. 250

Removing batteries .......................................... 356

Removing the machine wheels ........................ 183

Removing the rear weight ................................ 162

Renaming surface ............................................ 215

Re-ordering ........................................................ 10

Replacing batteries........................................... 355

Replacing/cleaning circulation filter .................. 301

Replacing/cleaning fresh air filter ..................... 301

Retighten wheel nuts ........................................ 307

Road safety ........................................................ 23

Road travel lighting....................................... 67, 89

Rotary hub ........................................................ 322

Running actuator test ......................................... 32

398

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Index 27

S

Safety ................................................................. 16

Safety features ................................................... 60

Safety labels on the machine ............................. 33

Safety markings on the machine ........................ 23

Safety routines ................................................... 31

Save cutting height 1 and cutting height 2 ....... 244

Saving mower relief 1 and mower relief 2 ........ 246

Saving speed for operation with cruise control. 173

Scope of the document ...................................... 11

Searching for the error in the central lubrication

system .............................................................. 377

SectionControl .................................................. 209

SectionControl function description .................... 71

Securing raised machine and machine parts

against lowering ................................................. 31

Selection window.............................................. 203

Service life of the machine ................................. 17

Set conditioner speed....................................... 248

Setting cabin temperature ................................ 105

Setting cutting height ........................................ 244

Setting driver’s seat .......................................... 122

Setting in the terminal....................................... 243

Setting mirror ...................................................... 94

Setting swath width .......................................... 250

Setting the acceleration behaviour ................... 171

Setting the anti-collision mirror ........................... 95

Setting the auger speed ................................... 254

Setting the conditioner speed ........................... 254

Setting the degree of conditioning ............ 249, 259

Setting the lifting height at the front mounted

mower............................................................... 251

Setting the mower relief.................................... 245

Setting the side guards on the front mounted

mower............................................................... 247

Setting the side guards on the side mounted

mowers ............................................................. 252

Setting the terminal .......................................... 130

Setting wide spreading ............................. 249, 260

Setting wide spreading sheet ........................... 261

Settings ............................................................ 243

Settings on front mounted mower .................... 247

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

Settings on the side mounted mowers ............. 252

Shutting down and safeguarding the machine ... 31

Shutting down the diesel engine ...................... 295

SMV emblem ...................................................... 62

Sockets............................................................. 109

Sources of danger on the machine .................... 27

Starting and stopping surface counter.............. 217

Starting engine ................................................. 168

Starting intermediate lubrication ....................... 346

Starting up the machine ................................... 171

Start-up............................................................. 121

Status line......................................................... 206

Steering column adjustment ............................. 129

Steering column switch ...................................... 82

Stopping machine by using control lever.......... 175

Stopping machine with the service brake ......... 176

Stopping the machine....................................... 174

Structural modifications on the machine ............ 18

Sun visor .......................................................... 131

Switching air conditioning mode on/off ............. 106

Switching and saving working lights via “Memory”

key ...................................................................... 91

Switching direction indicators on/off ................... 83

Switching full beam on/off .................................. 84

Switching mirror heating on/off ........................... 96

Switching off the engine ................................... 178

Switching on automatic climate control ............ 104

Switching parking light/dipped beam on/off ........ 83

Switching REHEAT mode on/off ...................... 106

Switching temperature display between degrees

Celsius and degrees Fahrenheit ...................... 108

Switching the flashing warning light on/off ......... 87

Switching the mower drive on and off .............. 188

Switching windshield wipers on/off ..................... 85

399

27 Index

T

Target group of this document ........................... 10

Technical Data ................................................... 73

Technical limit values ......................................... 20

Technically permitted maximum speed (road

travel) ................................................................. 73

Technically sound state of the machine ............. 19

Tensioning/detensioning the conditioner drive belt

tension front mounted mower ........................... 313

Term “machine” .................................................. 11

Terminal ........................................................... 198

Terminal – Menus............................................. 231

Terminal machine functions ............................. 205

Tighten the screw connections on the central

support/chassis ................................................ 307

Tightening torques............................................ 272

Top up the engine coolant ................................ 290

Topping up engine oil ....................................... 281

Topping up fresh water..................................... 133

Topping up urea solution .................................. 286

Toxic exhaust gases........................................... 28

Traction drive...................................................... 74

Traction drive indicator lights............................ 228

Transport position............................................. 166

Tyres................................................................... 78

U

Unsuitable consumables .................................... 24

Urea filter .......................................................... 285

USB connection................................................ 111

V

Validity ................................................................ 10

Vent friction clutch ............................................ 333

Vent fuel filter ................................................... 288

Vibration values .................................................. 74

Viewing current surface data ............................ 217

W

Warning beacons ............................................... 91

Warning lamps – urea quality, errors or manipulation on the exhaust aftertreatment system

......................................................................... 211

Warning lamps – urea tank filling level ............. 210

Warning lamps for engine and fuel levels ........ 226

Warning signs..................................................... 12

Warnings of property damage/environmental

damage .............................................................. 13

Waste disposal ................................................. 390

Weights .............................................................. 73

Wiper on left/on right .......................................... 94

Working at or on heights of the machine ............ 29

Working lights ............................................... 67, 90

Working position ............................................... 185

400

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us

This page has been left blank deliberately.

BiG M 450 CV

Original operating instructions 150000762_08_us 401

Maschinenfabrik

Bernard Krone GmbH & Co. KG

* Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10

D-48480 Spelle

* Postfach 11 63

D-48478 Spelle

' +49 (0) 59 77 / 935-0

6 +49 (0) 59 77 / 935-339

ü

www.landmaschinen.krone.de

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Key Features

  • 4.5-meter cutting width for efficient mowing of large areas
  • Heavy-duty cutter bar for a clean and precise cut
  • Can be used for both fresh cutting and silage production
  • Hydraulic lift for easy adjustment of cutting height
  • Central lubrication system for easy maintenance
  • Foldable side guards for compact transport
  • Large tires for excellent traction and stability
  • Comfortable operator's seat for long working days

Related manuals

Frequently Answers and Questions

What is the cutting width of the Krone BA BiG M 450 CV?
The cutting width is 4.5 meters.
Can the mower conditioner be used for both fresh cutting and silage production?
Yes, the mower conditioner can be used for both fresh cutting and silage production.
Does the mower conditioner have a hydraulic lift?
Yes, the mower conditioner has a hydraulic lift for easy adjustment of cutting height.
Does the mower conditioner have a central lubrication system?
Yes, the mower conditioner has a central lubrication system for easy maintenance.
Are the side guards foldable?
Yes, the side guards are foldable for compact transport.
What is the size of the tires?
The mower conditioner has large tires for excellent traction and stability.
Is the operator's seat comfortable?
Yes, the mower conditioner has a comfortable operator's seat for long working days.

advertisement

Table of contents